Home

EN / ACS880 primary control program firmware manual

1. 362 Master Follower communication l Follower oo 363 Further information Product and service inquiries leen 365 3019 UNANO ob xuda s b vas 365 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 365 Document library on the Internet 365 10 Table of contents Introduction to the manual 11 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains This chapter describes the contents of the manual It also contains information on the compatibility safety and intended audience Applicability This manual applies to the ACS880 primary control program version 1 20 or later The firmware version of the control program is visible in parameter 07 05 Firmware version or the System info in the main menu on the control panel Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive Read the complete safety instructions before you install commission or use the drive The complete safety instructions are delivered with the drive as either part of the Hardware manual or in the case of ACS880 multidrives as a separate document e Read the firmware function specific warnings and notes before changing parameter values These warnings and notes are included in the parameter descriptions presented in chapter Parameters Target audience This manual is intended for people who design commission
2. VAGO Snqpl l i puewwos cuanba j juejsuo ja cuanba juejsuo 5 Al uopoajss uonounj Aouenbeu juejsuo2 LzZ ez anea yes jJuejsuo 2182 ena Z Ies juejsuo2 ez gz nea Jes juejsuo2 zz gz enter juejsuo 82 82 anea Z juejsuo Z7 9Z O 540 9292 O K 0 ante 2 juejsuo 292 ent 9 juejsuo Le gc ent G juejsuo 0 8z ante y KouenbaJJ juejsuo 6292 anen juejsuo 8292 Z 1uejsuo Z 9Z amen L Aouenbajj 1uejsuo 9282 Al uoneps g jas JUe SUOD pz gc Al uomajes 2 95 Aouenbau 1uejsuo ez gz Al uonsajag as 3uejsuO ZZ 97 mass uonoejes z 1je1 bay 7182 4 joe fouenbeJ4 96 9Z 126 zjeJ ouanbaly L6 9z uono l s uono y s zjeJ A u nb l i 2182 anJeA 106 Lal Aou nb l i 06 82 a uonoe es uonoe es Lal AouenbojJ 1182 Control chain diagrams 359 Frequency reference modification np s osez no dwey 114 10790 paduue jos Aou nb l i Z0 8Z D uon l s ene UI due 19 fouenbei4 10
3. 218 Parameters Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 44 07 Brake acknowledge Activates deactivates and selects the source for brake No selection open close status acknowledgement supervision acknowledge When a brake control error unexpected state of the acknowledgement signal is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 44 17 Brake fault function O Brake open 1 Brake closed A im 2 N No acknowledge Brake open closed supervision disabled Di 100201 delayed salas bU 3 ECKE Bs tgiatimpu Dia 100201 delayed sas 2 S o ynarimuD n 100211 delayed ssns ir 6 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 e Biota input 06 100201 delayed s s BB e Stume election see Terms and abbreviations on page 80 44 08 Brake open delay Defines the brake open delay e the delay between the 0 00 s internal open brake command and the release of motor speed control The delay timer starts when the drive has magnetized the motor and increased the motor torque to the level required for brake release parameter 44 03 Brake open torque reference Simultaneously with the timer start the brake control logic energizes the brake control output and the brake starts to open Set this parameter to the value of mechanical opening delay specified by the brake manufacturer
4. 340 The state diagram vio cr ar R io a a sn de 341 Setting up the drive for fieldbus control 342 Parameter setting example FPBA PROFIBUS DD 22 343 11 Drive to drive link 12 Control chain diagrams What this Chapter contains 347 Speed reference source selectionl 348 Table of contents Y Speed reference source selection ll 349 Speed reference ramping and shaping 0 cc ee ees 350 Motor feedback configuration 351 Speed error calculation 352 Speed controller 353 Torque reference source selection and modification 354 Reference selection for torque controller1 355 Reference selection for torque controller ll 2 356 Torque IMILSION 4252529 39mm AE E 35 Frequency reference selection 358 Frequency reference modification 359 Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection 360 PROCESS PID COMMONUGCE EEN 361 Master Follower communication Master
5. 45 PROCESS PID CONWO coras me pra de ase o Hee Ee SES 45 Mechanical brake control 48 DC voltade COMMON 225424 m oa oe bo s a ob SENS eee A 53 Overvoltage Control aaaea 53 Undervoltage control ars 53 Voltage control and trip limits o4 Blake CODD ve va E ET GS Hae eG EE bes EE EE EE E 55 Safety and protections 56 Emergency SIOD WEE 56 Motor thermal protection ran 56 Programmable protection functions 59 Automatic fault resetS eer 60 Riese s aya dS edad aora e rata unu Ou EO 8 ananas 61 Signal supervision 61 Maintenance timers and counters 61 Energy Savings CalCUlQlOl 4 u acus ur ace Ea eed oe eek ee 61 oe AA 62 WISCCIIANGOUS EEN 64 User parameter SelS aa balal Bada eh dnde eos 64 Data storage parameters 64 5 Application macros What this chapter contains 2 Rr 65 A MC 65 EE 66 Default parameter settings for the Factory macro 222 66 Default control connections for the Factory macn oo 67 ao o AA 68 Default parameter settings for the Hand Auto macro 222 2222 68 Default control connec
6. 02 9Z ana uonouni biol 9Z Tuonssiag uoyoaj s z h l buo1 92 amen uonoejes Lal bJo L L 97 Control chain diagrams 355 O I 99Jnos dois KoueBJeu3 s0 1z O eneA 10 U02 EHO 210 LO 9 O UNV amena 01uO09 JO HQ LO O 8139190 edo Joued pow ouo E201 9L 61 a vowers adio VAGO 033d snqpl l i a uemeres Jes ZYIX3 LIX3 116 03348 Sun o anea eAnoe uonounj Ajgjes asus Es enga apou 439 100 0166 5 EX O 01 2190 e2u8J9joJ ajes 03349 O 9134 90 annoe p ds jse 03348 2 ium Ga C pouuogejedo jenjoy oe ene pp nbuo oJ v B S S Ms 5 D i 7 a o o C o Bn Ga 2 v poul gx YL 6 L 9pouJ joJjuo5 1X4 2161 356 Control chain diagrams ene X uonejedo jeny 1061 enn p ds unululw LL oe angen p ds wnwxen ZL O nie p sn peeds JOJO 10 10 lqeu d s enbJo zy 9z I paduue Jou nbuol Gigs enjoe gjeJ enbJjo d279Z anjen days anbio Ly 9z p ds aouaJajal bJo 10 92 Jojoe es lenye oa enbJo 9 9Z anfen COL 0 buo 1092 uoneyu p ds jene g ppe jeu biol 8
7. S228 FowernodezdwaTvaue Real S225 Folomernode2 data 2valwe Real 0 8895 62 30 F lover node 2 data vate Real Te ez Folover node data Tvate Real 0 8899 1823 Fowernode3dwa2vaue Real oes S233 Folover node 3 data dave Real 0 8899 Il en F lover node data Tate Real sss 1 S235 Fotowernode 4 data vane Real 0 8899 6236 Fotowernode data a Real oes east Data set0 ma eden Ls e Dataset Ota zseni Ls 9259 Dataset Ota 3 selectos Ls 6254 Dataset tata eden t G5 Data set 6256 Data set ts GST Data seta ma Tase Lu 6258 Data set 14 H id 0258 Data seta data 3 setcion Lu 8260 Dataset Tata oat Data set Ls e Dataset osas 9269 Dataset 18 data Ts ts 6264 Data us id 1825 Dataset 18 daa 3 Ls H 6286 Data set 20 ata Y seeci n ts e Data set20 Ls saa Data setz0 H 0208 Data set22 daa sdedon 8270 Dataset 22 H 0271 Data set22 HH H 6272 Data set 24 data eden id 0273 Dataset 24 Ls sara Data set 24 data setecion ust S Dataset Odea Tae s r 0 899 II 9202 Data serio daa 2 value r Le 1 304 Additional para
8. Brake control is enabled 5 Closed X Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSED state C Brake control logic in BRAKE OPENING state E Brake control logic in BRAKE OPEN state 5 Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSING state 9 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Mechanical brake control status word 121 44 02 Brake torque Torque in percent Memorized when a brake close memory command is issued This value can be used as a reference for the brake open torque See parameters 44 09 Brake open torque source and 44 10 Brake open torque 1600 0 1600 0 Torque at brake closure See par 46 03 44 08 Brake open torque Displays the currently active brake open torque See reference parameters 44 09 Brake open torque source and 44 10 Brake open torque This parameter is read only 1000 1000 Currently active brake open torque 46 03 44 06 Brake control Activates deactivates or selects a source that enable activates deactivates the mechanical brake control logic O Brake control inactive 1 Brake control active O s 70 02 Dr delayed aus PRO 2 Dg Pampa 0002 Or delayed salas BE 3 Dip Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 a PDK Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 8 Digital input 015 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 E D Pampa 100271 delayed stats T T
9. O 3E l am el en o 3 lt D A 2 O E O O rb 3j D N OO N D gt Al o 3 o 5 N D O II 23 26 E II out balance enable Binary SIC Binary SIC 23 27 100 1 rpm 121 Ramp out balance ref 30000 00 30000 00 23 29 Variable slope rate 2 30000 1 1 ms 24 Speed reference conditioning rp rp o 24 12 Speed error filter time 1 1 ms 1 24 41 Speed error window control List 1 enable 24 43 Speed error window high 0 3000 24 44 1 Speed error window low 0 3000 24 46 Speed error step 3000 0 3000 0 r 25 Speed control 25 01 Torque reference speed Real 1600 0 1600 0 0 10 190 control 25 02 Proportional gain 0 00 250 00 100 1 25 03 lntegration time 0 00 1000 00 100 1s A II x 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 0 000 1800 000 ied Additional parameter data 287 wl Mame We Range Ume Faez SIC 1281 Speeder baane Ru s mer 25 15 aaa gain Rer 000 2500 39 1 S AAA r 1 e r r r S S S C C C C C C 26 17 Torque ref filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 1 5 26 18 Torque ramp up time 0 000 60 000 1000 1 5 26 19 Torque ramp down time 0 000 60 000 1000 1 5 6 25 Torque additive 2 source Analog 1 1 Sr Sr eg fesor O x H 288 Additional parameter data
10. Start forward 1 20 07 Level Start reverse Parameters 135 3 In1 Start fwd In2 The source selected by 20 08 Ext2 in1 is the forward start Start rev signal the source selected by 20 09 Ext2 in2 is the reverse start signal The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows 20 08 20 09 0 gt 1 20 07 Edge 0 gt 1 20 07 Edge In1P Start In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 4 parameters 20 08 Ext2 in and 20 09 Ext2 in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 State of source 2 Command 20 08 20 09 Any Notes e Parameter 20 07 Ext2 start trigger has no effect with this setting e When source 2 is O the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled In1P Start In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 5 In3 Dir parameters 20 08 Ext2 in1 and 20 09 Ext2 in2 The source selected by 20 10 Ext2 in3 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of State of State of source 1 source 2 source 3 Command 20 08 20 09 20 10 Coen 1 o serowa Start reverse Ay So Notes e Parameter 20 07 Ext2 start trigger has no effect with this setting e When source 2 is the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled 136 Parameters No Name Value Description Def
11. stats BRS s Digital input DI5 10 02 DI delayed status bit 4 5 Ue L LL 100701 onyoq stats iri Omeri Source sasn se Torms and abbreviations on page 0 28 90 Frequency ref1 act Displays the value of frequency reference source 1 selected by parameter 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Value of frequency reference source 1 See par Hz 46 02 28 91 Frequency ref2 act Displays the value of frequency reference source 2 selected by parameter 28 12 Frequency ref2 selection See the S control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Value of frequency reference source 2 See par HZ 46 02 Parameters 175 28 92 Frequency ref3 act Displays the frequency reference after the function applied by parameter 28 13 Frequency ref1 function if any and after selection 28 14 Frequency ref1 2 selection See the control chain diagram on page 358 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Frequency reference after selection See par Hz 46 02 28 96 Frequency ref7 act Displays the frequency reference after application of constant frequencies control panel reference etc See the control chain diagram on page 358 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Frequency reference 7 See par Hz 46 02 28 97 Frequency ref Displays the frequency ref
12. acceleration ramp of the jogging function 67 1 1 Driverunsatthejogging speed Drive runs at the jogging speed runs at the jogging speed TB lx 011 dog enable is not active normal operation continues X 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference 9 10 X Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected deceleration ramp parameters 23 11 23 19 10 11 vi o o Drive is stopped 11 12 X 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected acceleration ramp parameters 23 11 23 19 12 12 43 A Start command overrides the jog enablesignal command overrides the jog enable signal 13 14 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function Qs T 3 9 40 Program features Jog Jog _ Start 2 A pean 15 16 X Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected deceleration ramp parameters 23 11 23 19 Notes Jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on or if the drive is in local control e The ramp shape time is set to zero during jogging The inching functions activated through fieldbus see parameter 06 01 Main control word bits 8 9 behave like the jogging functions but do not follow the jogging ramp times Settings Parameters 20 25 Jogging enable page 139 20 26 Jogging 1 start page 139
13. m E 9 98 11 Lm user SI 0 00 100000 00 9 ohm 100000 1 p u ohm 100000 1 p u electri 1 1 electri cal ca 98 12 SigmaL user SI 0 00 100000 00 8 13 Ld user SI 0 00 100000 00 98 14 Lq user SI 0 00 100000 00 98 15 Position offset user 0 360 99 Motor data 99 03 Motor type 99 04 Motor ctrl mode 99 06 Motor nominal current 0 0 6400 0 99 07 Motor nominal voltage 800 0 99 08 Motor nominal frequency 900 0 99 09 Motor nominal speed m m m m 0 U 0 0 0 0 30000 r A V H p 99 10 Motor nominal povver 10000 00 10000 00 k 99 11 Motor nominal cosfii 0 00 1 00 99 12 Motor nominal torque 00 4294672329 296 99 13 Identification run request 99 14 Identification run performed 99 15 Motor polepairs 0 1000 200 Safety This group contains parameters related to the optional FSO xx safety functions module For details on the parameters in this group refer to the documentation of the FSO xx module H H H H Z m W em N 1 1 310 Additional parameter data Fault tracing 311 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter lists the warning and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions The causes of most warnings and faults can be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter f not an ABB servic
14. 2 filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2 See 0 100 s parameter 13 16 AOT filter time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 15 13 27 2 source min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 13 22 AO2 source that corresponds to the minimum AO2 output value defined by parameter 13 29 AO2 out at AO2 src min lao2 MA Signal real selected by par 13 22 Signal real selected by par 13 22 32766 0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output 1 1 32 67 0 value 13 28 2 source max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 100 0 13 22 AO2 source that corresponds to the maximum AO2 output value defined by parameter 73 30 AO2 out at AO2 src max See parameter 13 27 AO2 source min 32768 0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output 1 1 32 67 0 value 13 29 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO2 0 000 mA min See also drawing at parameter 73 27 AO2 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Minimum A02 output value 1000 1 mA 13 30 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO2 20 000 mA max See also drawing at parameter 13 27 AO2 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Maximum A02 output value 1000 1 mA 108 Parameters 14 I O extension Configuration of I O extension module 1 module 1 see also section Programmable I O extensions
15. 22 000 mAorV 1000 1 mA or V or V EEE E A eg gestan TR 3276700 39 1 1071 AO fo aea Taa R 17 Pp SIC 78 80 ACT soucemin nen 075 esr AOT sourcemax Real ozu Ir 1801 Actaloperaion mode uM SIC Ol al 1 121 I O l O NO O LO O m 0 5 o D D D 5 5 E oO O 284 Additional parameter data WI Wm l Rono J Ume psoe 0 OO 20 Start stop direction 20 01 Ext1 commands EH E H 20 02 Ext starttrigger List BEE 20 05 Ext1 in3 20 06 Ext2 commands List 20 07 07 Ext2 start Ext2starttrigger List HE ST o AA e AA pm ii II ms A 20 11 11 Run enable Run enable stop mode mode List tst D i 4051 mo LL m o TTT ll EL A A 12 EIN enable 1 20 19 Enable start command 20 23 Positive speed reference R enable 20 24 Negative speed reference 57 enable 20 26 Jogging 1 start Binary SIC 20 27 Jogging 2 start Binary 121 SIC 21 Start stop mode ator siatmode J o J p 21 21 04 Emergency stop mode stop mode List 4023 1 EE 2 08 bCoimentson JI mm I r aas Adophasingmode Um on vr Additional parameter data 285 el me m lum 22 11 1 Speed ref1 selection Analog 1 1 Src Sr
16. meer O mu Sedi HH 00 3900 s Wats 345 H morts EL 47 up deviation Real 2147483648 rpm or 100 1 rpm 90 2147483647 Hz or Hz 40 48 Wake up delay 0 00 60 00 57 100 lt 15 40 49 Tracking mode Binary 1 1 Src 40 50 Tracking ref selection Analog EOL A A Trim ados 100 000 100 000 HE 1000 1 40 57 Sel between set1 set2 Binary 1 1 r 41 Process PID set 2 41 11 Feedback filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 1 5 41 14 Setpoint base 32768 32767 HE 100 1 41 15 Output base 32768 32767 El TT 41 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 41 21 Internal setpoint 1 Real 32 68 0 32767 0 rpm 9o or 100 1 rpm 9o Hz or Hz o O 41 20 Internal setpoint selection 2 296 Additional parameter data WI We Rane fal P 41 22 Internal setpoint 2 Real 32 68 0 32767 0 rpm or 100 1 rpm HZ or Hz 41 23 Internal setpoint 3 Real 32 68 0 32767 0 rpm or 100 1 rpm HZ or Hz 41 24 Internal setpoint 4 Real 32 68 0 32767 0 rpm or 100 1 rpm Hz or Hz SIC 41 26 Setpoint min 32768 0 32767 0 HE 100 1 41 27 Setpoint max 32768 0 32767 0 100 1 41 28 Setpoint increase time 0 0 1800 0 41 29 Setpoint decrease time 0 0 1800 0 s 10 1s 41 30 Setpoint freeze enable Binary 121 SIC 41 31 Deviation inversion Binary 1 1 SIC 41 33 Integration time 0 0 3600 0
17. 24 Control interfaces 26 Programmable analog inputs 26 Programmable analog outputs 26 Programmable digital inputs and outputs 26 Programmable relay outputs 26 Programmable I O extensions nes 27 FICIGDUS e 0 e See Se E e 7 Sem bE mee oe i 27 Master follower functionality 27 External controller interface 32 IIOROT CONVOI pesa boos e EE dee E e a ee Gen boos PNE b Direct torque control DTC 35 Reference ramping b Constant speeds frequencies 36 Critical speeds 5 eee ees 36 Encoder SUPPO x n R Ba Ro sd is e 37 6 Table of contents JOGGING TTT 38 Scalar motor control 40 acaracamo qun ER Sov d a 7770777 R d ee eee 41 gd ril MP 43 DC magnetization 1 eee hrs 43 Applicatiom Conireli 8 ano Ee RUR OGRE xU EE EEE xu Em eor eS don d eR bu eRe EUR i 45 APDICAMONMACI S
18. 500 00 500 00 High limit for critical frequency 1 See par HZ 46 02 28 54 Critical frequency 2 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2 0 00 Hz low Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28 55 Critical frequency 2 high 500 00 500 00 Low limit for critical frequency 2 See par HZ 46 02 28 55 Critical frequency 2 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2 0 00 Hz high Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28 54 Critical frequency 2 low 500 00 500 00 High limit for critical frequency 2 See par HZ 46 02 28 56 Critical frequency 3 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3 0 00 Hz low Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28 57 Critical frequency 3 high 500 00 500 00 Low limit for critical frequency 3 See par HZ 46 02 28 57 Critical frequency 3 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3 0 00 Hz high Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28 56 Critical frequency 3 low 500 00 500 00 1 High limit for critical frequency 3 See par Hz 46 02 28 71 Ramp set selection Selects a source that switches between the two sets of Acc Dec time acceleration deceleration times defined by parameters 1 28 72 28 75 0 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force 1 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force em IN T Jl o
19. PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 2 10 See also parameters 91 24 Temperature meas sel2 91 25 Temperature filtering time 2 and 91 26 PTC filtering 2 Parameters 197 Direct temperature 1 The temperature is taken from the source selected by 11 parameter 35 24 Supervision 2 Al select The value of the source is assumed to be degrees Celsius 35 22 Supervision 2 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision 2 See limit parameter 35 20 Supervision 2 protection Note With a PTC sensor the unit is ohm 10 1000 C or Fault limit for temperature supervision 2 ohm 35 23 Supervision 2 Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision 2 See 1 110 C warning limit parameter 35 20 Supervision 2 protection Note With a PTC sensor the unit is ohm 10 1000 C or Warning limit for temperature supervision 2 hm 35 24 Supervision 2 Al Selects the input for parameter 35 27 Supervision 2 source 1 Not selected select selections KT Y84 StdlO Extension module PT100 x1 StdlO PT100 x2 StdlO PT100 x3 StdlO and Direct temperature Nowe The values taken fom anar parameter 35 50 Motor ambient Defines the ambient temperature of the motor in C for the temperature motor thermal protection model The motor thermal protection model estimates the motor temperature on the basis of the parameters in this group The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load cur
20. 0 00 5 00 s Brake open delay 100 15 44 09 Brake open torque Defines a source that is used as a brake opening torque Brake open source reference if torque e its absolute value is greater than the setting of parameter 44 10 Brake open torque and A its sign is the same as the setting of 44 70 Brake open torque See parameter 44 10 Brake open torque EN NEN CN CA Ait sealed Z 721f scaled value see page Fieldbus adapter A reference 1 Fieldbus adapter A reference 2 Brake torque Parameter 44 02 Brake torque memory memory Brake open torque 1 Parameter 44 10 Brake open torque The value is taken from another parameter Parameters 219 44 10 Brake open torque Defines the sign ie direction of rotation and minimum 0 absolute value of the brake open torque motor torque requested at brake release in percent of motor nominal torque The value of the source selected by parameter 44 09 Brake open torque source is used as the brake open torque only if it has the same sign as this parameter and has a greater absolute value 1000 1000 Minimum torque at brake release 46 03 44 11 Keep brake closed Selects a source that prevents the brake from opening O Normal brake operation 1 Keep brake closed Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running N ai C E SCENE D38 oo Digital input DI3 10 02 DI delayed status bit 2 5
21. 1000 1s 1000 1 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V 1000 1 1000 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 1000 1s 1 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 15 01 15 02 15 03 15 05 15 06 15 09 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 17 15 18 Module 2 type DIO1 configuration DIO1 filter gain Not visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 DIO1 output source DIO1 OFF delay DIO2 configuration DIO2 filter gain Not visible when 15 01 DIO1 ON delay Module 2 type FIO 01 DIO2 output source DIO2 ON delay DIO2 OFF delay Other parameters in this group when parameter 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Binary Src Real Real List List Binary Src Real Real Lo Lo Lo Q Lo e o 0 2 254 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 00000000h FFFFFFFFh O olo o Go vo L 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 Al a 1 II 1 A ES 1021s 1021s ES 1 x 15 19 15 21 DIO3 configuration DIO3 output source List Binary src 1 280 Additional parameter data 1 1 1 1 S 0 1 FC sa osas nn TT SI CTT SIC sape o fe 1 1822 Atresi Im mem 191 1527 Artscaedvaue Rea _ 22768000 767 000 1000 1 T z
22. Code hex 7192 BC IGBT excess temperature 1A2 Mechanical brake closing failed Programmable fault 44 1 7 Brake fault function 71A3 1 Mechanical brake opening failed Programmable fault 44 17 Brake fault function 1A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed Programmable fault 44 1 7 Brake fault function 7301 1 Motor speed feedback Programmable fault 90 45 Motor feedback fault 7310 Overspeed Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal fault limit Mechanical brake control fault Activated eg if brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake closing Mechanical brake control fault Activated eg if brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake opening Open conditions of mechanical brake cannot be fulfilled for example brake has been prevented from opening by parameter 44 11 Keep brake closed No motor speed feedback received Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference Let chopper cool down Check for excessive ambient temperature Check for cooling fan failure Check for obstructions in the air flow Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet Check resistor overload protection function settings parameter group 43 Brake chopper Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is
23. DM Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 5 D5 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 AUS SUS TL Other i 44 12 Brake close request Selects the source of an external brake close request SC Off When on the signal overrides the internal logic and closes the brake Oil B Gu 0 Normal operation No external close signal connected 1 Close brake Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 480882 on RN other bi mp U 220 Parameters No Name Value 44 13 Brake close delay Specifies a delay between a close command that is when 0 00 s the brake control output is de energized and when the drive stops modulating This is to keep the motor live and under control until the brake actually closes Set this parameter equal to the value specified by the brake 0 00 60 00 s 44 14 Brake close level manufacturer as the mechanical make up time of the brake Brake close delay 100 1s Defines the brake close speed as an absolute value 10 0 rpm After motor speed remains below this level for the duration of the brake close level delay 44 15 Brake close level delay a 0 0 1000 0 rpm 44 15 Brake close level delay 0 00 10 00 s 44 16 Brake reopen delay 0 00 10 00s 44 17 Brake fault function Open fault close command is given Brake close speed See par 46 01 Brake close level delay
24. Master settings e Master follower link activation e 60 01 M F communication port fiber optic channel selection e 60 02 M F node address 1 e 60 03 M F mode Master Data to be broadcast to the followers e 61 01 M F data 1 selection CW 16bit control word 61 02 M F data 2 selection Other 24 01 Used speed reference 16 bit integer Speed reference e 61 03 M F data 3 selection Other 26 01 Torque ref to TC 16 bit integer torque reference Data to be read from the followers optional e 60 14 M F follower selection selection of followers that data is read from e 62 04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel 62 12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel mapping of data received from followers 32 Program features Follower settings e Master follower link activation e 60 01 M F communication port fiber optic channel selection e 60 02 M F node address 2 60 60 03 M F mode Follower Mapping of data received from master 62 01 M F data 1 selection CW 16bit 62 02 M F data selection Ref1 16bit e 62 03 M F data 3 selection Ref2 16bit e Selection of control location 20 01 Ext1 commands D2D or M F link e 20 02 Ext1 start trigger Level e Selection of reference sources e 22 11 Speed ref1 selection D2D or M F reference 1 26 11 Torque ref1 selection D2D or M F reference 2 e Selection of data to be sent to master optional 61 01 M F data 1 selection SW 16bit 61 02 M F data 2 selection A
25. Speed rpm Reference 24 44 rpm Speed error l Reference window Reference 24 43 rpm Forward 0 rpm Reverse Reference 24 43 rpm Speed error Reference window Reference 24 44 rpm Note that it is parameter 24 44 rather than 24 43 that defines the overspeed limit in both directions of rotation This is because the function monitors speed error which is negative in case of overspeed positive in case of underspeed Example In a load loss condition the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed If window control were inactive the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached Speed error window control inactive 24 43 Speed error window Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window See rpm high parameter 24 41 Speed error window control enable 0 158 Parameters 24 44 Speed error vvindovv Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window See rpm low parameter 24 41 Speed error window control enable 0 3000 rpm Lower boundary of speed error window 46 01 24 46 Speed error step Defines an additional speed step given to the input of the 0 0 rem speed controller and added to the speed error value 3000 0 3000 0 1 Speed error step 25 Speed control Speed controller settings See the control chain diagrams on pages 352 and 353 25 01 Torque reference Displays the
26. Zia 020 HN PL Y Buljeos 4 EO Qt anbio 0 9p cuanbaly z0 ot Buleos 204 Buljeos p ds L0 9y 1491 c d Ul 420 0 c9 Buljeos 4 yO Qt WOO Jay c ut BEp QZC AW ZO C9 onbiot 0 9p uomajas Buijeos cuanbaly 20 97 9160 lq 91 MO L Ul elep QZC AW 1029 Buljeos p ds LO got 9d Lal JN 01709 9AI929J J3MO O y RIED peAle e4 GZG 4IN 2c c9 c EIED GcG 4IN 9c c9 1491 Ged JO AW El UI AW p A19991 AZA JN Sc C9 750 H o SSO WOO FIN 6009 yno ull SSO WWWOD JN 8009 Buleos Lex 2 1999 ALQ Jeseje 09 dnolo dm s yul AW 18MO 0 J Master Follower communication l Follower 364 Control chain diagrams Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives a
27. control unit and the power unit Power unit lost Connection between the drive Check the connection between the control unit and the power unit control unit and the power unit is lost PU communication Internal communication error 1 Contact your local ABB representative internal Measurement circuit fault Contact your local ABB representative ADC PU board powerfail Power unit power supply Contact your local ABB representative failure Measurement circuit fault Contact your local ABB representative DFF PU communication Version check cannot find a Update the FPGA logic of the power unit configuration matching power unit FPGA Contact your local ABB representative logic PU state feedback State feedback from output Contact your local ABB representative phases does not match control signals Charging feedback Charging feedback signal Check the feedback signal coming from missing the charging system 324 Fault tracing Code Cause What to do hex 5698 1 Unknown power unit Unidentified power unit logic Check power unit logic and firmware fault fault compatibility Contact your local ABB representative 6180 Internal SW error Internal error Contact your local ABB representative Quote the auxiliary code check the event details in the event log 6181 FPGA version Firmware and FPGA versions Update power unit FPGA logic or incompatible are incompatible firmware whichever is older Contact yo
28. esed NE xl ee A II II II II II a a Al Al ajl A 1021s 1021s 282 Additional parameter data WI ms A o SIC 1 1 SIC 16 22 DIO3 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 S 1021s 16 23 DIO3 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 SIC m 0 0 est Roses mmm 5 T r S 050770 SIC 16 35 RO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 16 36 RO1 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 16 37 RO2 source Binary Src um os T r A ui ves 000000008 II MA EI Real 2768000 2767000 190 1 _ escher 771 Test Tul 1 1 16 32 filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 15 16 33 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V or V 16 35 AI1 scaled at Al1 min 32768 000 32767 000 1000 1 16 36 AI1 scaled at Al1 max 32768 000 32767 000 1 1000 1 16 41 AI2 actual value 22 000 22 000 1000 1 unit 16 42 AI2 scaled value 32768 000 32767 000 HE 1000 1 16 43 AI2 force data 22 000 22 000 1000 1 unit Additional parameter data 283 ea naws T si Tu 16 47 AI2 filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 lt 15 16 48 AI2 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V or V eg Asada namn Fev 32788000 02787000 TRT 1051 saeia Name zreb00v ozrer ooo 1057 As sealed value 32768900 zem _1000 1 nws 1 tt 16 63 Al3 min Real 22 000
29. gt 24 VDC 2A Reference voltage and analog inputs Speed reference 0 2 10 V Rin gt 200 kohm By default not in use 0 4 20 mA Ri gt 100 ohm Motor speed rpm AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Motor current AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Nounwn als XRO1 XRO2 XRO3 Relay outputs NC Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A NC Running 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Faulted 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XD24 Digital interlock DIIL 24VD DICOM Digital input ground 24VD DIOGND 1 Digital input output ground lO Digital input outputs DIO1 Output Ready DIO2 Output Running Digital inputs DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 012 013 014 015 By default not in use Safe torque off circuits must be closed for the drive to start See Hardware manual of drive X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connection N sch Ors x 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 68 Application macros Hand Auto macro The Hand Auto macro is suited to speed control applications where two external control devices are used The drive is speed controlled from the external control locations EXT1 Hand control and EXT2 Auto control The selection between the control locations is done through digital input DI3 The start stop signal for EXT1 is connected to DI1 while running direction is determined by DI2 For EXT2 start stop commands are g
30. neu F Dout enbJo rege Lane ov l y i dosd onbol eg gz ene peouejequn enbuo Gg GZ M ener ke did enjeA 0015 w uleb jeuonjodoJug CLC anjeA euun UONEAH Q S0 Sc nleA SWI uoneAue v0 Sc enjgn au uoneJDeju 0 SZ enjea ure6 4 Z0 6Z ene N Dee 10110 p ds go yz n dei joue p ds opt Jojenbau p ds eoue eq jo p ds 01 9z anea O4JUOD p ds XBW 21 92 x anjea ayer 1000 8092 A d modification 354 Control chain diagrams Torque reference source selection an enjeA eneA euim umop dwe enbJo 6 9Z ama eun e Jou nbiol 1196 uiu WI anbo jeuJeju en eA en eA XVW q s enbJoj wnwuIN 80 97 910 9190 101 UO9 890 eued 10 60 OMEN widlO YAQO Snapjet4 no due jas anbio v7 9z 610 9190 101 U09 aun dn duel bio 8192 enpe y Jos 9z enpe e joi anbio Z29Z anjea xew wij anbJo jeuJeju aneA nbuo WNWIXEIA 60792 amen a uomers sonos anbio1 9 L 97 enn ams peo gi o ane jenjoe z 92 uonoejes 2 biol 21 92 s jenjoe
31. o o E o o al al wf alt al oa II II II II II ERES D 15 1 05 01 05 02 05 04 05 11 On time counter 0 4294967295 Run time counter 0 4294967295 Fan on time counter 0 4294967295 Inverter temperature 40 0 160 0 10 1 06 Control and status words 06 01 Main control word 06 02 1 Application control word 06 03 FBA A transparent control vvord 1 1d 1 oa 0000h FFFFh 0000h FFFFh 00000000h FFFFFFFFh PB m 06 11 Main status word PB 0000h FFFFh 06 16 Drive status word 1 PB 0000h FFFFh m PB 06 17 0000h FFFFh 06 18 0000h FFFFh 06 19 0000h FFFFh 06 20 0000h FFFFh 06 30 User bit O selection Binary SIC 06 31 User bit 1 selection Binary SIC 06 32 User bit 2 selection Binary SIC rc lx e Le ES A A 1 II II 1 II E 06 33 User bit 3 selection S 07 System info 07 03 Drive rating id 0 999 07 04 Firmvvare name 07 05 1 Firmvvare version 07 11 Cpu usage 0 100 gae II II a a as 1 190 Additional parameter data 275 Parameter groups 10 99 el Nam type Range meer Tae Ts gt ter 1002 aeae rs mmm 395 70 08 orrore seen Ps mmm er mn pitres 1788 mmm 1 0 0 i 0 0 9 0 10 21 RO status 0000h FFFFh e 10 24 RO1 source Binary Src 10 25 RO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 1
32. 1 Hz 46 03 Torque scaling Defines the 16 bit scaling of torque signals The value of this 100 0 parameter in percent of nominal motor torque corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus master follower etc communication 0 0 30000 0 Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus 10 1 224 Parameters 46 04 Power scaling Defines the output power value that corresponds to 10000 in 1000 0 kW fieldbus master follower etc communication 0 0 30000 0 kW Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus 1 1 kW 46 11 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signals 07 07 Motor speed used 500 ms speed 01 02 Motor speed estimated 01 04 Encoder 1 speed filtered and 01 05 Encoder 2 speed filtered 2 20000 ms Motor speed signal filter time 46 12 Filter time output Defines a filter time for signal 01 06 Output frequency 500 ms frequency 2 20000 ms Output frequency signal filter time 46 13 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signal 01 10 Motor torque torque 2 20000 ms Motor torque signal filter time 46 14 Filter time power Defines a filter time for signal 01 14 Output power out 2 20000 ms Output power signal filter time 46 21 Speed setpoint Defines the absolute value for the motor speed window 100 00 rpm hysteresis supervision ie the absolute value of the difference between actual speed and speed reference 90 01 Motor speed for control 22 87 Speed reference 7 act When motor speed is w
33. 46 02 31 28 X Stall time Stall time See parameter 31 24 Stall function 20s 3600 s Stall time Parameters 183 31 30 Speed trip margin Defines together with 30 17 Minimum speed and 30 12 500 rpm Maximum speed the maximum allowed speed of the motor overspeed protection f actual speed 90 01 Motor speed for control exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 30 11 or 30 12 by more than the value of this parameter the drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault WARNING This function only supervises the speed in DTC motor control mode The function is not effective in scalar motor control mode Example If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm the drive trips at 1720 rpm Speed 90 01 Overspeed trip level Overspeed trip level 0 10000 rpm Overspeed trip margin See par 46 01 32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1 3 Three values can be chosen to be monitored a warning or fault is generated whenever predefined limits are exceeded See also section Signal supervision page 61 32 01 Supervision status Signal supervision status word Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal supervision functions are within or outside their respective limits Note This word is independent of the drive actions defined by parameters 32 06 32 16 and 32 26 Description Bt Pame esoe 80 0 Supemision Tasive T Signal selected by 7777 is outsi
34. BCD BRAKE CLOSING DELAY 52 Program features Wiring example The figure below shows a brake control wiring example The brake control hardware and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations Note that the frequency converter a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module as defined in IEC 61800 2 is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature such as the brake control function but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations WARNING Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake The brake is controlled by bit O of parameter 44 01 Brake control status The source of brake acknowledge status supervision is selected by parameter 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection In this example e parameter 10 24 source is set to Brake command ie bit of 44 01 Brake control status and parameter 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to D 5 Brake control Drive control unit hardvvare XRO1 115 230 VAC Program features 53 DC voltage control Overvoltage control Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is in generating mode To prevent the DC volta
35. Direct temperature 1 The temperature is taken from the source selected by 11 parameter 35 14 Supervision 1 Al select The value of the source is assumed to be degrees Celsius 35 12 Supervision 1 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision 1 See 130 C limit parameter 35 10 Supervision 1 protection Note With a PTC sensor the unit is ohm 10 1000 C or Fault limit for temperature supervision 1 1 1 unit ohm 35 13 Supervision 1 Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision 1 See 1 110 C warning limit parameter 35 70 Supervision 1 protection Note With a PTC sensor the unit is ohm 10 1000 C or Warning limit for temperature supervision 1 ohm 35 14 Supervision 1 Al Selects the input for parameter 35 77 Supervision 7 source Not selected select selections KTY84 StdlO Extension module PT100 x1 StdlO PT100 x2 StdlO PT100 x3 StdlO and Direct temperature sss Nore 35 20 Supervision 2 Defines the action taken by the drive when measured protection temperature 2 parameter 35 03 exceeds the appropriate limits set by parameters 35 22 Supervision 2 fault limit and 35 23 Supervision 2 warning limit Warning Warning 4491 External temperature is generated when measured temperature 2 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 23 Supervision 2 warning limit Fault Warning 4491 External temperature is generated when measured temperature 2 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 23 Supervision 2 war
36. FPBA 32 FCAN 37 FDNA 128 FENA 11 135 FECA 136 FEPL 485 FSCA This parameter is read only 51 02 FBA Par2 Parameters 51 02 51 26 are adapter module specific For more information see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter module Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily in use 0 65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter 1 1 51 26 FBA Par26 See parameter 51 02 FBA Par2 0 65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter 51 27 FBA par refresh Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module configuration settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to Done Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 51 28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive In format axyz where ax major table revision number yz minor table revision number This parameter is read only 57 Parameter table revision of adapter module 51 29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive This parameter is read only 0 65535 Drive type code stored in the mapping file 51 30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format This parameter is read only 0 65535 Mapping file revision 1 1 1 51 31 D2FBA comm
37. N2 010 Fault 5091 Safe torque off EJES Faults 5091 Safe torque off and FA81 Safe torque off 1 Fault Fault 1 Faults 5091 Safe torque off and FA82 Safe torque off 2 Normal operation Parameters 181 1 Fault VVarning Fault 5091 Safe torque Warning A5A0 Safe off torque off Faults 5091 Safe Warning A5A0 Safe torque off and FA81 torque off and fault Safe torque off 1 FA81 Safe torque off 1 Faults 5091 Safe Warning A5A0 Safe torque off and FA82 torque off and fault Safe torque off 2 FA82 Safe torque off 2 1 Normal operation Fault Event 2 Fault 5091 Safe torque Event B5A0 Safe off torque off Faults 5091 Safe Event B5A0 Safe torque off and FA81 torque off and fault Safe torque off 1 FA81 Safe torque off 1 Faults 5091 Safe Event B5A0 Safe torque off and FA82 torque off and fault Safe torque off 2 FA82 Safe torque off 2 Normal operation Warning Warning Indication running or stopped Warning A5A0 Safe torque off Warning A5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 Warning A5AO Safe torque off and fault FA82 Safe torque off 2 Event Event Indication running or stopped Event B5A0 Safe torque off Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA82 Safe torque off 2 Normal operation 182 Parameters No indication No indication Inputs Indication running or stopped None Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1 1 0 Fau
38. Programmable fault 37 09 External event 5 source 31 10 External event 5 type Safe torque off 1 Safe torque off 2 Master follower communication is lost Fault generated by a signal supervision function Fault in external device 1 Fault in external device 2 Fault in external device 3 Fault in external device 4 Fault in external device 5 Safe torque off function is active le STO circuit 1 is broken Safe torque off function is active ie STO circuit 2 is broken Check status of other drives on the master follower link Check settings of parameter group 60 D2D and DDCS communication Check cable connections If necessary replace cables Check the source of the fault parameter 32 07 32 17 or 32 28 Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 01 External event 1 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 03 External event 2 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 05 External event 3 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 07 External event 4 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 09 External event 5 source Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual and description of parameter 31 22 STO indication run stop page 180 Fault tracing 329 Code Cause What to do hex FF61 ID run Motor ID run
39. See parameter 14 16 DIO2 output source Not energized 16 17 DIO2 ON delay See parameter 14 17 DIO2 ON delay 0 0 s 16 18 DIO2 OFF delay See parameter 14 18 DIO2 OFF delay 0 0 s 16 19 DIO3 configuration Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type 01 Input See parameter 14 19 DIOS configuration 16 06 DIO delayed status See parameter 14 06 DIO delayed status 16 21 DIOS output source Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 21 DIO3 output source energized 16 21 Altune Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 No action See parameter 14 21 Al tune 16 22 DIO3 ON delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 See parameter 14 22 DIO3 ON delay 16 22 Alforce sel Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 00000000h See parameter 14 22 Al force sel 16 23 DIO3 OFF delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 See parameter 14 23 D O3 OFF delay 0 0s 0 0 s 16 24 DIO4 configuration Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type 01 Input See parameter 14 24 DIO4 configuration 16 26 DIO4 output source Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 26 DIO4 output source energized 16 26 actual value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 26 Al7 actual value 128 Parameters 16 27 DIO4 ON delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 27 DIO4 ON delay 16 27 scaled value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See
40. data 1 sel Follower node 3 data 2 sel Follower node 3 data 3 sel Follower node 4 data 1 sel Follower node 4 data 2 sel Follower node 4 data 3 sel MF D2D data 1 value MF D2D data 2 value Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the first None follower ie the follower with node address 2 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 29 Follower node 2 data 2 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the first None follower ie the follower with node address 2 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 30 Follower node 2 data 3 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the None second follower ie the follower with node address 3 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 31 Follower node 3 data 1 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the None second follower ie the follower with node address 3 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 32 Follower node 3 data 2 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the None second follower ie the follower with node address 3 through the master follower link See also para
41. do Other fait Suro selection Terms and abbreviations on page S divider signal edges increment the counter by 1 TRE Divisor or signal edge counter 33 35 Edge counter 1 Selects the warning message for signal edge counter 1 Edge counter warning selection 1 Edge counter 1 Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 Output relay Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 13 Motor starts Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 190 Parameters Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 DC charge Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 1 15 33 40 Edge counter 2 Reading of signal edge counter 2 Can be reset from the actual Drive composer PC tool or from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 0 4294967295 Reading of signal edge counter 2 33 41 Edge counter 2 limit Sets the warning limit for signal edge counter 2 0 0 4294967295 VVarning limit for signal edge counter 2 33 42 Edge counter 2 Configures signal edge counter 2 This counter is 0000b function incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 33 43 Edge counter 2 source switches on or off or either depending on the setting of this parameter A divisor may be applied to the count see 33 44 Edge counter 2 divider After the limit set by 33 47 Edge counter 2 limit is r
42. h Defines together with parameter 40 15 Output base a general scaling factor for the process PID control chain The scaling can be utilized when for example the process setpoint is input in Hz and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control In this case this parameter might be set to 50 and parameter 40 15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz In effect the output of the PID controller 40 75 when deviation setpoint feedback 40 14 and 40 32 1 Note The scaling is based on the ratio between 40 14 and 40 15 For example the values 50 and 1500 would produce the same scaling as 1 and 30 32768 32 67 Process setpoint base 40 15 Output base See parameter 40 14 Sefpoint base 1500 40 16 Control panel 03 01 Panel reference see page 85 Internal setpoint Internal setpoint See parameter 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 40 17 32768 32767 Setpoint 1 source Setpoint 2 source Process PID controller output base Selects the first source of process PID setpoint This setpoint A 2 scaled is available in parameter 40 25 Setpoint selection as setpoint 1 See the control chain diagram on page 360 0 1 2 3 4 10 Selects the second source of process setpoint This setpoint Zero is available in parameter 40 25 Setpoint selection as setpoint 2 For the selections see parameter 40 16 Setpoint 1 source 206 Parameters 40 18
43. lis 1 1530 lu 7 sat meron ls r c 15 33 Al1 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V 2 r T or V 1535 anar H z ES 390 1 1536 scaled aAitmex Real Lem 3276700 Im MZA TC Lien zem 199 1 ABH sapos Ux i m r Teze mir T 8 15 48 12 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V UT a T or V 15 50 O O1 ES 15 58 ala on Oi Ol O N ala Oi O O ER 15 65 C1 15 76 a Ol N N N 15 78 15 79 15 80 15 82 15 83 CO Al2 scaled at Al2 min Al2 scaled at Al2 max 2 co o E C 0 lt m 2 Co o O m D lt m D AI3 force data 2 OO E o z o gt o O o gt o D D Q LE O 2 AI3 filter gain 2 h D D ct 3 D 2 2 5 2 Co 3 D x Al3 scaled at Al3 min AO force selection AO1 actual value 2 Co o O m D 0 lm 2 D x gt O o O C Q D AO1 force data AOL filter time AO1 source min AO1 source max AOT out at AO1 src min AO1 out at AO1 src max 16 I O extension module 3 Real Real Real List olols bibim Lo Real Real Real Real Real
44. selection 28 13 Frequency ref1 function m 0s enren 01 DDOS conrorer eT see peee Ges page 22 DDCS ctrl ref2 03 12 DDCS controller ref 2 see page 86 D2D or M F 03 13 M F or D2D ref1 see page 86 11 reference 1 D2D or M F 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 see page 86 12 reference 2 40 01 Process PID actual value output of the process PID 15 controller The value is taken from another parameter B 28 12 Frequency ref2 Selects frequency reference source 2 See also parameter selection 28 13 Frequency ref1 function For the selections see parameter 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection 28 13 Frequency ref1 Selects a mathematical function between the reference function sources selected by parameters 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection and 28 12 Frequency ref2 selection The result of the function is then selectable as frequency reference 1 in parameter 28 14 Frequency ref1 2 selection Ref1 Signal selected by 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection is used as frequency reference 1 as such Add The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency 1 reference 1 Parameters 169 The subtraction 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection 28 12 Frequency ref2 selection of the reference sources is used S ub 2 as frequency reference 1 Mul The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3 frequency reference 1 Min The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency 4 reference 1 Max The greater
45. 0 Process PID parameter set 1 in use 1 Process PID parameter set 2 in use EM INN E NES 0 LI cl I LONE Not selected Selected DI1 Digital input DI1 70 02 D delayed status bit 0 DI2 Digital input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 014 Digital input 014 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 214 Parameters other 7 10 11 41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control The selection between this set and first set parameter group 40 Process PID set 1 is made by parameter 40 57 Sel between set7 set2 See also parameters 40 01 40 06 and the control chain diagrams on pages 360 and 361 41 07 P D operation mode See parameter 40 07 PID operation mode ff 41 08 Feedback 1 source See parameter 40 08 Feedback 1 source scaled 41 09 Feedback 2 source See parameter 40 09 Feedback 2 source Zero O n1 D 41 10 Feedback function 1 See parameter 40 10 Feedback function 41 11 Feedback filter time See parameter 40 11 Feedback filter time 0 000 s 41 16 Setpoint 1 source Al2 scaled 41 18 Setpoint function In1 or In2 41 19 Internal setpoint Not selected selection 1 41 20 Internal setpoint Not selected selection 2 41 26 Setpoint min See parameter 40 26 Setpoint min 41 27 Setpoint max See parameter 40 27 Setpoint max 32767 0 41 28 Setpoint increase See parameter 4
46. 02 FBA A comm loss func 50 03 FBA A comm loss timeout 0 x ala ala II 1 x A ala M l m 1021s o 50 09 FBA A SW transparent source Analog Src 50 10 FBA A act1 transparent source Analog NEN src x xi II 1 II II K mw oa 1 300 Additional parameter data Range 50 11 FBA A act2 transparent source Analog SIC List Data Real OO 50 12 FBA A debug enable 50 13 FBA A control word 50 14 FBA A reference 1 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 2147483648 2147483647 2147483648 2147483647 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 2147483648 2147483647 2147483648 2147483647 50 15 FBA A reference 2 Real 90 16 90 17 FBA A status word FBA A actual value 1 Data Real II 50 18 FBA A actual value 2 Real II NES II 50 21 FBA A timelevel sel 51 FBA A settings 51 01 FBA type 51 02 FBA Par2 List II List Real 0 65535 Real 0 65535 51 26 FBA Par26 51 27 FBA par refresh 51 28 51 29 51 30 51 31 Data Real 0 65535 Real 0 65535 List sc ECG Data Par table ver Al II i x II Drive type code II Mapping file ver D2FBA comm sta 51 32 FBA comm SW ver 51 33 FBA appl SW ver 52 FBA A data in 52 01 FBA data in1 ex Al II ll Li
47. 03 25 55 Torque der Displays the output of the derivative D part of the speed reference controller See the control chain d on on page 353 This parameter is read only 30000 0 D part output of speed controller See par 30000 0 46 03 25 56 Torque acc Displays the output of the acceleration compensation compensation function See the control chain diagram on page 353 This parameter is read only 30000 0 Output of acceleration compensation function See par 30000 0 46 03 25 57 Torque reference Displays the acceleration compensated output of the speed unbalanced controller See the control chain diagram on page 353 This parameter is read only 30000 0 Acceleration compensated output of speed controller See par 30000 0 46 03 164 Parameters 26 Torque reference Settings of the torque reference chain chain See the control chain diagrams on pages 354 and 356 26 01 Torque ref to TC Displays the torque reference given to the torque controller in m percent See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference for torque control 46 03 26 02 Torque ref used Displays the torque reference after frequency voltage and torque limitation in percent of motor nominal torque See the control chain diagram on page 357 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference for torque control 46 03 26 08 Minimum tor
48. 03 26 77 Torque ref add A Displays the value of the source of torque reference additive actual 2 See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference additive 2 46 03 26 78 Torque ref add B Displays the value of torque reference additive 2 before it is actual added to torque reference See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference additive 2 46 03 168 Parameters 26 81 Rush control gain Rush controller gain term E 1 0 10000 0 Rush controller gain 26 82 Rush control Rush controller integration time term integration time 0 1 10 0 s Rush controller integration time 28 Frequency reference Settings of the frequency reference chain chain See the control chain diagrams on pages 358 and 359 28 01 Frequency ref ramp Displays the used frequency reference before ramping See uu the control chain diagram on page 359 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Frequency reference before ramping See par HZ 46 02 28 02 Frequency ref ramp Displays the final frequency reference after selection out limitation and ramping See the control chain diagram on page 359 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Final frequency reference See par Hz 46 02 28 11 Frequency ref1 Selects frequency reference source 1 See also parameter scaled
49. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1d 1 1d 1 1d 88 Parameters 06 Control and status Drive control and status words words 06 01 Main control word 1 The main control word of the drive This parameter shows the control signals as received from the selected sources such as digital inputs the fieldbus interface and the application program The bit assignments of the word are as described on page 339 The related status word and state diagram are presented on pages 340 and 341 respectively This parameter is read only 06 02 Application control The drive control word received from the application program word if any The bit assignments are described on page 339 This parameter is read only 06 03 FBA A transparent The unaltered control word received from the PLC through control word fieldbus adapter A This parameter is read only 06 11 Main status word Main status word of the drive The bit assignments are described on page 340 The related control word and state diagram are presented on pages 339 and 347 respectively This parameter is read only 06 16 Drive status vvord 1 1 Drive status vvord 1 This parameter is read only Bit Name Description Enabled 1 Both run enable see par 20 12 and start enable 20 19 signals are present Note This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault Inhibited 1 Start inhibited To start the drive the inhibiting signal see par 06 18 must be removed and the start sig
50. 1 type FIO 11 Shows the position of the hardware current voltage selector on the I O extension module Note The setting of the current voltage selector must match the unit selection made in parameter 14 60 A 3 unit selection I O module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings 14 60 Al unit selection Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input Als Note This setting must match the corresponding hardware setting on the I O extension module see the manual of the I O extension module The hardware setting is shown by parameter 14 59 Al3 HW switch pos VO module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings z 14 61 AR filter gain Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects a hardware filtering time for Al3 See also parameter 14 62 A12 filter time No filtering Ol Sr Gol N gt 3 2 O e 120 Parameters 14 62 Al filter time Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 100 s Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al3 l l Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 eil filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware
51. 13 19 AO7 out at AO1 src min lanos mA 13 20 13 19 om om 17 13 18 Signal real selected by par 13 12 lanos mA 13 20 13 19 13 18 13 17 Signal real selected by par 13 12 32768 0 Real Ce value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 32767 0 nsyi 13 18 source max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 1500 0 13 12 AO1 source that corresponds to the maximum 1 output value defined by parameter 13 20 AO1 out at AO1 src max See parameter 13 17 AO1 source min 32 68 0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 32 67 0 value 13 19 Ges out at AO1 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1 0 000 mA See also drawing at parameter 13 17 AO7 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Minimum AC Minimum AO1 output value value 1000 1 mA 13 20 out at AO1 src LU the maximum output value for analog output AO1 20 000 mA See also drawing at parameter 13 17 AO7 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Maximum AO1 output value 1000 1 mA 13 21 AOZ2 actual value Displays the value of AO2 in mA This parameter is read only 0 000 22 000 mA Value of AC2 1000 1 mA 13 22 AO2 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO2 Motor current Alternatively sets the output to excitation mode to feed a constant current to a temperature sensor For the selections see parameter 13 12 AO7 source Parameters 107 O 13 26
52. 192 T demoe y ppejerbio 1921 MAT ees eoJnos Z eAnippe enbJo GZ 9Z 0 2 Z ppe enbJo BDO 9Z 9Z Reference selection for torque controller il Control chain diagrams 357 imitation Torque pon 01 ene ulnulxeyy 02 0 jueJno VOS 6 amen jueJuno WNWIXEN 7 L UC ent anbJo uunulul 610 2 8 jno nd JOJOJN 9 anea f wu Jomo 2 ne o Due peo G jueuno jeuJaju y enea j gt Hw Buuojouu 4 92 06 enbJo wnwIxen nb o uinuulul 2 amen Jo3uoo 10 peeds ioyoyy 10706 oDeyoAJeAQ eBeyonapun ee eneA fonuoo aBeyonapun Le oe smes yu enbJo Z0 0 anea jonuoo 0 0 9100 10 OL uonelui uonellulii Jeyuui enbJo Jejuul JOMOd Enes yu 2002 358 Control chain diagrams Frequency reference selection ene SAS SNQpjal4 WO CNV SSO wwo snqpjerJ ajes Jal peedg Xun sso wwo v Z0 0S pueuJuJoo ejes e2uoJojaJ OJJUO9 620 se f UEG ON SSO WWO SUB 9JES Ja p ds SSO uoleEolunululo2 6067 amen you eunjie4 VZ 8 11 91 90 40 890 enga jeued 10760 6 119 9190 OJJUOO
53. 214 43 Brake chopper an ds s d EA E e deu 215 44 Mechanical brake control ccce 217 159016 aia Er EE PSU oe ey hee ees ae eases Seesaw 221 46 Monitoring scaling settings 223 47 Data een as oe ode ar az q ou d SEELEN OG ox ou ee os 225 49 Panel port COMMUNIC 00000 22 50 Fieldbus adapter FBA Gaede ed 227 51 FBA A settingS a ism EE es Bs Ron e d xos Bom mum oe 231 a uuu uaed usd 351 ae as ea abs dea 232 qoy EE AA renei bne Ee d RER ee 233 60 D2D and DDCS comm unication 233 61 D2D and DDCS transmit cece deeb eS tet mk e assi 237 62 D2D and DOGS receive data daa eres arar ea 239 90 Feedback selection ee eee nes 243 91 Encoder module settings demana e 248 8 Table of contents 92 Encoder 1 configuration iiu uu iue vonage tn deed asada 250 93 Encoder 2 configuration EEN 255 95 HW configuration oo lt e ae 6 CESS arar dada areas daa 257 HB UBI 7777777 705151 259 o EP 262 98 User motor parameters 264 1777070750 r kec bc XE b di 265 PR EE BEE 0 EE EE 7700777 269 7 Additional parameter data What this chapter contains In 271 Te
54. 2147483 008 7 04 Data storage 4 real32 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 46 21 Speed setpoint hysteresis Real 0 00 30000 00 A g 0 e o o e o o 0 1000 1 1000 1 7 03 Data storage 3 132 1000 1 4 4 1000 1 1000 1 47 05 Data storage 5 real32 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 47 07 Data storage 7 real32 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 47 06 Data storage 6 real32 1000 1 1000 1 Additional parameter data 299 IO si l has um 47 08 1 Data storage 8 real32 Real 2147483 008 1000 1 2147483 008 47 11 Data storage 1 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 12 1 Data storage 2 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 13 Data storage 3 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 14 1 Data storage 4 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 15 Data storage 5 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 16 Data storage 6 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 17 Data storage 7 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 47 18 1 Data storage 8 int32 Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 3721 pata storage Tints Rer s ra z r TI Li 4722 pata storage ze Real eme T nr 4728 pata storage Sino Rer RT 395 4724 pata storage4intio Real eme 395 4725 pata siorage sino Real RT Li 49 Panel port communication 50 Fieldbus adapter FBA 50 01 FBA A enable 50
55. 28 32 frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 7 0 00 Hz 00 500 00 Constant frequency 7 See par 46 02 28 41 Frequency ref safe Defines a safe frequency reference that is used with 0 00 Hz supervision parameters such as e 49 05 Communication loss action e 50 02 FBA A comm loss func 500 00 500 00 Safe frequency reference See par Hz 46 02 28 51 Critical frequency Enables disables the critical frequencies function Also function determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not See also section Critical speeds frequencies page 36 Crit freq Enable Critical frequencies enabled Disable Critical frequencies disabled Sign mode According to par The signs of parameters 28 52 28 57 are taken into account O Absolute Parameters 28 52 28 57 are handled as absolute values Each range is effective in both directions of rotation 0000h FFFFh FFFFh Critical frequencies configuration word 1 1 172 Parameters 28 52 Critical frequency 1 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1 0 00 Hz low Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28 53 Critical frequency 1 high 500 00 500 00 Low limit for critical frequency 1 See par Hz 46 02 28 53 Critical frequency 1 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1 0 00 Hz high Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28 52 Critical frequency 1 low
56. 286 Additional parameter data 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm N N N CO NIO 021 02 0 o a A 3 qis O 3 D O 2 5 O NIO olm e 23 Speed reference ramp Speed ref ramp in 30000 00 30000 00 30000 00 30000 00 N 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 1 1 N OO O N 002 o O D o F E o o rm 23 11 Ramp set selection Binary SIC 23 12 1s Acceleration time 1 0 000 1800 000 15 N OO d D O D D D o O 3 o 0 000 1800 000 15 23 14 Acceleration time 2 0 000 1800 000 wesch wesch l CO OO CH CO OO CH OO O N OO Q D D o O CH 3 o N O O O 15 N C O 02 gt y o o O o 0 O 0 000 1800 000 15 N OO N 02 o o O o o O O N O O O O 15 N 0 000 1800 000 N OO e my D o O o o o N 15 1000 15 N d N O gt Q O ct 3 D O O e 0 000 1800 000 N N 1000 15 mu m 000 s mmm s mmm s 000 fs 000 s x NEM EN 0 000 1800 000 Dec time jogging 0 000 1800 000 i 0 000 1800 000 es 1000 15 N Ge R N 00 u 2 D
57. 30000 00 Value of the selected speed reference See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 11 Speed ref1 Selects speed reference source 1 See also parameter 22 13 A 1 scaled selection Speed ref1 function D2D or M F 03 13 M F or D2D ref1 see page 86 reference 1 D2D or M F 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 see page 86 1 reference 2 40 01 Process PID actual value output of the process PID 15 controller The value is taken from another parameter 22 12 Speed ref2 Selects speed reference source 2 Zero selection For the selections see parameter 22 11 Speed ref1 selection 22 13 Speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1 sources selected by parameters 22 11 Speed ref1 selection and 22 12 Speed ref2 selection The result is available as 11 2 Speed reference 1 in parameter 22 14 Speed ref1 2 selection Ref1 Signal selected by 22 11 Speed ref1 selection is used as speed reference 1 as such The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 1 Sub The subtraction 22 11 Speed ref1 selection 22 12 Speed 2 ref2 selection of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 146 Parameters Mul The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed 13 reference 1 Min The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed 4 reference 1 Max The greater of the reference sources is used as speed 5 reference 1 22 14 Speed ref1 2 Configures the selection
58. 45 17 Tariff currency unit Note Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection and are not applied retroactively 0 000 Energy tariff 1 4294967295 000 units 45 13 Energy tariff 2 Defines energy tariff 2 price of energy per kWh 2 000 units oee parameter 45 12 Energy tariff 1 0 000 Energy tariff 2 4294967295 000 units 45 14 Tariff selection Selects or defines a source that selects which pre defined Energy tariff energy tariff is used 0 45 12 Energy tariff 1 1 45 13 Energy tariff 2 09000 r E E Parameters 223 Digital input 013 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 4 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 DIB o Digital input DI5 10 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Digital input DI6 70 02 DI delayed status bit 5 DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 17 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 DIO2 Digital input output DIO2 17 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 DIS DIA DI5 EUR USD T 10 11 EUR Local currency The currency is determined by the language selection see 100 parameter 96 01 Language 45 18 2 conversion Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO 0 500 factor emissions kg kVVh or tn MWh tn MVVh 0 000 65 535 Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO emissions 1 1 fn MVVh tn MVVh 45 19 Comparison power 1 Motor
59. 51 FBA A has not been activated settings 6881 Text data overflow Internal fault Reset the fault Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists 6882 Text 32 bit table Internal fault Reset the fault Contact your local ABB overflow representative if the fault persists 6883 Text 64 bit table Internal fault Reset the fault Contact your local ABB overflow representative if the fault persists 6885 Text file overflow Internal fault Reset the fault Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists Code hex 7080 7081 7082 7121 7181 7183 7184 7191 Fault tracing 325 Option module comm loss Panel port communication Programmable fault 49 05 Communication loss action Extension l O type mismatch Motor stall Programmable fault 37 24 Stall function Brake resistor BR excess temperature Brake resistor wiring BC short circuit Communication between drive and option module FEN xx and or FIO xx is lost Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating The I O extension module types specified by parameters do not match the detected configuration Motor is operating in stall region because of e g excessive load or insufficient motor power Brake resistor broken or not connected Brake resistor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 43 11 Brake resistor fault limit
60. 64 address Defines the node address for a HIPERFACE encoder Typically this parameter need not be set HIPERFACE encoder node address 93 Encoder 2 Settings for encoder 2 configuration Notes The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected encoder type tis recommended that encoder connection 1 group 92 Encoder 1 configuration is used whenever possible since the data received through that interface is fresher than the data received through connection 2 this group 93 01 Encoder 2 type Activates the communication with optional encoder resolver None interface module 2 None Inactive TTL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder 1 Interface Input TTL encoder input X31 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder interface Input TTL encoder input with commutation support X32 Abs enc Communication active Module type FEN 11 Absolute Encoder Interface Input Absolute encoder input X42 Resolver Communication active Module type FEN 21 Resolver Interface Input Resolver input X52 HTL Communication active Module type FEN 31 HTL Encoder 5 Interface Input HTL encoder input X82 93 02 Encoder 2 source Selects the interface module that the encoder is connected Module 1 to The physical locations and types of encoder interface modules are defined in parameter group 97 Encoder module settings Module 1 Interface module 1 Module 2 Interfac
61. 7 7Z od AL uomejes Jes p ds juejsuo ZC ZC qe 1 e2u819jJo1 p9ads 9 Zc Q O aten ke 398 9 p ds 9gzz O Da Speed reference source selection l 350 Control chain diagrams z anJeA no duel peeds z0 ez Speed reference ramping and shaping O puewulos doe CNV anieA oJaz3no dwey y 10 10 90 ne p ds Loop E doys Kouefueur3 e wa 1190 eyes dols alqeuen ez ez nea zo p aun edeus 6162 Lenta lqeu edors elqeuen gz ez ues z 2 02 NS dM GEEZ pejs Bulbbor 92 02 P 1L sme 2006 auy edeus IC un R 0 ajgeua BuibBor 42 02 LI sel oe euim edeus ol ez n oed Lz z JdVvHS eum oov Oz z G anea uoneJejeoeq Sl ez R M E Lowy uonel l s q 6162 aaa ie aid nad eg 72 62 m 75 RE eneA ZOWN uonejejeoov pL ez O angen uongJo o29 1 Juonoajes ejgeue eouejeg indino dures 92 62 AN ve ix CNV O pueululo dote enea a uonoejes Jos dwey p ez 3INIL 930 n M BuibBof aun 290 262 ent aun doe AoueBieu3 6262 MIL 20 H euim oov Oz z anien dos S 14 11 90 n
62. Brake close delay has elapsed and brake close acknowledgement if chosen by 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection has been received Brake has been requested to open Brake control enabled parameter 44 06 Brake control enable 1 Program features 51 Operation time scheme The simplified time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function Refer to the state diagram above Start command 06 16 b5 Modulating 06 76 b6 Ready ref 06 17 b2 Torque reference Speed reference y Ncs Y HEN rod Brake control signal Le de Ay 44 01 bO ba teed gt Opening torque ed LA request 44 01 b1 Hold stopped request 44 01 b2 Ramp to stopped request 44 01 b3 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 de Start torque at brake open parameter 44 03 Brake open torque reference Stored torque value at brake close 44 02 Brake torque memory lad Motor magnetization delay tod Brake open delay parameter 44 08 Brake open delay hes Brake close speed parameter 44 14 Brake close level led Brake close command delay parameter 44 15 Brake close level delay tog Brake close delay parameter 44 73 Brake close delay Lo Brake close fault delay parameter 44 18 Brake fault delay trod Brake reopen delay parameter 44 76 Brake reopen delay BOW BRAKE OPENING WAIT BOD BRAKE OPENING DELAY BCW BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
63. BuIBBof emea UBU epaeds reonuo 9 22 L l Mol p ds en 99 ZZ c Duibbor CNV anta ejgeue BurbBor 92 02 UB zp ds eo ss zz ene T peys z 2 02 l ewe zp ds eu ya zz ew uu peeds jeonuo es zz A uonoeres uonoun p ds 1suo L zz mM ods l CNV 9AI oe SSO snqpyjel4 e wo 25 ii ejes jas peeds ana es p ds juejsuo pz zz EIS uonoejes Uorpouny peeds eono Lee SSO WWO V 8 0 OS eneA z f s p ds juejsuoo ez zz payuanun jou p ds LO zz Sd44d8 5 Les peeds juejsuoo zz zz WOILIMO PUBCLULUOD ES p ds ON SSO SUB ene eyes jas p ds Ly Zz 2577005 amen o p ds jue3suo 8222 UOHOE SSO uoneoiunuJulo2 GO Et ener Z p ds jue3suo 2 22 819 91 90 E20 auB gy aten L pasds uejsuo 9222 anjen eued LOEO 6uagr9o 041009 3 nidlO VAGO anen D p ds juejsuo3 2222 anea JOMION snqpl l i amen 9 p ds juejsuo LC ZZ 9nleA G p ds juejsuo oe zz 222 angen y p ds 8400 6222 enea p ds 9400 8222 anea c p ds ue suo z ZZ ena anen L a Spec amen 1 juejsuoo gece za Al wemers Jes peeds juejsuo p ZC a al vomajes 2 Jes peeds juejsuo
64. C 0 0 0 C C 0 5 0 C C 0 EB sr 44 12 Brake close request Binary 0000 1 1 SIC 44 15 Brake close level delay 44 17 Brake fault function dist 0 2 1 1 45 Energy efficiency 45 01 Saved GW hours 0 65535 GVVh 1 1 GWh 45 02 Saved MW hours 0 999 MVVh 1 1 MWh 45 03 Saved kW hours 0 0 999 0 kWh 10 1 kWh 45 05 Saved money x1000 0 4294967295 1 1 thousand 45 06 Saved money Real 0 00 999 99 selecta 100 1 unit ble 45 08 CO2 reduction in kilotons Real 0 65535 metric kil 1 1 metric oton kiloton 298 Additional parameter data 45 09 CO2 reduction in tons Real 0 0 999 9 metric 10 1 metric ton ton O 45 12 Energy tariff 1 Real 0 000 4294967295 000 selecta 1000 1 unit ble 45 13 Energy tariff 2 Real 0 000 4294967295 000 selecta 1000 1 unit ble 45 14 Tariff selection Binary 1 Src 45 17 Tariff currency unit List 100 102 45 18 CO2 conversion factor Real x 1000 1 metric ton MVVh 10000000 0 WW 10 2 1 kW 25 1 1 Eh O o o O o o fo 2 O o o e 5 O o 45 21 Energy calculations reset List 100 1 rpm 100 1 Hz 10 1 10 1 kW 0 kVV 0 0 8 100 1 rpm Nem 100 1 Hz 1 1 47 01 Data storage 1 real32 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 47 02 Data storage 2 real32 Real 2147483 008 2147483 008 Real 2147483 008
65. Displays in integer format the data to be sent to the external value controller as vvord 1 of dataset 11 None None If no data has been preselected by 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter 0 65535 Data to be sent as vvord 1 of dataset 11 No Name Value 61 102 Data set 11 data 2 value 61 103 Data set 11 data 3 value 61 104 Data set 13 data 1 value 61 124 Data set 25 data 3 value 0 65535 62 D2D and DDCS receive data 62 01 M F data 1 selection Parameters 239 Displays in integer format the data to be sent to the external controller as vvord 2 of dataset 11 If no data has been preselected by 67 52 Data set 11 data 2 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter Displays in integer format the data to be sent to the external controller as vvord 3 of dataset 11 If no data has been selected by 67 53 Data set 11 data 3 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter Displays in integer format the data to be sent to the external controller as vvord 1 of dataset 13 If no data has been selected by 67 54 Data set 13 data 1 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter Displays in integer format the data to be sent to the external controller as vvord 3 of dataset 25 If no data has been selected by 61 74 Data set 25 data 3
66. Drive status word 1 bit 1 This parameter is read only Description Not ready run 1 DC voltage is missing or drive has not been parametrized correctly Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99 2 SSWihbi Control program is Keeping ise innhibied sit 5 Lostrunenable 1 Run enable signal missing FSO mmt T Operation prevented by FSO sasiy funcions module 7 Current calibration 1 Current calibration routine has finished ended 6 Druvendei T Motoridentfication run has finished 34 Aut resetinhibi 0000h FFFFh Start inhibit status word 121 90 Parameters 06 19 Speed control Speed control status word status word This parameter is read only Bi Pame Description Zerospeed f Drive is running at zero speed 1 Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed limit 1 Forward par 21 06 1 Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed limit par 21 06 1 Motor speed outside speed window see par group 24 Speed reference conditioning 4 Internal speed feedback 1 Estimated speed feedback used see par 90 41 5 Encoder 1 feedback 1 Encoder 1 used for speed feedback see par 90 41 Encoder 2 feedback 1 Encoder 2 used for speed feedback see par 90 41 Im Speed 1 Aconstant speed has been selected see par 06 20 0000h FFFFh Speed control status vvord 1 1 06 20 Constant speed Constant speed status word Indi
67. Ext1 in2 and 20 05 Ext1 in3 The source selected by 20 05 Ext1 in3 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of State of State of source 1 source 2 source 3 Command Note Parameter 20 02 Ext1 start trigger has no effect with this setting Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter A D2D or M F link The start and stop commands are taken from another drive through the D2D Drive to drive link or the master follower link DDCS controller The start and stop commands are taken from an external DDCS controller Application The start and stop commands are taken from the application Program program control word parameter 06 02 Application control 5 12 15 16 21 word 134 Parameters 20 02 Ext1 start trigger Defines whether the start signal for external control location 1 Edge EXT1 is edge triggered or level triggered Note This parameter is not effective if a pulse type start signal is selected See the descriptions of the selections of parameter 20 01 Ext1 commands Level The start signal is level triggered 1 20 03 Edi Selects source 1 for parameter 20 01 Ext commands DI1 DI1 Digital input DI1 70 02 DI delayed status bit 0 D Digital input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 D Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 DI4 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 DI5 Digital input DI5 70 02 D
68. RO1 ON delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1 Status of selected source ton 14 35 RO1 ON delay tog 14 36 RO1 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for RO1 14 35 Al scaled at Al1 Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al1 value defined by parameter 14 33 A 1 min 14 27 14 36 RO1 OFF delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1 See parameter 14 35 RO1 ON delay 14 36 scaled at Al1 Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al1 value defined by parameter 14 34 A 1 max See the drawing at parameter 14 35 A 1 scaled at Al1 min 14 37 RO2 source Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2 energized For the available selections see parameter 14 11 DIO1 output source 116 Parameters 1438 RO2 ON delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2 Status of selected source on 14 38 RO2 ON delay log 14 39 RO2 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for RO2 14 39 RO2 OFF delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 0 0 s Defines the deactivation delay for relay outpu
69. Real Analog src Real Real Lo Di D o o o o Additional parameter data 281 Range 32768 000 32767 000 32768 000 32767 000 22 000 22 000 32768 000 32767 000 22 000 22 000 0 000 30 000 22 000 22 000 22 000 22 000 32768 000 32767 000 32768 000 32767 000 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 0 000 22 000 0 000 22 000 0 000 30 000 32768 0 32767 0 32768 0 32767 0 0 000 22 000 0 000 22 000 mA or V S mA or V mA or V 3 S 3 3 O m 1000 1 1000 1 1000 1 unit 1000 1 1000 1 unit 121 II COT x II 15 1000 1 mA or V 1000 1 mA Or V 1000 1000 a 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 15 1 1 1000 1 1000 1 O O SE CH II E O 16 01 16 02 16 03 16 05 16 06 16 09 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 Module 3 type DIO1 configuration DIO1 filter gain Not visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 DIO1 output source DIO1 ON delay DIO1 OFF delay DIO2 configuration DIO2 filter gain Not visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 Binary src Real Real List List Lo Lo Lo Q Lo e oc cl gt 7 ojo ojo o e N NI O1 E 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0
70. Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run 90 seconds Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately N 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Standstill Standstill ID run The motor is iniected vvith DC current VVith an asynchronous motor the motor shaft is not rotating with permanent magnet motor the shaft can rotate 0 5 revolution Note This mode should be selected only if the Normal Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics e g with lift or crane applications Autophasing During autophasing the start angle of the motor is determined Note that other motor model values are not updated See also parameter 21 13 Autophasing mode Notes Autophasing can only be selected after the Normal Reduced Standstilll Advanced ID run has been performed once Autophasing is used with a permanent magnet motor when an absolute encoder a resolver or an encoder with commutation signals has been added or replaced and there is no need to perform the NormallReducediStandstilllAdvanced ID run again During Autophasing the motor shaft must NOT be locked and the load torque must be lt 5 Current Current offset and gain measurement
71. See parameter 14 61 A 3 filter gain 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 15 14 63 Al min Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or Defines the minimum value for analog input Al3 V See also parameter 14 21 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Minimum value of Als 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 64 max Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type 11 10 000 mA or Defines the maximum value for analog input Al3 V See also parameter 14 21 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Maximum value of Al3 1000 1 mA mA or V or V Parameters 121 14 65 Al scaled at AIS Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 m n Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al3 value defined by parameter 14 63 A 3 min 14 57 14 66 Al scaled at Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al3 value defined by parameter 14 64 A 3 max See the drawing at parameter 14 65 A 3 scaled at AI3 min 14 71 AO force selection Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 00000000h The value of the analog output can be overridden for eg testing purposes A forced value parameter 14 78 1 force data is provided for the analog output and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1 Bit Value 1 Force 1 to value of parameter 14 78 1 force data Reserved 00000000h Forced va
72. Setpoint function Selects a mathematical function between the setpoint In1 or In2 sources selected by parameters 40 16 Setpoint 1 source and 40 17 Setpoint 2 source parameter 40 25 Sefpoint selection is used simorsousostan z TT rg souseT malipied by souree2 055 Source 1 divided by source 2 Bi Gl N gt unt Tesch s me sneoototsoeet E sqrt In1 In2 Square root of source 1 source 2 9 sqrt In1 In2 Square root of Source 1 source 2 10 sqrt In1 sqrt In2 Square root of source 1 square root of source 2 40 19 Internal setpoint Selects together with 40 20 Internal setpoint selection 2 the Not selected selection 1 internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters 40 21 40 24 Source defined Source defined by par 40 19 by par 40 20 Setpoint preset active 0 TT ra 3 par 4023 4 40 24 Not selected J O i 7 DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 77 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 10 DIO2 Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 11 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 40 20 Internal setpoint Selects together with 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 the Not selected selection 2 internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters 40 21 40 24 See table at 40 79 Internal setpoint selection 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 10 02 DI delayed status bi
73. T filter time constant 0 000 30 000s Filter time constant 1000 15 Parameters 123 14 80 AO1 source min Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 77 AO1 source that corresponds to the minimum AO 1 output value defined by parameter 14 82 AO1 out at AO7 src min laos MA Signal real selected by par 14 77 Signal real selected by par 14 77 14 81 source max Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 77 AO1 source that corresponds to the maximum 1 output value defined by parameter 14 83 AO1 out at AO1 src max See parameter 14 80 AO1 source min 32768 0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1 1 32 67 0 value 14 82 AOT1 out at AO1 src Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA min Defines the minimum output value for analog output See also drawing at parameter 14 80 AO7 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Minimum AO1 output value 1000 1 mA 1483 out at AO1 src Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 20 000 mA Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1 See also drawing at parameter 14 80 AO7 source min 0 000 22 000 mA Maximum AO1 output value 1000 1 mA 124 Parameters 15 I O extension Configuration of I O extension module 2 module 2 See also section Programma
74. The brake control logic observes the settings of parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control as well as several external signals and moves between the states presented in the diagram on page 49 The tables below the state diagram detail the states and transitions The timing diagram on page 57 shows an example of a close open close sequence Inputs of the brake control logic The start command of the drive bit 5 of 06 16 Drive status word 1 is the main control source of the brake control logic An external open close signal can optionally be selected by 44 12 Brake close request The two signals interact as follows Start command 1 AND signal selected by 44 72 Brake close request 0 Request brake to open e Start command 0 OR signal selected by 44 12 Brake close request 1 Request brake to close Another external signal for example from a higher level control system can be connected via parameter 44 11 Keep brake closed to prevent the brake from opening Other signals that affect the state of the control logic are brake status acknowledgement optional defined by 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection e bit 2 of 06 11 Main status word indicates whether the drive is ready to follow the given reference or not e bit 6 of 06 16 Drive status word 1 indicates whether the drive is modulating or not e optional FSO xx safety functions module Outputs of the brake control logic The mechanical brake is to be c
75. and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36 76 and 36 17 respectively None peak value Togor dsa O 01 10 Motor torque page 84 8 wat 07 74 Out power page BN 40 01 Process PID actual value page 203 36 02 PVL filter time Peak value logger filtering time See parameter 36 01 PVL 2 00 s signal 0 00 120 00 s Peak value logger filtering time 100 15 36 06 12 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2 The signal is sampled at 200 millisecond intervals when the drive is running The results are displayed by parameters 36 40 36 49 Each parameter represents an amplitude range and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range The signal value corresponding to 100 is defined by parameter 36 07 AL2 signal base Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36 09 Reset loggers The date and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36 50 and 36 51 respectively For the selections see parameter 36 01 PVL signal 36 07 AL2 signal base Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100 amplitude 100 00 0 00 32767 00 Signal value corresponding to 100 36 09 Reset loggers Resets the peak value logger and or amplitude logger 2 Done Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset Reset completed or not requested normal operation Motor torque Parameters 201 3070 PVL peak value Peak vale recorded by he peak 100 32767
76. as well as optional FIO xx I O extension modules Digital Analog Relay Location inputs i outputs outputs Three I O extension modules can be activated and configured using parameter groups 14 16 Note Each configuration parameter group contains parameters that display the values of the inputs on that particular extension module These parameters are the only way of utilizing the inputs on l O extension modules as signal sources To connect to an input choose the setting Other in the source selector parameter then specify the appropriate value parameter and bit for digital signals in group 14 15 or 16 Settings Parameter groups 14 I O extension module 1 page 108 15 I O extension module 2 page 124 and 16 I O extension module 3 page 127 Fieldbus control The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its fieldbus interfaces See chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter page 333 Settings Parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter FBA page 227 51 FBA A settings page 231 52 FBA A data in page 232 and 53 FBA A data out page 233 Master follower functionality General The master follower functionality can be used to link several drives together so that the load can be evenly distributed between the drives This is ideal in applications where the motors are coupled to each other via gearing chain belt etc 28 Program features The external control signals are
77. between numerator the load ie driven equipment speed feedback and motor control The gear is used to correct a difference between the load and encoder speeds for example if the encoder is not mounted directly on the rotated machinery 90 53 Load gear numerator Load speed 90 54 Load gear denominator Encoder speed 2147483648 Load gear numerator 2147483647 90 54 Load gear See parameter 90 53 Load gear numerator 1 denominator 2147483648 Load gear denominator 2147483647 90 56 Load position offset Load side position offset The resolution is determined by parameter 90 57 Load position resolution 32768 32767 Load side position offset rev 90 57 Load position Defines how many bits are used for load position count within 16 resolution one revolution 0 32 Load position resolution 90 61 Gear numerator Parameters 90 61 and 90 62 define a gear function betvveen the motor and load speeds O rev 1 90 61 Gear numerator Motor speed 90 62 Gear denominator Load speed 2147483648 Gear numerator motor side 2147483647 90 62 Gear denominator See parameter 90 61 Gear numerator 1 2147483648 Gear denominator load side 2147483647 90 63 Feed constant Parameters 90 63 and 90 64 define the feed constant for the 11 numerator position calculation 90 63 Feed constant numerator 90 64 Feed constant denominator The feed constant converts rotational motion into translatory motion The fee
78. between speed references 1 and 2 Speed selection The sources for the references are defined by parameters reference 1 22 11 Speed ref1 selection and 22 12 Speed ref2 selection respectively 0 Speed reference 1 1 Speed reference 2 MCW bit11 Ext ctrl Bit 11 of 06 07 Main control word page 86 loc NN 2 oie or roar Dr aeayed wats ROS DIS 5 D 4 DI5 Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 5 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 PDI Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 7 D6 8 Digital input DI6 10 02 DI delayed status bit 5 B DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 1 3 7 11 12 1 2 Digital input output DIO2 77 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 Other bit A specific bit in another parameter O 22 15 HAdditive speed ref1 Defines a reference to be added to the speed reference after Zero reference selection see page 346 For the selections see parameter 22 11 Speed ref1 selection Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when any of the stop functions are active selection 8 000 8 000 Speed reference scaling factor 1000 1 22 17 Additive speed ref2 Defines a reference to be added to the speed reference after Zero the speed share function see page 348 For the selections see parameter 22 11 Speed ref1 selection Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when 2
79. brake logic will remain in this state until 44 13 Brake close delay has elapsed At this point if 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge the logic proceeds to BRAKE CLOSED state If an acknowledgement signal source has been selected its state is checked if the state is not brake closed the drive generates an A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed warning If 44 17 Brake fault function Fault the drive will trip on a 7142 Mechanical brake closing failed fault after 44 18 Brake fault delay BRAKE CLOSED The brake is closed 44 01 Brake control status bO 0 The drive is not necessarily modulating A warning can alternatively be selected by 44 17 Brake fault function if so the drive will keep modulating and remain in this state State change conditions n 10 Brake control disabled parameter 44 06 Brake control enable 0 06 11 Main status word bit 2 O or brake is forced to close by optional FSO xx safety functions module Brake has been requested to open and 44 16 Brake reopen delay has expired Brake open conditions such as 44 10 Brake open torque fulfilled and 44 11 Keep brake closed O 44 08 Brake open delay has elapsed and brake open acknowledgement if chosen by 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection has been received Brake has been requested to close Motor speed has remained below closing speed Z4 14 Brake close level for the duration of 44 15 Brake close level delay 44 13
80. calibration The measurement calibration will be performed at next start calibration Parameters 269 Advanced Advanced ID run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID run can take a couple of minutes This mode should be selected when top performance is needed in the whole operating area Notes e The driven machinery must be de coupled from the motor because of high torque and speed transients that are applied During the run the motor may rotate both in the forward and reverse direction WARNING The motor may run at up to the maximum N positive and minimum negative allowed speed during the ID run Several accelerations and decelerations are done The maximum torque current and speed allowed by the limit parameters may be utilized ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN 99 14 Identification run Shows the mode of the ID run that was performed last For performed more information of the different modes see the selections of parameter 99 13 Identification run request Current Current measurement calibration Z Q l B Cool Ml gt measurement calibration 99 15 Motor polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor 0 1000 Number of pole pairs 99 16 Phase order Switches the rotation direction of motor This parameter can UVW be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction for example because of the wrong phase order in th
81. check with your local ABB representative DC switch monitoring through the DIIL input disabled DC switch monitoring through the DIIL input enabled 95 09 Fuse switch control Activates communication to a BSFC xx switch fuse controller Disable This setting is intended for use with inverter modules that are connected to a DC bus through a DC switch charging circuit controlled by a BSFC xx switch fuse controller The BSFC controls and monitors the charging of the inverter unit and sends an enable command when the charging has finished When the DC switch is opened the BSFC stops the inverter For more information see BSFC documentation Communication with BSFC disabled TO Parameters 259 96 System Language selection parameter save and restore user parameter sets control unit reboot 96 01 Language Selects the language of the parameter interface and other displayed information when viewed on the control panel Notes e Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported This parameter does not affect the languages visible in the Drive composer PC tool Those are specified under View Settings Chinese Simplified Simplified Chinese 2052 PRC 96 04 Macro select Selects the application macro See chapter Application macros page 65 for more information Done After a selection is made the parameter reverts automatically to Done 96 05 Macro active Shows which application
82. control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 2147483008 Reading of value counter 1 2147483008 33 51 Value counter 1 Sets the warning limit for value counter 1 limit 2147483008 Warning limit for value counter 1 2147483008 33 52 Value counter 1 Configures value counter 1 This counter measures by 00b function integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 33 53 Value counter 1 source A divisor may be applied to the count see 33 54 Value counter 1 divider When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 33 51 Value counter 1 limit the warning specified by 33 55 Value counter 1 warning select is given if enabled by this parameter The signal is sampled at 1 second intervals Note that the scaled see the Def FbEq16 column at the signal in question value is used The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 33 50 Value counter 1 actual Bit 4 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached 2 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Value counter 1 configuration word 33 53 Value counter 1 Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1 N
83. data received from enable and sent to fieldbus adapter A in parameters 50 13 50 18 This functionality should only be used for debugging Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A disabled Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A ensabled 1 50 13 FBA A control word Displays the raw unmodified control word sent by the master PLC to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 00000000h Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter A FFFFFFFFh 50 14 FBA A reference 1 Displays raw unmodified reference REF1 sent by the master PLC to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by Not selected Not selected Disable parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 2147483648 Ravv REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A 2147483647 230 Parameters 50 15 FBA A reference 2 Displays raw unmodified reference REF2 sent by the master PLC to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 2147483648 Ravv REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A 2147483647 50 16 FBA A status word 1 Displays the raw unmodified status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master PLC if debugging is enabled by parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 00000000h Status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to m
84. drives up to 45 kW Control performance optimized for long motor cables 97 03 Sip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip 100 means full slip gain 076 means no slip gain The default value is 100 Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip gain Example with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite of the full slip gain 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rem The static speed error is 1000 rpm 998 rpm 2 rpm To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased At the 105 gain value no static speed error exists 2 rpm 40 100 rpm 5 0 200 Slip gain 1 190 97 04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve When the 0 voltage reserve has decreased to the set value the drive enters the field weakening area If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Uy 550 V and the voltage reserve is 5 the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady state operation is 0 95 x 550 V sqrt 2 369 V The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier 4 50 Voltage reserve 1 196 97 05 Flux braking Defines the level of braking power Disabled Disabled Fl
85. filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware approximately 0 25 ms time constant This cannot be changed by any parameter 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 15 12 17 Al1min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al1 0 000 mA or V 22 000 22 000 1 Minimum value of Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V Parameters 103 12 18 max Defines the maximum value for analog input 20 000 mA or 10 000 V 22 000 22 000 Maximum value of Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 12 19 A T scaled at Al1 Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0 000 min analog input value defined by parameter 12 17 A 1 min 12 12 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al1 value 1 1 32767 000 12 20 Al scaled at Al1 Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum 1500 0 max analog input Al1 value defined by parameter 12 18 A 1 max See the drawing at parameter 12 19 A 1 scaled at Al1 min 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to maximum Al1 value 1 1 32767 000 12 21 Al2 actual value Displays the value of analog input Al2 in mA or V depending mE on whether the input is set to current or voltage by jumper J2 This parameter is read only 22 000 22 000 Value of analog input AI2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 12 22 Al2 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI2 a
86. greater than or equal to the value of 22 52 Critical speed 1 low 30000 00 High limit for critical speed 1 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 54 Critical speed 2 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2 0 00 rpm Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22 55 Critical speed 2 high 30000 00 Low limit for critical speed 2 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 55 Critical speed 2 Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2 0 00 rpm high Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22 54 Critical speed 2 low 30000 00 High limit for critical speed 2 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 56 Critical speed 3 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3 0 00 rpm Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22 5 Critical speed 3 high 30000 00 Low limit for critical speed 3 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 57 Critical speed 3 Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3 0 00 rpm high Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22 56 Critical speed 3 low 30000 00 High limit for critical speed 3 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 150 Parameters No Name Value 22 81 Speed reference 1 act Displays the value of speed reference source 1 selected by parameter 22 11 Speed ref1 selection See the control chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Value of refe
87. is used as a digital output or input ora Output frequency input Output DIO1 is used as a digital output 27 Input DIOT is used as a digital input 1 Frequency DIO1 is used as a frequency input 2 11 06 DIO1 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output Ready run DIO1 when parameter 11 05 DIO1 configuration is set to Output Running Bit 4 of 06 16 Drive status vvord 1 see page 88 7 St oni Aspecte bitin another parameter Q l B NI 98 Parameters DIO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO1 when used as a digital output or digital input 1 DIO status lil ll 0 11 07 Delayed DIO status lt gt lt gt ton tor ton 11 07 DIO1 ON delay tor 11 08 DIO1 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 77 07 DIO status Indicated by 11 02 DIO delayed status 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for DIO1 11 08 DIO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DIO1 0 0 s when used as a digital output or digital input See parameter 11 07 DIO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIO1 frequency output Dt DOZswedesadgiaowpt 0 11 10 11 11 DIO2 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output Running DIO2
88. macro is currently selected See Factory chapter Application macros page 65 for more information To change the macro use parameter 96 04 Macro select Factory Factory macro see page 66 Hand Auto Hand Auto macro see page 68 PID CTRL PID control macro see page 70 T CTRL Torque control macro see page 74 260 Parameters Sequence control Sequential control macro see page 76 5 FIELDBUS Fieldbus control macro see page 79 96 06 Parameter restore Restores the original settings of the control program ie parameter default values Done Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Restore defaults All editable parameter values are restored to default values except e motor data and ID run results control panel PC communication settings UO extension module settings fieldbus adapter settings encoder configuration data N gt O Clear all All editable parameter values are restored to default values except e control panel PC communication settings e fieldbus adapter settings encoder configuration data PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring Done 96 07 Parameter save Saves the valid parameter values to permanent memory Note A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or panel but not when altered through a fieldbus adapter connection unit The value reverts to 0 automatically 0 4294967295 1 Reboot con
89. max Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 1500 0 See parameter 14 81 AO7 source max Parameters 127 15 82 AO out at AO1 src Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA min See parameter 14 82 AO1 out at AO1 src min 15 83 AOT out at AOT1 src Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 20 000 mA max See parameter 14 83 AO1 out at AO1 src max 16 I O extension Configuration of I O extension module 3 module 3 See also section Programmable I O extensions page 27 Note The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I O extension module type 16 01 Module 3 type See parameter 74 07 Module 7 type None 16 02 Module 3 location See parameter 74 02 Module 7 location 1 Slot 1 t 16 03 Module 3 status See parameter 74 03 Module 7 status No option 16 05 DIO status See parameter 74 05 D O status 16 09 DIOT configuration See parameter 14 09 DIO1 configuration Input 16 10 DIO1 filter gain Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 7 5 us See parameter 14 10 DIO 1 filter gain 16 11 output source See parameter 14 11 DIO1 output source No energized 16 12 DIO1 ON delay See parameter 14 12 DIO1 ON delay 0 0s 16 13 DIO1 OFF delay See parameter 14 13 DIO1 OFF delay 0 0s 16 14 DIO2 configuration See parameter 14 14 DIO2 configuration Input 16 15 DIO2 filter gain Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 5 us See parameter 14 15 DIO2 filter gain 16 16 DIO2 output source
90. may be required oil a o o Done Refresh done or not requested Configure Refresh parameters 49 01 49 05 The value reverts 1 automatically to Done 50 Fieldbus adapter Fieldbus communication configuration FBA 50 01 FBA A enable Enables disables communication between the drive and Disable fieldbus adapter A Disable Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A disabled Enable Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A enabled 228 Parameters 50 02 FBA A comm loss Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication func break The time delay is defined by parameter 50 03 FBA A No action comm loss timeout Fault Communication break detection active Upon a communication break the drive trips on a 7510 FBA A communication fault and coasts to a stop Last speed Communication break detection active Upon a communication break the drive generates a warning A7C1 FBA A communication and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low pass filtering WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Speed ref safe Communication break detection active Upon a communication break the drive generates a warning 47C1 FBA A communication and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 22 41 Speed ref safe or 28 41 Frequency ref safe when fr
91. motor power given in parameter 45 19 Comparison power Settings Parameter group 45 Energy efficiency page 221 Load analyzer Peak value logger The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred as well as motor current DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak Amplitude loggers The control program has two amplitude loggers For amplitude logger 2 the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running and specify a value that corresponds to 100 The collected samples are sorted into 10 read only parameters according to their amplitude Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points wide and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range Percentage of samples as as as as as as as as as as O O O o O O O O m N ut Y HO SS br 99 y N e Te N Amplitude ranges parameters 36 40 36 49 Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current and cannot be reset With amplitude logger 1 100 corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive I pax The distribution of samples is shown by parameters 36 20 36 29 Program features 63 Settings Parameter group 36 Load analyzer page 200 64 Program features Miscellaneous User parameter sets The drive support
92. mounted directly on the motor shaft 90 43 Motor gear numerator Motor speed 90 44 Motor gear denominator Encoder speed 2147483648 Motor gear numerator 2147483647 90 44 Motor gear See parameter 90 43 Motor gear numerator 1 denominator 2147483648 Motor gear denominator 2147483647 90 45 Motor feedback Selects how the drive reacts to loss of motor feedback fault Fast Jemen O No The feedback selected by 90 41 Motor feedback selection is used Yes Calculated speed estimate is used regardless of setting of 1 90 41 Motor feedback selection 90 51 Load feedback Selects the load speed feedback value used in control None selection Encoder 1 Actual speed measured by encoder 1 The encoder is set up by the parameters in group 92 Encoder 7 configuration Encoder 2 Actual speed measured by encoder 2 The encoder is setup 2 by the parameters in group 93 Encoder 2 configuration A calculated speed estimate is used 3 Motor feedback The source selected by parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection for motor feedback is also used for load feedback Any difference between the motor and load speeds can be compensated by using the load gear function see parameter 90 53 Load gear numerator 90 52 Load speed filter Defines a filter time for load speed feedback 90 03 Load 4 ms time speed 0 10000 ms Load speed filter time Parameters 247 90 53 Load gear Parameters 90 53 and 90 54 define a gear function
93. not excessive Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control Check that acknowledgement signal matches actual status of brake Check mechanical brake connection Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control Check that acknowledgement signal matches actual status of brake Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control especially 44 11 Keep brake closed Check that acknowledgement signal if used matches actual status of brake Check the setting of parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection and the actual source selected Check minimum maximum speed settings parameters 30 11 Minimum speed and 30 12 Maximum speed Check adequacy of motor braking torque Check applicability of torque control Check need for brake chopper and resistor s 380 1 Encoder internal Internal fault Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 327 Code Cause What to do hex Encoder 1 feedback fault If fault appears during first start up before encoder feedback is used Check cable between encoder and encoder interface module FEN xx and order of connector signal wires at both ends of cable If fault appears after encoder feedback has already been used or during drive Check that encoder connection wiring or encoder is not damaged Check that encoder interface modul
94. or HTL 93 10 Pulses revolution 0 65535 93 11 1 Pulse encoder type 93 12 Speed calculation mode 93 13 1 Position estimation enable 93 14 Speed estimation enable 93 15 Transient filter 93 20 Encoder cable fault func 93 21 Encoder cable fault mode Other parameters in this group when parameter 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc 93 10 Sine cosine number 0 65535 93 11 Absolute position source 93 12 Zero pulse enable 0 K o ES 1 ala II II a A a a A 1 mw Ew ol ol ol ol Ol Ol O w Ml Gol xl xl il gt I E A a l o 93 13 Position data width 0 32 93 14 1 Revolution data width 93 30 Serial link mode 93 31 EnDat calc time 93 32 SSI cycle time 93 33 SSI clock eycles 2 127 93 34 SSI position msb 126 93 35 SSI revolution msb 1 126 93 36 SSI data format 93 37 SSI baud rate d NO l A A II x olo Gl c 0 1 O 93 40 SSI zero phase 93 45 1Hiperface parity 93 46 Hiperface baud rate 93 47 Hiperface node address 0 255 Other parameters in this group when parameter 93 01 Encoder 2 type Resolver 93 10 1 Excitation signal frequency kHz 1 1 kHz 93 11 Excitation signal amplitude 4 0 12 0 10 1V ol ol l O w c l on 1 x ES 1 1 1 a al al a II 95 HW configur
95. output source Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output energized DIO3 when parameter 14 19 DIOS configuration is set to Output For the available selections see parameter 14 11 D O1 output source Parameters 111 14 21 Al tune Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 No action Triggers the analog input tuning function which enables the use of actual measurements as the minimum and maximum input values instead of potentially inaccurate estimates Apply the minimum or maximum signal to the input and select the appropriate tuning function See also the drawing at parameter 14 35 A 1 scaled at Al1 min No action Tuning action completed or no action has been requested The parameter automatically reverts to this value after any tuning action Al1 min tune The measured value of Al1 is set as the minimum value of 1 Al1 into parameter 14 33 min Al1 max tune The measured value of Al1 is set as the maximum value of 2 Al1 into parameter 14 34 max AI2 min tune The measured value of Al2 is set as the minimum value of 3 Al2 into parameter 14 48 A 2 min 0 0s AI2 max tune The measured value of Al2 is set as the maximum value of Al2 into parameter 14 49 A 2 max Al3 min tune The measured value of Al3 is set as the minimum value of Al3 into parameter 74 63 AI3 min Al3 max tune The measured value of Al3 is set as the maximum value of Al3 into
96. overtemperature is detected For the wiring of the sensor refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive Temperature monitoring using KTY84 sensors One KTY84 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 2 0 mA through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius FEN xx encoder interfaces optional also have a connection for one KTY84 sensor The figure and table below show typical KTY84 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Ohm 3000 2000 KTY84 scaling 90 C 936 ohm 110 C 1063 ohm 130 C 1197 ohm 1000 150 C 1340 ohm O 0 DC 100 0 100 200 300 It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected For the wiring of the sensor refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive Program features 59 Settings Parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection page 193 and 91 Encoder module settings page 246 Programmable protection functions External events parameters 31 01 31 10 External event signals can be connected to selectable inputs When the
97. page 27 Note The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I O extension module type Activates and specifies the type of I O extension module 1 None 14 02 Module 1 location Specifies the slot 1 3 on the control unit of the drive into 1 Slot 1 which the 1 O extension module is installed 1 254 Slot number 14 08 Module 1 status Displays the status of 1 O extension module 1 No option No module detected in the specified slot No communication A module has been detected but cannot be communicated 1 with FIO 01 An FIO 01 module has been detected and is active FIO 11 An FIO 11 module has been detected and is active 14 05 DIO status Displays the electrical status of the digital input outputs on the extension module The activation deactivation delays if any are specified are ignored Bit O indicates the status of DIO1 Note The number of active bits in this parameter depends on the number of digital input outputs on the extension module Example 00001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off This parameter is read only 0000h FFFFh Status of digital input outputs 14 06 DIO delayed status Displays the status of the digital input outputs on the extension module This word is updated only after activation deactivation delays if any are specified Bit 0 indicates the status of DIO1 Note The number of active bits in this parameter depends on the number of digital input
98. page 271 Other bit The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter The source is selected from a parameter list Parameter Either a user adjustable operating instruction for the drive or an actual signal p u Per unit 82 Parameters Summary of parameter groups 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive 03 Input references Values of references received from various sources 04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last 05 Diagnostics Various run time type counters and measurements related to drive maintenance 84 85 87 88 91 91 102 104 108 124 127 130 19 Operation mode Selection of external control location sources and operating modes 20 Start stop direction Start stop direction and run start jog enable signal source 132 selection positive negative reference enable signal source selection 21 Start stop mode Start and stop modes emergency stop mode and signal source 140 selection DC magnetization settings autophasing mode selection 22 Speed reference selection Speed reference selection 23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings 24 Speed reference Speed error calculation speed error window control configuration conditioning speed error step 25 Speed control Speed controller settings 26 Torque reference chain Settings of the torque reference chain 28 Frequency reference chain Settings of the frequency reference cha
99. parameter 14 50 A12 scaled at Al2 min 16 51 A 2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 51 A 2 scaled at Al2 max 16 56 Al actual value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 56 A 3 actual value 16 57 AIl scaled value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 57 A12 scaled value 16 58 AI force data Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 58 A12 force data 16 59 AIS HW switch pos Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 59 AI3 HW switch pos 16 60 Al unit selection Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 60 A12 unit selection 16 61 A S filter gain Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 61 A12 filter gain 16 62 AI filter time Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 14 62 filter time 16 63 AIl min Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 63 AI3 min V 16 64 Al max Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 64 A12 max V 16 65 AR scaled at Al3 Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 min See parameter 14 65 A12 scaled at A12 min 16 66 A scaled at Al3 Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 66 A 3 scaled at AI3 max 16 71 force selection Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 00000000h See parameter 14 7
100. parameter 14 64 A 3 max 14 22 DIOS ON delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO3 1 DIO status MI ll 0 mu WIEN 1 Delayed DIO status 0 S x Lan 14 22 DIO3 ON delay log 14 23 DIO3 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 14 05 DIO status Indicated by 14 06 DIO delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DIO3 112 Parameters 14 22 Al force sel Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 00000000h The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden for eg testing purposes A forced value parameter is provided for each analog input and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1 Bit Value 1 Force to value of parameter 14 28 Al1 force data 1 H Force Al2 to value of parameter 14 43 AI2 force data 2 1 Force AI3 to value of parameter 14 58 A 3 force data Reserved 14 28 DIOS OFF delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DIO3 See parameter 14 22 DIOS ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIO3 14 24 DIO4 configuration Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Input Selects whether DIO4 of the extension module is used as a digital input or output Output DIO4 is used as a digita
101. parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 65535 metric Reduction in CO emissions in metric kilotons 1 1 metric kilotons kiloton 45 09 CO2 reduction in Reduction in CO emissions in metric tons compared to tons direct on line motor connection This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of parameter 45 18 CO2 conversion factor by default 0 5 metric tons MWh When this parameter rolls over parameter 45 08 CO2 reduction in kilotons is incremented This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 0 999 9 metric Reduction in CO emissions in metric tons 1 1 metric tons ton 45 11 Energy optimizer Enables disables the energy optimization function The Disable function optimizes the flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed Note With a permanent magnet motor energy optimization is always enabled regardless of this parameter Energy optimization disabled Energy optimization enabled 1 45 12 Energy tariff 1 Defines energy tariff 1 price of energy per kWh Depending 1 000 units on the setting of parameter 45 14 Tariff selection this value or 45 13 Energy tariff 2 is used for reference when monetary savings are calculated The currency is defined by parameter
102. pos 15 60 Al3 unit selection Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 60 A 3 unit selection 15 61 X AI3 filter gain Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 61 A12 filter gain 15 602 Al filter time Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 74 62 A 3 filter time 15 63 AI3 min Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 63 A12 min V 15 64 AI3 max Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 64 A 3 max V 15 65 Al scaled at Al3 Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 min See parameter 14 65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min 15 66 A12 scaled at Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 66 A 3 scaled at AI3 max 15 71 AO force selection Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 00000000h See parameter 14 71 AO force selection 15 76 AC1 actual value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 76 AO1 actual value 15 77 1 source Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 Zero See parameter 14 77 AO7 source 15 78 1 force data Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 78 AO1 force data 15 79 AO filter time Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 74 79 AOT filter time 15 80 AQT1 source min Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 80 AO7 source min 15 81 source
103. reference used in speed controller output reference balancing The output of the speed controller is forced to this value when balancing is enabled by parameter 25 09 Speed ctrl balance enable In order to guarantee smooth operation during output balancing the D part of the speed controller is disabled and the acceleration compensation term is set to zero 300 300 Speed control output balancing reference 25 11 Min torque speed Defines the minimum speed controller output torque 300 0 control 1600 0 0 0 Minimum speed controller output torque See par 46 03 25 12 Max torque speed 1 Defines the maximum speed controller output torque 300 0 control 0 0 1600 0 Maximum speed controller output torque 46 03 25 15 Proportional gain Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller when an 10 00 em stop emergency stop is active See parameter 25 02 Proportional gain 0 00 250 00 Proportional gain upon an emergency stop 100 1 25 53 Torque prop Displays the output of the proportional P part of the speed reference controller See the control chain diagram on page 353 This parameter is read only 30000 0 P part output of speed controller See par 30000 0 46 03 25 54 Torque integ Displays the output of the integral 1 part of the speed reference controller See the control chain diagram on page 353 This parameter is read only 30000 0 l part output of speed controller See par 30000 0 46
104. reflects the status of the DIIL input Example 1000000000010011 DIIL DI5 DI2 and DI1 are on DI3 DI4 and DI6 are off This parameter is read only 10 02 delayed status Displays the status of digital inputs DIIL and DI6 DI1 This word is updated only after activation deactivation delays if any are specified Bits 0 5 reflect the delayed status of DI1 DI6 bit 15 reflects the delayed status of the DIIL input This parameter is read only 10 03 DI force selection The electrical statuses of the digital inputs can be overridden for eg testing purposes A bit in parameter 10 04 DI force data is provided for each digital input and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1 Bit Value 0 1 Force DI1 to value of bit O of parameter 10 04 DI force data 1 1 Force DI2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10 04 DI force data 2 1 Force 13 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10 04 DI force data 1 Force DI4 to value of bit 3 of parameter 10 04 DI force data 1 Force DI5 to value of bit 4 of parameter 10 04 DI force data 1 Force DI6 to value of bit 5 of parameter 10 04 DI force data Reserved 15 1 Force DIL to value of bit 15 of parameter 10 04 DI force data 92 Parameters 10 04 DI force data Contains the values of digital inputs that are used instead of 1 0000h the electrical statuses if selected in parameter 10 03 DI force selection Bit O is the forced value for DI1 bit 15 is t
105. s 1021s 41 34 Derivation time 0 0 10 0 S 1000 15 10 15 10 1 10 15 1 2 EI ouam Re 007680 SHE MCN NM a 34 bervatonime 25 Dervaton 36 Outpatmin Sr n 41 36 Output min 32768 0 32767 0 5 1 0 0 0 41 44 Sleep delay 0 0 3600 0 0 0 0 S S S 41 35 Derivation filter time 0 0 10 0 10 S S 32767 0 ss e 9 Z 41 45 Sleep boost time 3600 0 41 47 Wake up deviation Real 2147483648 rpm or 100 1 rpm 2147483647 H or Hz C C C C P 41 50 Tracking ref selection Analog Sr 6 1 1 1000 S Trim selection We 41 53 Trimmed ref pointer SIC 1 1s 1s 1 41 48 Wake up delay 0 00 60 00 100 1s 1 1 1 a ee II E gt a s O J 2 O Q 3 D Cl D Lu Cl Lu IN KO N 41 55 Trim adjust 100 000 100 000 41 56 Correction source 1 NO sg E o l A LU o y o kel 43 06 Brake chopperenable Lit rt S poeeme 910580 44 01 Brake control status PB 0000000 11Mb J t 1 44 02 Brake torque memory 10 1 44 03 Brake open torque reference 10 1 44 06 1 Brake control enable Binary Sr Brake acknowledge selection Binary Sr e 44 07 0 0 S 100 1s 44 08 Brake open delay 44 09 Brake open torque source A 0
106. s manual 3AFE68573360 English and FENA 01 11 Ethernet adapter module User s manual 3AUA0000093566 English Parameter User adjustable operation instruction to the drive or signal measured or calculated by the drive PID controller Proportional integral derivative controller Drive speed control Is based on PID algorithm Programmable logic controller Power unit Contains the power electronics and connections of the drive The drive control unit is connected to the power unit Positive temperature coefficient RDCO 0x Optional DDCS communication module Ramp function generator Relay output interface for a digital output signal Implemented with a relay Synchronous serial interface Transistor transistor logic STO TTL UPS Uninterruptible power supply power supply equipment with battery to maintain output voltage during power failure ZCU ZCON Type of control board used in ACS880 drives The board is either integrated into the drive or fitted in a plastic housing see ZCU Type of control unit used in ACS880 drives that consists of a ZCON board built into a plastic housing The control unit may be fitted onto the drive inverter module or installed separately Using the control panel 15 Using the control panel Refer to ACS AP x assistant control panels user s manual 3AUA0000085685 English 16 Using the control panel Control locations and operating modes 17 Control l
107. sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies See table at parameter 28 22 Constant frequency sel1 For the selections see parameter 28 22 Constant frequency self Off 28 24 Constant frequency When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is sel3 0 Separate selects a source that activates constant frequency 3 When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 28 22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28 23 Constant frequency sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies See table at parameter 28 22 Constant frequency sel1 For the selections see parameter 28 22 Constant frequency sel1 Parameters 171 28 26 Constant frequency Defines constant frequency 1 0 00 Hz 1 7 00 500 00 Constant frequency 1 See par 46 02 28 27 777 frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 2 0 00 Hz 7 00 500 00 1 Constant frequency 2 See par 46 02 28 28 7777 frequency Defines constant frequency 3 0 00 Hz ER 00 500 00 Constant frequency 3 See par 46 02 28 29 777 frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 4 0 00 Hz 500 00 500 00 Constant frequency 4 See par Hz 46 02 28 30 Constant frequency Defines constant frequency 5 0 00 Hz 5 57 00 500 00 Constant frequency 5 See par 46 02 28 31 777 frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 6 0 00 Hz 77 900 00 Constant frequency 6 See par 46 02
108. selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter Mapping of data received through the DDCS link See also parameter group 60 D2D and DDCS communication Follower only Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the master through the master follower link See also parameter 62 25 MF D2D data 1 value None CW 16bit Control Word 16 bits Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 16 bits The value is taken from another parameter 62 00 M F data 2 Follower only Defines a target for the data received as word selection 2 from the master through the master follower link See also parameter 62 26 MF D2D data 2 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 16 bits None None None M F data 3 selection Follower only Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the master through the master follower link See also parameter 62 27 MF D2D data 3 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Follower node 2 data 1 sel Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the first follower ie the follower with node address 2 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 28 Follower node 2 data 1 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection 240 Parameters No Name Value 62 05 62 26 Follower node 2 data 2 sel Follower node 2 data 3 sel Follower node 3
109. selects a source that activates constant speed 2 When bit O of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 22 22 Constant speed sel1 and 22 24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 22 22 Constant speed sel1 For the selections see parameter 22 22 Constant speed sel1 When bit O of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 3 When bit O of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 22 22 Constant speed sel1 and 22 23 Constant speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 22 22 Constant speed sel1 For the selections see parameter 22 22 Constant speed sel1 Defines constant speed 1 300 00 rpm Constant speed 1 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 2 0 00 rpm Constant speed 2 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 3 0 00 rpm Constant speed 3 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 4 0 00 rpm Constant speed 4 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 5 0 00 rpm Constant speed 5 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 6 0 00 rpm Constant speed 6 See par 46 01 Defines constant speed 7 0 00 rpm Constant speed 7 See par 46 01 Defines a safe speed reference that is used with supervision 0 00 rpm parameters such as e 49 05 Commu
110. signal is lost an external event fault warning or a mere log entry is generated The contents of the message can be edited on the control panel by selecting Settings Edit texts Motor phase loss detection parameter 31 19 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected Earth fault detection parameter 31 20 The earth fault detection function is based on sum current measurement Note that e an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection e na grounded supply the protection activates in 200 milliseconds e in an ungrounded supply the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more e the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 meters will not activate the protection e the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped Supply phase loss detection parameter 31 21 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected Safe torque off detection parameter 31 22 The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input and this parameter selects which indications are given when the signals are lost The parameter does not affect the operation of the Safe torque off function itself For more information on the Safe torque off function see the Hardware manual Switched supply and motor cabling parameter 31 23 The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been switched for exa
111. speed controller 1000 1s S 25 05 Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant See parameter 8 0 ms 25 04 Derivation time 0 0 1000 0 ms Derivation filter time constant Parameters 161 25 06 Acc comp Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration 0 00 s derivation time compensation In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described under parameter 25 04 Derivation time Note As a general rule set this parameter to the value between 50 and 10096 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed Acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed 0 00 1000 00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time 25 07 Acc comp filter time Defines the acceleration or deceleration compensation filter 8 0 ms time constant See parameters 25 04 Derivation time and 25 06 Acc comp derivation time 0 0 1000 0 ms Acceleration deceleration compensation filter time 1 1 ms 162 Parameters 25 08 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate in percent of the nominal motor speed 0 00 Drooping decreases the drive speed slightly as the drive load i
112. speed controller output that is transferred to the speed control torque controller See the control chain diagram on page 353 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Limited speed controller output torque 46 03 t to 25 02 Proportional gain Defines the proportional gain K of the speed controller Too high a gain may cause speed oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain K 1 T Integration time 0 Tp Derivation time 0 Error value Controller output Controller e Error value output K x e If gain is set to 1 a 10 change in error value reference actual value causes the speed controller output to change by 10 0 00 250 00 Proportional gain for speed controller 100 1 No Name Value 25 03 Integration time Kpxe xr K xe J ee uv Am uv nv sv nv uv sv uv nv sv nv mm Am mm mm Am Am e Parameters 159 Defines the integration time of the speed controller The 2 50 s integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1 The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable If parameter value is set to zero the l part of the controller is disabled Anti windup stops
113. the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control Maximum Combination of selections Speed and Torque the torque selector compares the speed controller output 25 07 Torque reference speed control and the torque reference 26 74 Torque ref ramp out and selects the greater of the two If speed error becomes positive the drive follows the speed controller output until speed error becomes negative again This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control Add Combination of selections Speed and Torque Torque selector adds the speed reference chain output to the torque reference chain output 19 14 Ext2 control mode 1 Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2 For the selections see parameter 79 72 Ext control mode 1 19 16 Local control mode Selects the operating mode for local control Speed Speed Speed control The torque reference used is 25 01 Torque reference speed control output of the speed reference chain Torque Torque control The torque reference used is 26 74 Torque ref 1 ramp out output of the torque reference chain 19 17 Local control Enables disables local control disable VVARNINGI Before disabling local control ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive Yes Local control disabled 1 19 20 Scalar control Selects the reference type for scalar motor control mode Rpm Spee
114. the fieldbus netvvork through fieldbus adapter A The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on vvhich actual value type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 50 04 FBA A ref1 type 50 08 FBA A actual 2 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to Auto the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 50 04 FBA A ref1 type 50 09 FBA ASW Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when Not selected transparent source parameter 50 06 FBA A SW selis set to Transparent mode Not selected No source selected The value is taken from another parameter 50 10 FBA A acti When parameter 50 07 FBA A actual 1 type is set to transparent source Transparent this parameter selects the source of actual value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A Not selected No source selected The value is taken from another parameter 50 11 FBA A act2 When parameter 50 08 FBA A actual 2 type is set to transparent source Transparent this parameter selects the source of actual value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A Not selected No source selected The value is taken from another parameter 50 12 FBA A debug Enables the display of raw unmodified
115. to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 3 from follower with node address 2 62 31 Follower node 3 Displays in integer format the data received from the second data 1 value follower ie follower with node address 3 as word 1 Parameter 62 07 Follower node 3 data 1 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address 3 62 32 Follower node 3 Displays in integer format the data received from the second data 2 value follower ie follower with node address 3 as word 2 Parameter 62 08 Follower node 3 data 2 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address 3 62 33 Follower node 3 Displays in integer format the data received from the second data 3 value follower ie follower with node address 3 as word 3 Parameter 62 09 Follower node 3 data 3 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 3 from follower with node address 3 62 34 Follower node 4 Displays in integer format the data received from the third data 1 value followe
116. to the maximum speed torque or frequency the selection between these is made by parameter 40 52 Trim selection Proportional The trim function is active The trimming factor is relative to the reference selected by parameter 40 53 Trimmed ref pointer Combined The trim function is active The trimming factor is a combination of both Direct and Proportional modes the proportions of each are defined by parameter 40 54 Trim mix 40 52 Trim selection Torque torque or frequency reference 40 53 Trimmed ref pointer Zero 40 54 Trim mix When parameter 40 51 Trim mode is set to Combined defines the effect of direct and proportional trim sources in the final trimming factor 0 000 100 proportional 0 500 50 proportional 50 direct 1 000 100 direct 40 55 adjust Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor This value is multiplied by the result of parameter 40 51 Trim mode Consequently the result of the multiplication is used to multiply the result of parameter 40 56 Correction source 1 000 100 000 Multiplier for trimming factor 100 000 40 56 Correction source Selects the reference to be trimmed PID ref 1 1 1 PID ref PID setpoint PID output PID controller output 2 40 57 Sel between set1 Selects the source that determines whether process PID Not selected set2 parameter set 1 parameters 40 07 40 56 or set 2 group 41 Process PID set 2 is used E o ajoj rm gt d N E I o S
117. value 15 43 AI2 force data Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 43 AI2 force data 15 44 AI2 HW switch pos Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 44 Al2 HW switch pos 15 45 Al2unit selection Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 45 AI2 unit selection 15 46 AI2 filter gain Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 46 AI2 filter gain 126 Parameters 15 47 AIQ filter time Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 14 47 A 2 filter time 15 48 Al2 min Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 48 A12 min V 15 49 AI2 max Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 49 A 2 max V 15 50 Al2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 min See parameter 14 50 A 2 scaled at AI2 min 15 51 AI2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 51 A 2 scaled at Al2 max 15 56 Al actual value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 56 A 3 actual value 15 57 AIS3 scaled value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 57 A 3 scaled value 15 58 A13 force data Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 58 A 3 force data 15 59 A12 HW switch pos Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 59 AI3 HW switch
118. warning limit for signal edge counter 1 HJ 0 4294967295 Warning limit for signal edge counter 1 33 32 Edge counter 1 func Configures signal edge counter 1 This counter is 0000b incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 33 33 Edge counter 1 source switches on or off or either depending on the setting of this parameter A divisor may be applied to the count see 33 34 Edge counter 1 divider After the limit set by 33 31 Edge counter 1 limit is reached the warning specified by 33 35 Edge counter 1 warning selection is given if enabled by this parameter and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 33 30 Edge counter 1 actual Bit 2 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset 1 Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 3 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached Count rising edges 0 Disable Rising edges are not counted 1 Enable Rising edges are counted Count falling edges O Disable Falling edges are not counted 1 Enable Falling edges are counted 4 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Edge counter 1 configuration word 1 1 33 33 Edge counter 1 Selects the signal to be monitored by signal edge counter 1 source
119. was not Check the nominal motor values in completed successfully parameter group 99 Motor data Check that no external control system is connected to the drive Cycle the povver to the drive and its control unit if povvered separately Check that no operation limits prevent the completion of the ID run Restore parameters to default settings and try again Check that the motor shaft is not locked FF81 A force trip A fault trip command has been Check the fault information provided by received through fieldbus the PLC adapter A FF82 FB B force trip A fault trip command has been Check the fault information provided by received through fieldbus the PLC adapter B FFSE EFB force trip A fault trip command has been Check the fault information provided by received through the the PLC embedded fieldbus interface 330 Fault tracing Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB 331 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB This feature is not supported by the current firmware version 332 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 333 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains This chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network fieldbus through an optional fieldbus adapter module The fieldbus control
120. when parameter 11 09 DIO2 configuration is set to Output For the available selections see parameter 11 06 DIO1 output source 0 0 s DIO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO2 when used as a digital output or digital input DIO status Delayed DIO status lt gt lt gt on ton 11 11 DIO2 ON delay log 11 12 DIO2 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 77 07 DIO status Indicated by 11 02 DIO delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DIO2 DIO2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DIO2 0 0s when used as a digital output or digital input See parameter 11 11 DIO2 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIO2 1021s Parameters 99 11 38 Freq in 1 actual Displays the value of frequency input 1 before scaling See value parameter 11 42 Freq in 1 min This parameter is read only O 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 1 1 1 Hz 11 39 Freqin 1 scaled Displays the value of frequency input 1 after scaling See parameter 11 42 Freq in 1 min This parameter is read only 11 42 Freqin 1 min Defines the minimum input frequency for frequency input 1 DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input The incoming frequency signal 11 38 Freq in 1 actual value is scaled into an internal signal 11 39 Freq in 1 scaled
121. wi me l Re me Rush contoigan Re men zr E 1 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection S 28 12 Frequency ref2 selection S i 1 5 28 14 Frequency ref1 2 selection b b E 1 1 1 1 28 02 Frequency ref ramp out 500 00 500 00 MEN 28 23 Constant frequency sel2 2 C G 5 C 28 21 Constant frequency function m 00b 11b C una o Constant frequency sel3 C 28 26 Constant frequency 1 l 28 27 Constant frequency 2 500 00 500 00 S S DEAE Binary S 500 00 500 00 100 1 Hz 7 m Constant frequency 5 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 28 28 Constant frequency 3 28 31 Constant frequency 6 500 00 500 00 500 00 500 00 28 32 Constant frequency 7 500 00 500 00 28 41 Frequency ref safe 28 51 Critical frequency function 035 00b 11b Real 500 00 500 00 E SIC 28 72 Acceleration time 0 000 1800 000 1000 15 500 00 500 00 28 53 Critical frequency 1 high 500 00 500 00 gt a Q O J D O Q 3 D Cl D Lu Cl Lu No Co KO a 0 000 1800 000 1000 15 Acceleration time 2 0 000 1800 000 S 1000 15 S 28 73 Deceleration time 1 28 74 28 75 28 76 Deceleration time 2 0 000 1800 000 1000 1s e e e Ramp in zero b Ramp hold b e r e e e S 1 28 77 28 78 28 7
122. 0 26 RO1 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 10 27 RO2 source Binary 1 1 Src 10 28 RO2 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 10 29 RO2 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 Binary 1 1 SIC mg DIO delayed stas Ps mmm r mm pior contoan f us oz Tr Src TR DO2cwfguaon f us Y Tr DIO2 output source Binary Src 276 Additional parameter data WI Ne R io Pe N s Freaintscaled TR R TRT az Fea sedan Real Leem S TTT 145 Frain scaledatmax Real 32768000 32187000 TRT TS Frea ost Tasusl yac Rer 9 198 TETE TSS Fes sem EA 99 1 159 Freaoutt remax Fed 32768000 22767000 0 1 1212 An scales value Fes TRR eem 00 1 ust tt 12 17 Al1 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V We a m r or V 12 19 AI1 scaled at min 32768 000 32767 000 1000 1 12 20 AI1 scaled at max 32768 000 32767 000 poe 1000 1 12 21 AI2 actual value 22 000 22 000 1000 1 mA or V 12 22 AI2 scaled value 32768 000 32767 000 1000 1 12 26 12 filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 15 12 27 12 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V an T or V 422 Raen A mes seram MEE Res EA 399 1 r N N E N Lo O N N Lo O Additional parameter data 277 wl E Rae Tee AOTsoucemex HH ym 10 1 O E NEC NN NEC
123. 0 28 Setpoint increase time 0 0s time 41 29 Setpoint decrease See parameter 40 29 Setpoint decrease time 0 0s time 41 30 Setpoint freeze See parameter 40 30 Setpoint freeze enable Not selected enable 41 31 Deviation inversion See parameter 40 31 Deviation inversion Ref Fbk 41 32 Gain See parameter 40 32 Gain 41 33 Integration time oee parameter 40 33 Integration time 60 0 s NES O Parameters 215 41 38 Output freeze See parameter 40 38 Output freeze enable Not selected enable 2 4146 Sleep boost See parameter 4048 Seep boose 4147 Make deviation See parameter 4047 Wake up d rsin 41 50 Tracking ref See parameter 40 50 Tracking ref selection Zero selection 41 55 Trim adjust See parameter 40 55 Trim adjust 1 000 41 56 Correction source See parameter 40 56 Correction source PID ref 43 Brake chopper Settings of the internal brake chopper m 43 01 Braking resistor Displays the estimated temperature of the braking resistor temperature The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43 09 Brake resistor Pmax cont This parameter is read only 0 0 120 0 Estimated brake resistor temperature 43 06 Brake chopper Enables brake chopper control Disabled enable Note Before enabling brake chopper control ensure that abrake resistor is connected overvoltage control is switched off parameter 30 30 Overvo
124. 0 and 40 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40 36 24 11 40 to 50 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall betvveen 40 and 5096 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50 36 25 ALT 50 to 60 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall between 50 and 60 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60 36 26 ALT 60 to 70 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall between 60 and 70 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70 202 Parameters 36 27 AL1 70 to 80 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 1 0 0096 fall betvveen 70 and 8096 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80 36 28 ALT 80 to 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 1 0 0096 fall betvveen 80 and 9096 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90 36 29 ALT over 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 1 0 0096 exceed 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90 36 40 AL2 0 to 10 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 1 0 0096 fall between 0 and 10 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10 36 41 12 10 to 20 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 0 00 fall between 10 and 20 0 00 100 00 Amplitude
125. 00 PVE peak dare Tne dare on whieh tre peak vae was recorded 0 teen The ne a which the peak vale was recorded Ypeeko mmm 00 32768 00 Motor current at peak 1 1A 32767 00 A 36 14 PVL DC voltage at Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the 0 00 V peak moment the peak value was recorded 0 00 2000 00 V DC voltage at peak 10 1V 36 15 PVL speed at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded 0 00 rpm 32768 00 Motor speed at peak See par 32767 00 rpm 46 01 36 16 PVL reset date The date on which the peak value logger was last reset Last reset date of the peak value logger 36 17 PVL reset time The time at which the peak value logger was last reset 2 Ha Last reset time of the peak value logger DEED 0 00 36 20 11 010 10 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between O and 10 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10 36 21 11 10 to 20 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall betvveen 10 and 2096 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20 36 22 11 20 to 30 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall between 20 and 30 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30 36 23 11 30 to 40 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0 00 fall between 3
126. 1 01 06 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46 12 Filter time output frequency 500 00 500 00 Estimated output frequency See par HZ 46 02 01 07 Motor current Measured absolute motor current in A 0 00 30000 00 A Motor current 1 1A 01 10 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque See also parameter 01 30 Nominal torque scale A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46 13 Filter time motor torque 1600 0 1600 0 Motor torque See par 46 03 01 14 Output power Drive output power in kW A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46 14 Filter time power out 32768 00 Output power 1 1 kW 32767 00 kW 01 18 Inverter GWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive in either counter direction in full gigawatt hours The minimum value is zero 0 65535 GWh Energy in GWh 1 1 GWh Parameters 85 01 19 Inverter MWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive in either counter direction in full megawatt hours Whenever the counter rolls over 01 18 Inverter GWh counter is incremented The minimum value is zero 0 999 MWh Energy in MWh 121MMWh 01 20 Inverter kWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive in either counter direction in full kilowatt hours Whenever the counter rolls over 01 1
127. 1 AO force selection 16 76 AC1 actual value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 76 AO7 actual value 16 77 AO1 source Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 Zero See parameter 14 77 AO7 source 16 78 1 force data Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 78 AO1 force data 16 79 AOT filter time Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 14 79 AOT filter time 130 Parameters 16 80 source min Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 80 AO7 source min 16 81 AO1 source max Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 1500 0 See parameter 14 81 AO7 source max 16 82 AOT1 out at AO1 src Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA min See parameter 14 82 AO1 out at AO1 src min 16 83 AOT out at AO1 src Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 20 000 mA max See parameter 14 83 AO7 out at AO1 src max 19 Operation mode Selection of external control location sources and operating modes See also section Operating modes of the drive page 20 19 01 Actual operation Displays the operation mode currently used mode See parameters 19 11 19 14 This parameter is read only Speed Speed control in DTC motor control mode Torque Torque control in DTC motor control mode Min The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed controller 25 01 Torque reference speed control and torque reference
128. 1 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Maximum value of 12 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 50 Al2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al2 value defined by parameter 14 48 A 2 min 14 42 121 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value 32767 000 14 51 AI2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al2 value defined by parameter 14 49 A 2 max See the drawing at parameter 14 50 A 2 scaled at Al2 min 14 56 X AI3 actual value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input AI3 in mA or V depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage This parameter is read only 22 000 22 000 Value of analog input AI3 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 57 Al scaled value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input Al3 after scaling See parameter 14 65 A 3 scaled at Al min This parameter is read only 32767 000 Parameters 119 14 58 AIl force data Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input See parameter 14 22 Al force sel 22 000 22 000 Forced value of analog input AI3 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 59 AI3 HW switch pos Visible when 14 01 Module
129. 1 aata Real 0 6888 61 103 Data set ti data 3yalue Res ms 61 104 Data set 13 data value Real 61 105 Data set 13 data2value Roa 0 889 61 106 Data set T3 data svae Real 61 107 Data set 15 data value Roa ms 61 110 Data set 17 daa value Rea 0 6588 Data set 17 data 3 value Data set 19 data 1 value Data set 19 data 2 value Data set 21 data 3 value Data set 23 data 1 value Data set 23 data 2 value Data set 23 data 3 value Real 0 65535 Data set 25 data 1 value Data set 25 data 2 value 61 124 Data set 25 data 3 value Rea Le Il 6201 wir data seen uu TP 62 02 wF data Z section Uu 7 6203 li data selection T 6204 Folover Sas id rs 6205 Folover node 2data2sel Ls 14 17 gt Ls 1 7 270 m d mc E A 1o A A AA 1 M ELE ae ELEM NN 5 a 62 06 Follower node 2 data 3 sel 62 07 Follower node 3 data 1 sel 62 08 Follower node 3 data 2 sel NEN 577 x CN CIO LT SS m m 57217 Additional parameter data 303 esl me le Re Um mee SR us SET Foloernode 4 data SR us 0225 MFID2D Tae Rel ms e MFID2D data vale Ren ms 1 ez MFID2D data value Ren ms
130. 1 rpm Hz or Hz 294 Additional parameter data WI 1 H 40 08 Feedback 1 source Analog 1 1 src 40 09 Feedback 2 source Analog 1 1 src 40 10 Feedback function MESA 1 1 40 11 Feedback filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 15 40 14 Setpoint base 32768 32767 100 1 40 15 Output base 32768 32767 100 1 40 16 Setpoint 1 source Analog 1 1 src 40 17 Setpoint 2 source Analog 121 SIC 4 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 Binary 1 1 SIC 40 Internal setpoint selection 2 Binary 121 SIC 40 21 Internal setpoint 1 Real 32 68 0 32767 0 rpm 9o or 100 1 rpm 90 Hz or Hz 40 22 Internal setpoint 2 Real 32768 0 32767 0 rpm 9o or 100 1 rpm 9o Hz or Hz 40 23 Internal setpoint 3 Real 32768 0 32767 0 rpm or 100 1 rpm Hz or Hz 40 24 Internal setpoint 4 32768 0 32767 0 rpm 96or 100 1 rpm Hz or Hz SIC mb res meo ro Wei 4027 oe arro HELEN 1 0 1 40 30 Setpoint freeze enable Binary 121 SIC 40 31 Deviation inversion Binary src 40 33 Integration time 3600 0 i 0 0 0 S 0 S 0 100 0 0 S O 1s 1 1 O 1s 40 35 Derivation filter time 0 10 0 S 40 36 Output min 32768 0 32767 0 m 0 10 1 20 SIC A538 Desbenian Res reen Additional parameter data 295 ail o 40 41 41 Sleep mode mode List Dex sees
131. 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 31 filter gain 15 32 filter time Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 040 s See parameter 14 32 Al1 filter time 15 33 AIT min Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 33 A11 min V 15 34 1 source Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 34 RO7 source energized 15 34 AIT max Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 34 Al1 max V 15 35 RO1 ON delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 35 RO1 ON delay 15 35 Al1 scaled at Al1 Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 0 000 min See parameter 14 35 A 1 scaled at Al1 min 15 36 RO1 OFF delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 36 RO1 OFF delay 15 36 scaled at Al1 Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 36 scaled at Al1 max 15 37 RO2 source Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 37 RO2 source energized 15 38 RO2 ON delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 38 RO2 ON delay 15 39 RO2 OFF delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 39 RO2 OFF delay 15 41 Al2 actual value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 41 A12 actual value 15 42 AI2 scaled value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 42 A 2 scaled
132. 2 16 Speed share Defines the scaling factor for speed reference 1 2 speed 1 000 reference 1 or 2 is multiplied by the defined value Speed reference 1 or 2 is selected by parameter 22 14 Speed ref1 2 any of the stop functions are active Parameters 147 22 21 Constant speed Determines how constant speeds are selected and whether function the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed Const speed 1 Packed 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources mode defined by parameters 22 22 22 23 and 22 24 0 Separate Constant speeds 1 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 22 22 22 23 and 22 24 respectively In case of conflict the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority Dir ena 1 Start dir To determine running direction for a constant speed the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 22 26 22 32 is multiplied by the direction signal forward 1 reverse 1 For example if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative the drive will run in the forward direction 0 Accord Par The running direction for the constant speed is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 22 26 22 32 1 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Constant speeds configuration word 22 22 Constant speed When bit O of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is O sel1 Separate selects a source that acti
133. 20 27 Jogging 2 start page 140 22 42 Jogging 1 ref page 148 22 43 Jogging 2 ref page 149 23 20 Acc time jogging page 154 and 23 21 Dec time jogging page 154 Scalar motor control It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of DTC Direct Torque Control In scalar control mode the drive is controlled with a speed or frequency reference However the outstanding performance of DTC is not achieved in scalar control It is recommended to activate scalar motor control mode in the following situations n multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification ID run e Ifthe nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive e f the drive is used without a motor connected for example for test purposes e f the drive runs a medium voltage motor through a step up transformer In scalar control some standard features are not available Program features 41 IR compensation for scalar motor control IR compensation is available only when the motor control mode is scalar When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at lovv speeds R compensation is useful in applications that require a high break avvay torque In Direct Torque Control DTC no IR compensation is possib
134. 21474836 47 90 04 Load position Real 2147483648 rev 1 1 rev 2147483647 90 05 Load position scaled Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 90 10 1 Encoder 1 speed Real 21474836 48 rpm 100 1 rpm 21474836 47 90 11 Encoder 1 position Real 21474836 48 rev 100 1 rev 21474836 47 90 12 Encoder 1 multiturn Real 0 4294967295 1 1 revolutions 90 13 Encoder 1 revolution Real 2147483648 1 1 extension 2147483647 90 14 Encoder 1 position raw 0 00 65535 00 100 1 90 15 Encoder 1 revolutions raw 0 65535 7 57 1 1 Additional parameter data 305 AI A 90 20 Encoder 2 speed Real 21474836 48 rem 100 1 rpm 21474836 47 90 21 Encoder 2 position Real 21474836 48 rev 100 1 rev 21474836 47 90 22 Encoder 2 multiturn Real 0 4294967295 1 1 revolutions 90 23 Encoder 2 revolution Real 2147483648 1 1 extension 2147483647 90 24 Encoder 2 position raw 0 65535 HE 100 1 90 25 Encoder 2 revolutions raw 0 65535 100 1 90 26 Motor revolution extension Real 2147483648 1 1 2147483647 90 27 Load revolution extension Real 2147483648 2147483647 90 42 Motor speed filter time 0 10000 1 1 ms 90 43 Motor gear numerator 32768 32767 90 44 Motor gear denominator 32768 32767 1 1 1 1 1 90 52 Load speed filter time 0 10000 nz 37 Lond mrim S m n T TTT 2147483647 90 41 Motor feedback selection Motor feedback fa
135. 26 74 Torque ref ramp out and the smaller of the two is used Max The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed controller 25 01 Torque reference speed control and torque reference 26 74 Torque ref ramp out and the greater of the two is used Salar ere 19 11 Ext1 Ext2 selection Selects the source for external control location EXT1 EXT2 EXT1 selection gt O 0 EXT1 1 EXT2 EXT1 EXT1 EXT2 EXT2 1 MCW bit11 Ext ctrl 06 01 Main control word page 88 bit 11 2 loc DI3 Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 5 014 Digital input 014 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 DI5 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 7 other i Parameters 131 19 12 Ext1 control mode 1 Selects the operating mode for external control location Speed EXT1 D Speed Speed control The torque reference used is 25 01 Torque 2 reference speed control output of the speed reference chain Torque Torque control The torque reference used is 26 74 Torque ref 3 ramp out output of the torque reference chain Minimum Combination of selections Speed and Torque the torque selector compares the speed controller output 25 07 Torque reference speed control and the torque reference 26 74 Torque ref ramp out and selects the smaller of the two If speed error becomes negative the drive follows the speed controller output until speed error becomes positive again This prevents
136. 30 13 and 30 14 are set appropriately if frequency control is used 30000 00 Minimum allowed speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 30 12 Maximum speed Defines the maximum allowed speed 1500 00 rpm WARNING This value must not be lower than 30 11 Minimum speed WARNING In frequency control mode this limit is not N effective Make sure the frequency limits 30 13 and 30 14 are set appropriately if frequency control is used 30000 00 Maximum speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 30 13 Minimum frequency Defines the minimum allowed frequency 50 00 Hz WARNING This value must not be higher than 30 14 Maximum frequency 500 00 500 00 Minimum frequency See par Hz 46 02 Parameters 177 30 14 Maximum Defines the maximum allowed frequency 50 00 Hz frequency WARNING This value must not be lower than 30 13 Minimum frequency 500 00 500 00 Maximum frequency See par Hz 46 02 30 17 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current 0 00A 30 19 Minimum torque Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive in percent of 300 0 nominal motor torque 1600 0 1600 0 Minimum torque See par 46 03 30 20 Maximum torque Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive in percent of 300 0 nominal motor torque 1600 0 1600 0 Maximum torque See par 46 03 30 26 Power motoring Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the 300 0096 limit motor
137. 4 12 DIO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIO1 110 Parameters 14 14 DIO2 configuration Selects whether DIO2 of the extension module is used asa nput digital input or output Output DIO2 is used as a digital output 14 15 DIO2 filter gain Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Determines a filtering time for DIO2 when it is used as an input rs r m CI 14 16 DIO2 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output Not DIO2 when parameter 74 74 D O2 configuration is set to energized Output For the available selections see parameter 14 11 DIO1 0 0 s output source 14 17 DIO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO2 DIO status Delayed DIO status tor on ton 14 17 DIO2 ON delay log 14 18 DIO2 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 74 05 DIO status Indicated by 14 06 DIO delayed status 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for DIO2 14 18 DIO2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DIO2 0 0 s See parameter 14 17 DIO2 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIO2 14 19 DIOS configuration Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Input Selects whether DIO3 of the extension module is used as a digital input or output Output DIO3 is used as a digital output Not 14 21 DIO3
138. 46 01 90 21 Encoder 2 position Displays the actual position of encoder 2 within one revolution This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Encoder 2 position within one revolution 21474836 47 rev Parameters 245 90 22 Encoder 2 multiturn Displays the actual position of encoder 2 in full revolutions revolutions This parameter is read only O 4294967295 Encoder 2 position in revolutions 90 23 Encoder 2 Displays the revolution counter extension for encoder 2 The revolution extension counter is incremented when encoder position parameter 90 21 wraps around in the positive direction and decremented in the negative direction This parameter is effective only if position is absolute updated for both single turn and multiturn encoders This parameter is read only 2147483648 Encoder 2 revolution counter extension 2147483647 90 24 Encoder 2 position 1 Displays encoder 2 position within one revolution as a raw raw 24 bit unsigned integer measurement This parameter is read only 0 65535 Raw encoder 2 position within one revolution 90 25 Encoder 2 Displays encoder 2 revolutions as a raw measurement revolutions raw This parameter is read only 0 65535 Ravv encoder 2 revolution count 90 26 Motor revolution Displays the motor revolution counter extension The counter extension is incremented when encoder position wraps around in the positive direction and decremented in the negative directio
139. 762 anen L eouejeq indino dwey 8 8z H eue eouejeq indino dues 6282 anea piou dwey 82 diNVMH amen plou dwey G 1q 10790 ene ZOWH onel l q 9197 ana Loun uogeJo e2ed C 97 COU uoneJo o v 7 82 ena Loun uonejJejeoov z gz uonoejes jas duey L gz enea ulnululyy 61 06 en eA baid 6182 y KouenbaeJ winwixey v L O ang Od TVOLL MO pe 1381 cuanba y 96 82 n ulu c Aouanbay jeonud 29 82 ara mog eonuo 9s gz ufiuz Aouanbay jen cc gz apea 2 eonuo tege ne l uiu Aouanbay eonub es 8z c mo jeonuo zs gz la uomeres uonoun eono 13 92 OL n n HAT worms ooz ul den 92 87 OJ3Z ul dwey 9 110 10790 360 Control chain diagrams Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection Lp dnoJ6 Jajaweled ses ajqeyiene osje s z 199 Id sse2oJg 99Jnos Z oeqpeeJ 60 0p 99JhOS xXoeqpeeJ 80 0p nea eum Je xoeqpeeJ L L O y Eqp q enen deis ysoog deals op Op anea euim 8000 dee S Svor al uopejs uonoun xoeqpeed OL Ob ena poul d fs Aid y 19 PIOM sniejs Cid 9007 enea aun julodjes GC o
140. 872 05 S curve ramp 23 19 0s Linear ramp 23 19 05 0 000 1800 000 5 Ramp shape at start of acceleration 23 17 Shape time acc 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of the 0 000 s acceleration See parameter 23 16 Shape time acc 1 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at end of acceleration 23 18 Shape time dec 1 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the beginning 0 000 s of the deceleration See parameter 23 16 Shape time acc 1 0 000 1800 000 s 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at start of deceleration shape at start of deceleration 1021s 15 23 19 EE time dec 2 emp shape ssa oe the shape of the deceleration ramp at the end of the 000 5 deceleration See parameter 23 16 Shape time acc 1 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at end of deceleration 154 Parameters 23 20 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function i e the 1 60 000 s time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling See section Jogging page 38 0 000 1800 000 s Acceleration time for jogging 23 21 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function i e the 1 60 000 s time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling to zero See section Jogging page 38 0 000 1800 000 s Deceleration time for jogging 1021s 23 23 Emergency stop Defin
141. 9 S Ramp output balance R 500 00 500 00 HZ 100 1 Hz S al al al G C Ramp output balance enable C al HZ HZ al HZ al HZ HZ C C G C 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 100 1 Hz 28 91 Frequency ref2 act 500 00 500 00 28 92 Frequency ref3 act 500 00 500 00 28 96 Frequency ref act 500 00 500 00 28 97 Frequency ref unlimited Real 500 00 500 00 2 D 1 28 90 Frequency ref1 act 500 00 500 00 E D 3 o Limit vvord 1 PE 7 0000h FFFFh Torque limit status LER 0000h FFFFh Minimum speed 30000 00 30000 00 Maximum speed 30000 00 30000 00 Minimum frequency 500 00 500 00 30 14 Maximum frequency 500 00 500 00 Hz 100 1 Hz 30 17 Maximum current 0 00 30000 00 A 100 2 14A 30 19 Minimum torque 1600 0 1600 0 10 1 30 20 Maximum torque 1600 0 1600 0 10 1 30 26 Power motoring limit 0 00 600 00 100 1 30 27 Power generating limit 600 00 0 00 100 1 30 30 Overvoltage control 0 30 31 Undervoltage control 0 External event 1 source Binary S External event 1 type 30 02 30 11 30 12 30 13 rpm 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 100 1 Hz rom HZ II 31 01 31 02 31 03 d External event 2 source Binary S R External event 2 type External event 3 source Binary Sr External event 3 type 0 External event 4
142. 9 05 Communication loss action how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break The parameter has no effect in external control Control locations and operating modes 19 External control When the drive is in external control control commands are given through the 1 O terminals digital and analog inputs or optional 1 O extension modules the fieldbus interface via an optional fieldbus adapter module the external DDCS controller interface and or the master follower link Two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are available The user can select the sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location by parameters 20 01 20 10 The operating mode can be selected separately for each location which enables quick switching between different operating modes for example speed and torque control Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via any binary source such as a digital input or fieldbus control word see parameter 19 11 Ext1 Ext2 selection The source of reference is selectable for each operating mode separately 20 Control locations and operating modes Operating modes of the drive The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference The mode is selectable for each control location Local EXT1 and EXT2 in parameter group 19 Operation mode The following is a general representation of the reference types and control chains The page num
143. 9 Inverter MWh counter is incremented The minimum value is zero 0 999 kWh Energy in kWh 10 1 kWh 01 24 Flux actual Used flux reference in percent of nominal flux of motor o 0 200 Flux reference 01 30 Nominal torque Torque that corresponds to 100 of nominal motor torque scale Note This value is copied from parameter 99 12 Motor nominal torque if entered Otherwise the value is calculated from other motor data 01 31 Ambient Measured temperature of incoming cooling air in C temperature 32 68 0 Cooling air temperature 1 1 C 32767 0 C 03 Input references Values of references received from various sources All parameters in this group are read only unless otherwise noted 03 01 Panel reference Reference given from the control panel or PC tool 100000 00 Control panel or PC tool reference 100000 00 03 03 Ethernet PC tool Reference given from the PC tool through Ethernet reference 1 30000 00 PC tool reference through Ethernet 30000 00 03 05 FBAreference 1 Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter A See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter page 333 100000 00 Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter A 100000 00 03 06 FB A reference 2 Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter A 100000 00 Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A 100000 00 03 11 DDCS controller ref Reference 1 received from the external DDCS controller 1 10 The value has been scal
144. 91 21 Temperature meas sel1 and 91 22 Temperature filtering time 1 KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 2 4 See also parameters 91 24 Temperature meas sel2 and 91 25 Temperature filtering time 2 Pt100 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 5 parameter 35 24 Supervision 2 Al select and an analog output The following settings are required e Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog input to U voltage Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard Al to V volt In parameter group 13 Standard AO set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Force PT100 excitation The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature the voltage over the sensor increases The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees As selection P7100 x1 StdlO but with two sensors connected in series Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly As selection P7100 x1 StdlO but with three sensors T connected in series Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly PTC sensor connected to digital input DI6 PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 1 See also parameters 91 21 Temperature meas sel1 91 22 Temperature filtering time 1 and 91 23 PTC filtering 1
145. 92 31 EnDat max Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc 50 ms calculation time Selects the maximum encoder calculation time for an EnDat encoder Note This parameter needs to be set only when an EnDat encoder is used in continuous mode ie without incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 See also parameter 92 30 Serial link mode 50 milliseconds 92 32 SSI cycle time Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Selects the transmission cycle for an SSI encoder Note This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI encoder is used in continuous mode fe without incremental sin cos signals supported only as encoder 1 See also parameter 92 30 Serial link mode 2 milliseconds 92 33 SSI clock cycles Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Defines the length of an SSI message The length is defined B 1 2 3 100 us as the number of clock cycles The number of cycles can be calculated by adding 1 to the number of bits in an SSI message frame 2 127 SSI message length 254 Parameters 92 34 SSI position msb Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc With an SSI encoder defines the location of the MSB most significant bit of the position data within an SSI message 1 126 Position data MSB location bit number 92 35 SSS revolution msb Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc With an SSI encoder defines the location of the MSB most significant bit
146. A7A2 Mechanical brake Status of mechanical brake Check mechanical brake connection opening failed acknowledgement is not as Check mechanical brake settings in Programmable warning expected during brake open parameter group 44 Mechanical brake 44 17 Brake fault function control Check that acknowledgement signal matches actual status of brake Programmable warning example brake has been control especially 44 11 Keep brake 44 17 Brake fault function prevented from opening by closed parameter 44 11 Keep brake 1 Check that acknowledgement signal if A7A5 Mechanical brake Open conditions of mechanical Check mechanical brake settings in opening not allowed brake cannot be fulfilled for parameter group 44 Mechanical brake closed used matches actual status of brake FIO 11 AI The hardware current voltage Adjust either the setting on the FIO 11 parametrization setting of an analog input on 1 module or parameter 14 30 15 30116 30 an FIO 11 I O extension The hardware switch settings detected module does not correspond by the control program are shown in to parameter settings parameters 14 29 15 29 and 16 29 Note Control board reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings Code hex ATAB ATBO A7C1 A7CB l Fault tracing 317 Extension configuration failure Motor speed feedba
147. ABB industrial drives ACS890 primary control program Power and productivity AA ME RR for a better world PF B List of related manuals in English Drive hardware manuals Code English ACS880 01 drives hardware manual 0000078093 ACS880 07 drives 45 to 250 kW 60 to 300 hp hardware 0000105718 manual ACS880 104 inverter modules hardware manual 0000104271 ACS880 107 inverter units hardware manual 3AUA0000102519 Drive firmware manuals and guides ACS880 primary control program firmware manual 0000085967 ACS880 drives with primary control program quick start 3AUA0000098062 up guide Option manuals and guides ACS AP x assistant control panels user s manual 0000085685 Drive composer Start up and maintenance PC tool User s 3AUA0000094606 manual Manuals and quick guides for I O extension modules fieldbus adapters encoder interfaces etc You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover For manuals not available in the Document library contact your local ABB representative ACS880 01 manuals ACS880 07 manuals Firmware manual ACS880 primary control program 2012 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved 3AUA0000085967 Rev EN EFFECTIVE 2012 07 16 Table of contents 5 Table of contents List of related manuals in English 0 2 2 1 Introduction to
148. BA starting from 50 04 Examples of appropriate values are shown in the tables below Set the fieldbus adapter module configuration parameters in group 57 FBA A settings At the minimum set the required node address and the communication profile Define the process data transferred to and from the drive in parameter groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out Note The adapter module sets the Status word and Control word automatically into parameters 52 01 and 53 01 respectively Save the valid parameter values to permanent memory by setting parameter 96 07 Parameter save to Save Validate the settings made in parameter groups 51 52 and 53 by setting parameter 51 27 FBA par refresh to Configure Set the relevant drive control parameters to control the drive according to the application Examples of appropriate values are shown in the tables below Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 343 Parameter setting example FPBA PROFIBUS DP This example shows how to configure a basic speed control application that uses the PROF Idrive communication profile with PPO Type 2 The start stop commands and reference are according to the PROF Idrive profile speed control mode The reference value 16384 4000h corresponds to parameter 46 01 Speed scaling in the forward and reverse directions Status word Speed actual value DC voltage The table below gives the recommended drive parameter settings Drive parameter Sett
149. Brake resistor short circuit or brake chopper control fault Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT Check that the option modules are properly seated in their slots Check that the option modules or slot connectors are not damaged To pinpoint the problem try installing the modules into different slots Check PC tool or control panel connection Check control panel connector Disconnect and reconnect the control panel Check the event log for an auxiliary code The code indicates which l O extension module is affected Check the type and location settings of the modules parameters 14 01 14 02 15 01 15 02 16 01 and 16 02 Check that the modules are properly installed Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Check that a brake resistor has been connected Check the condition of the brake resistor Check the dimensioning of the brake resistor Stop drive Let resistor cool down Check resistor overload protection function settings parameter group 43 Brake chopper Check fault limit setting parameter 43 11 Brake resistor fault limit Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check brake chopper and brake resistor connection Ensure brake resistor is not damaged Ensure brake resistor is connected and not damaged Check the electrical specifications of the brake resistor against the Hardware manual Replace brake chopper if replaceable 326 Fault tracing
150. C Jou z eyzz p ds wnwiui 1 06 A TR SulBfor zeg 0 0 ul dwe jas paeds LES s Da nen ku peeds LOZZ du CNN emeA 2 uluoul 6 iq 10790 O emeA Buryoul g 109 10790 O enen ojez ul dwey 014 10 90 S amen Hal vomajas ane 2 ul dwey 9 114 10 90 CoJaz indu dwey yz 62 EN anea plou dures S ug 1090 O eneA OJezjno dwey y yq 10790 peeds uunul xe y ZL 0 angen Jojeuruouep JOJO yy 06 anjea H suonnjo eiJ uunjninuu z Jepoou3 cc 06 T D one uonisod Z jepoou3 17706 uonisod JOJO ZO 06 anea H suonnjo eJ uunjninuu Jopoou3 21 06 ene Kuonisod s poouzi 06 A uomoejes xoeqpeej J01oIN Ly 06 anea JojeJeuinu JO OW Ep 06 Control chain diagrams 351 x S P enen He 2 peeds 8 Zz av aNJeA q qce julodjas 1v 8 ug 190 Et angen p ds sojow euim Jet LL 9p q q lt e e sisaja s y juiodies pasds Leot Dale peeds Jepoou3 t0 LO Sav angen MUI SAOQY OL 14 LL 90 amen mu peeds anoqy LC op p ds z Jepoou3 30 LO eneA peeds oJez 70 LZ paads aaen q e p ds 1010 ZO LO p ds oJez 0 14 6190 anea uu peeds 0197 90 LZ 1 anten
151. DI5 switches between acceleration deceleration time sets 1 and 2 The acceleration and deceleration times as well as ramp shapes are defined by parameters 23 12 23 19 Default parameter settings for the Torque control macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed for the Factory macro in Parameter listing page 84 Application macros 75 Default control connections for the Torque control macro XPOW External power input 1 24 V DC 2 A I Reference voltage and analog inputs Speed reference 0 2 10 V Rin gt 200 kohm Torque reference 0 4 20 mA Rin gt 100 ohm Motor speed rpm AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Motor current AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Nounwn als XRO1 XRO2 XRO3 Relay outputs NC Ready 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Running 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Faulted 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XD24 Digital interlock DIIL 24VD DICOM Digital input ground 24VD DIOGND 1 Digital input output ground lO Digital input outputs DIO1 Output Ready DIO2 Output Running Digital inputs DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 012 013 Speed control 0 Torque control 1 014 015 Run enable 1 On Safe torque off circuits must be closed for the drive to start See Hardware manual of drive X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connectio
152. ESTI TES CS patina Dz 7002 delayed sus BBO 900201 deayed salas M2 iti 900201 deayed salas EE CEET A 7 ome Source selection se Terms and abbrevaons on page 87 O1 Sr Gol N gt Parameters 173 28 72 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined by parameter 46 02 Frequency scaling If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor will follow the acceleration rate 20 000 s If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor frequency will follow the reference If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits 0 000 1800 000 Acceleration time 1 1021s S 28 73 Deceleration time 1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 20 000 s frequency to change from the frequency defined by parameter 46 02 Frequency scaling to zero If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that DC overvoltage control 30 30 Overvoltage control is on Note If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor 0 000 1800 000 Deceleration time 1 1021s S 28 74 Acceleration time 2 Defines acceleration time 2 See para
153. Edge Start forward 1 20 02 Level The source selected by 20 03 Ext1 in1 is the forward start signal the source selected by 20 04 Ext1 in2 is the reverse start signal The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 State of source 2 Command 20 03 20 04 26 0 gt 1 20 02 Edge 0 gt 1 20 02 Edge 1 20 02 Level Parameters 133 In1P Start In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20 03 Ext1 in1 and 20 04 Ext1 in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 20 03 4 Any Notes e Parameter 20 02 Ext1 start trigger has no effect with this setting e When source 2 is the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled In1P Start In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by In3 Dir parameters 20 03 Ext1 in1 and 20 04 Ext1 in2 The source selected by 20 05 Ext1 in3 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of State of State of source 1 source 2 source 3 20 03 20 04 20 05 e Parameter 20 02 Ext1 start trigger has no effect with this setting e When source 2 is the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled Ay 1527158 In1P Start fwd In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by Start rev In3 Stop parameters 20 03 Ext1 in1 20 04
154. FbEq16 In1P Start fwd In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by Start rev In3 Stop parameters 20 08 Ext2 in1 20 09 Ext2 in2 and 20 10 Ext2 in3 The source selected by 20 10 Ext2 in3 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of State of State of source 1 source 2 source 3 Command 20 08 20 09 20 10 Start forward Any Any Note Parameter 20 07 Ext2 start trigger has no effect with this setting Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter A D2D or M F link The start and stop commands are taken from another drive through the D2D Drive to drive link or the master follower link DDCS controller The start and stop commands are taken from an external 16 DDCS controller Application The start and stop commands are taken from the application Program program control word parameter 06 02 Application control word 20 07 Ext2 start trigger Defines whether the start signal for external control location Edge EXT2 is edge triggered or level triggered Note In case the settings of parameters 20 06 and 20 07 are in conflict the setting of parameter 20 06 takes preference 1 20 08 Ext2 in1 Selects source 1 for parameter 20 06 Ext2 commands Off For the available selections see parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 20 09 Ext2 in2 Selects source 2 for parameter 20 06 Ext2 commands Off For the available selections se
155. I Uum pormewne mme 182 ACR sourcemin Res saran zer o 1828 nO2 sowe mex Reo ner 14 I O extension module 1 wm Woemeiwe Tul oz Ton ug Moduie Vocation Red 375 wo ModuieTsaus a 1 T 1 5 A 14 10 DIO1 filter gain 0 3 Not visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 14 11 DIO1 output source gie 14 12 DIO1 ON delay 14 13 DIO1 OFF delay Real 14 14 DIO2 configuration List 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 0 15 0 15 14 15 DIOZ2 filter gain Not visible when 14 01 List Module 1 type FIO 01 14 16 DIO2 output source gie 14 17 DIO2 ON delay Real 0 0 3000 0 14 18 DIO2 OFF delay Real 0 0 3000 0 Other parameters in this group when parameter 14 01 Module 1 FIO 01 14 19 DIO3 configuration List 14 21 DIO3 output source i 14 22 DIO3 ON delay Real 14 23 DIO3 OFF delay Real 14 24 DIO4 configuration List 14 26 DIO4 output source gi 14 27 DIO4 ON delay Real 14 28 DIO4 OFF delay Real 0 15 e 5 Q ola 212 d a 0 15 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 0 15 0 15 0 0 3000 0 0 0 3000 0 1 2 8 Additional parameter data wl E Range Ume me 14 34 RO1 source Binary 1 1 src 14 35 RO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 14 36 RO1 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 14 37 RO2 source Binary 121 src mape o fe o
156. I delayed status bit 4 Digital input DI6 70 02 DI delayed status bit 5 Edge The start signal is edge triggered gt E N 1 xeo OO z DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 77 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 DIO2 Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 20 04 Ext1 in2 Selects source 2 for parameter 20 07 Ext1 commands For the available selections see parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 7 10 11 012 Off 20 05 in3 Selects source 3 for parameter 20 01 Ext commands For the available selections see parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 20 06 Ext2 commands Selects the source of start stop and direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 Not selected See also parameters 20 07 20 10 Not selected No start or stop command sources selected In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 20 08 Ext2 in The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 20 08 0 gt 1 20 07 Edge 1 20 07 Level SR In1 Start In2 Dir The source selected by 20 08 Ext2 in1 is the start signal the source selected by 20 09 Ext2 in2 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows State of source 1 State of source 2 Command 20 08 20 09 Any Stop 2 0 gt 1 20 07 Edge
157. I6 70 02 DI delayed status bit 5 A ol A wl rm gt gt z Parameters 155 DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 77 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 10 DIO2 Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 DEED 23 27 Ramp out balance Defines the reference for speed ramp balancing The output 0 00 rpm ref of the ramp generator is forced to this value when balancing is enabled by parameter 23 26 Ramp out balance enable 30000 00 Speed ramp balancing reference See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 23 28 Variable slope Activates the variable slope function which controls the slope Off enable of the speed ramp during a speed reference change If the update interval of the signal from an external control system and the variable slope rate 23 29 Variable slope rate are equal speed reference 3 22 83 Speed reference 3 act is a straight line Speed reference Speed reference 22 83 Speed reference 3 act Time t update interval of signal from external control system A speed reference change during t This function is only active in remote control Variable slope disabled Variable slope enabled not available in local control 23 29 Variable slope rate Defines the rate of the speed reference change when variable slope is enabled by parameter 23 28 Variable slope enable For the best result enter the reference update
158. If the DC magnetization period is long DC magnetization cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor 1 Enable DC hold See section DC hold page 44 Notes The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off The DC hold function can only be activated in speed control mode The DC hold function cannot be activated if parameter 99 04 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar 1 Enable post magnetization See section Post magnetization page 44 Note Post magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode see parameter 21 03 Stop mode 2 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh DC magnetization selection 21 09 hold speed Defines the DC hold speed See parameter 27 08 DC current 5 0 rpm control and section DC hold page 44 0 0 1000 0 rpm DC hold speed See par 46 01 21 10 current Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal 30 096 reference current See parameter 21 08 DC current control and section DC magnetization page 43 0 0 100 096 DC hold current 1 196 21 11 Post magnetization Defines the length of time for which post magnetization is 0 ms time active after stopping the motor The magnetization current is defined by parameter 21 10 DC current reference See parameter 21 08 DC current control 0 30000 ms Post magnetization time 1 1 ms 21 13 Autophasing mode Selects the way autophasi
159. Kanpa jenjoe xoeqpeeJ ZO Or R jndino qld ajeos enea Kanea jenioe jurodjas 0 0r ane Gld uonoejes jou BurjoeJ OS Or anen Konen uonei eq yO 0y al apow Bunoel 6 07 emeA xeuiijndino ze o pom snieis Cid 90 07 anea pueq peed op Or did enr bue pueq peeg eC Op SS990Jd dwog ang pa womers e qeue ezeeJj indino ge ot NOILINNA did SSA00dd ama Hal U ns s seyurod jas es Oy HH X o r enen enoe Taies 6002 X _ anjea 6 jndjno G e Lutu Al uopoajas SOINOS uono dlo2 oC Op 10 abue X XIW WH yS 0p peuiquio X uo odoJd enea wnwixen tL O 199 10 amea p ds inwixey 2106 0 HO eneA anbio wnwxen 02 06 opou ul Lem woes uonoejes uuu ZG Op Midi engA 1snfpe wut Scop 362 Control chain diagrams Master Follower communication I Master AU elysa o eyep qzq IN 27719 FA L uowerss no 420 3 1 0719 3 1ysa L Qmusuen o Z ejep aza di 92 19 FA L u np s s Z no 420 3 1 zo L9 YulI JN 750 usuen 01 ejep 420 3 SZ 19 al uogoajas azq 4 10 19 Jesejeqg oDessouiJ jseopeoJq s Jejse A uonosjes eubis 09 dnoJc Dijuoo dm s J9I
160. N delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0 s See parameter 14 22 DIO3 ON delay 15 22 Al force sel Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 00000000h See parameter 14 22 Al force sel 15 23 DIO3 OFF delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 See parameter 14 23 DIO3 OFF delay 15 24 DIO4 configuration Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Input oee parameter 14 24 DIO4 configuration 15 26 DIO4 output source Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 26 DIO4 output source energized 15 26 AIT actual value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 26 A 1 actual value 15 27 DIO4 ON delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 27 DIO4 ON delay 15 27 Al scaled value Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 27 A 1 scaled value 0 0s Parameters 125 15 28 DIO4 OFF delay Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 28 DIO4 OFF delay 15 28 force data Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 28 force data 15 29 AIT HW switch pos Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 29 A 1 HW switch pos 15 30 Al unit selection Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 30 Al7 unit selection 15 31 RO status Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 See parameter 14 31 RO status 15 31 AN filter gain Visible when
161. O2 ON delay fog 10 29 RO2 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for RO2 10 29 RO2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO2 See 0 0 s parameter 70 28 RO2 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for RO2 10 30 ROS source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO3 Fault 1 For the available selections see parameter 10 24 RO1 0 0s source 10 31 RO3 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO3 Status of selected source RO status ton 10 31 RO3 ON delay 10 32 RO3 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for RO3 10 32 RO3 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO3 See 0 0s parameter 10 31 RO3 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for RO3 11 01 DIO status Displays the electrical status of digital input outputs DIO8 DIO1 The activation deactivation delays if any are specified are ignored Example 0000001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off This parameter is read only 0000h FFFFh Parameters 97 11 02 DIO delayed status Displays the status of digital input outputs DIO8 DIO1 This word is updated only after activation deactivation delays if any are specified Example 0000001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off This parameter is read only 0000h FFFFh Delayed status of digital input outputs 11 05 DIO1 configuration Selects whether DIO 1
162. O4 See parameter 14 27 DIO4 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DIOA 1021s 14 28 AIT force data Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input See parameter 14 22 Al force sel 22 000 22 000 Forced value of analog input Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 29 AIT HW switch pos Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Shows the position of the hardware current voltage selector on the extension module Note The setting of the current voltage selector must match the unit selection made in parameter 14 30 A 1 unit selection I O module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings 14 30 AIT unit selection Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input Al1 Note This setting must match the corresponding hardware setting on the I O extension module see the manual of the I O extension module The hardware setting is shown by parameter 14 29 HW switch pos VO module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings 2 14 31 RO status Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Status of relay outputs on the I O extension module Example 00000001b RO1 is energized RO2 is
163. OOOO oo 2 96 12 User set O sel in1 When parameter 96 11 User set save load is set to O mode selects the user parameter set together with parameter 96 13 User set IO sel in2 as follows E Status of source Status of source User parameter defined by par defined by par set selected DI5 Digital input DI5 10 02 DI delayed status bit 4 DI Digital input DI6 10 02 DI delayed status bit 5 Digital input output DIO1 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 10 Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 11 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 262 Parameters 96 13 User set O sel in2 See parameter 96 12 User set IO sel in1 97 Motor control Switching frequency slip gain voltage reserve flux braking signal injection IR compensation 97 01 Switching An optimization setting for balancing between control Normal frequency mode performance and motor noise level Cyclic Control performance optimized for cyclic load applications Note With this setting the maximum motor cable length is smaller than with Normal Low noise Minimizes motor noise control performance optimized for high gt 300 Hz output frequencies Note Drive loadability is reduced with this setting and some derating must be applied if a certain constant output current is needed This setting is not recommended for cyclic load applications The maximum motor cable length is 50 m 164 ft with
164. SBIN C Ul ejep y epou Jamojjoy 2129 uogas peAreoei y epou 0 9 Z9 Z U ejep y pou JewojoJ Lyp Z9 uomajes Z EIED penieoai y epou JOMOI O4 GE 29 ull AI ul e ep y epou Jamojjoy4 OL z9 uonoajes ejep y epou MO O I VEZO 919991 jasejeq 2 1999 y pOU J3MOJ OY Ul eJep e epou s Moll0 4 60129 1 n r s Byep epou JamoJJOy 9 Z Ul ejep e epou Jewo io4 9g0 Z9 ns r s Z ejep e epou 0 Z 79 ull IN ul e ep epou 0 0729 1 uomoeres peAre2ei apou JeMol oJ LC Z9 919991 Jesejeq 9AI929J epou JeMoJ oJ curejepz pou Jewo o 90 Z9 uomeres c ejep Z epou JeMOoj 4 0 Z9 curejpzepouJewo o4 go Z9 uonmoeres Z eyjep Z epou H MO O 1 ez c9 XUI IN jurejepz apou JeMOojOJ pO Z9 uonoeres ejep panla991 Z epou 0 8229 9 AI929J Jesejeq 9AI9998J Z pou J9MOJ OJ Control chain diagrams 363 Q lusue o ejep dzd JW ZZ 19 vonoeres NO GZA 4W 0 L9 uonoajes Z NO 020 4 4 ZO L9 uonoejes no ejep aza 4w 10 19 yusuea o Z eyep 020 4 9z 19 IIN LIED 420 Sc 19 1 peal S Joispi 104 uonoe es 6
165. See parameter 44 14 Brake close level Brake close level delay 100 15 Defines a minimum time between brake closure and a 0 00 s subsequent open command Brake reopen delay 100 1s Determines how the drive reacts upon a mechanical brake Fault control error Note f parameter 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge acknovvledgement status supervision is disabled altogether and will generate no warnings or faults However the brake open conditions are always supervised The drive trips on a 7142 Mechanical brake closing failed 71A3 Mechanical brake opening failed fault if the status of the acknowledgement does not match the status presumed by the brake control logic The drive trips on a 7145 Mechanical brake opening not allowed fault if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled for example the required motor starting torque is not achieved The drive generates a A7A1 Mechanical brake closing failed 1 A7A2 Mechanical brake opening failed warning if the status of the acknowledgement does not match the status presumed by the brake control logic The drive generates a A7A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed warning if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled for example the required motor starting torque is not achieved 2 Upon closing the brake the drive generates a 7 Mechanical brake closing failed warning if the status of the acknowledgement does not match the status presumed b
166. a t n m 2 m NN CS SS 1332 formeze sm H m m m 33 23 On time 2 source Binary Src x peer a 33 33 Edge counter 1 source Binary SIC 33 34 Edge counter 1 divider 1 4294967295 33 35 Edge counter 1 warning List selection 33 40 Edge counter 2 actual 0 4294967295 33 41 Edge counter 2 limit 0 4294967295 123 33 42 Edge counter 2 function 00006 11116 Doo 181 5 33 44 Edge counter 2 divider 1 4294967295 ei 1 1 33 45 Edge counter 2 warning List 1 1 selection 33 50 Value counter 1 actual Real 2147483008 1 1 2147483008 33 51 Value counter 1 limit Real 2147483008 1 1 2147483008 33 52 Value counter 1 function PB 00b 11b ta SIC 33 54 Value counter 1 divider 0 001 2147483 647 1000 1 33 60 Value counter 2 actual Real 2147483008 1 1 2147483008 292 Additional parameter data R E 3 Ss um T nem 33 61 Value counter 2 limit Real 2147483008 2147483008 Value counter 2 function 00b 11b 15 O B EN Value counter 2 source Value counter 2 divider Rea 0 001 2147483 647 HE 1000 1 33 65 Value counter 2 warning EN 121 selection 35 Motor thermal protection 35 01 Motor estimated temperature 60 1000 0 100 C 1 4 35 02 Measured temperature 1 Real 10 1000 C or 1 1 C ohm 35 03 Measured temperature 2 1000 C or CHE 35 12 Supervisi
167. a Joyeulwouap Jeb JOJO N Ft Op onuoo 40 p ds JOJON LO D kent p A ns Je peeds z 1epoou3 02 06 X nea etp ds Jepoou3 0106 p sn p ds Joo 10 10 anen 2 EN sojeseuinu 10101 Ej 06 a Lt Op sen p ds Jojow euim Jeyt4 Lt op emen eum Jeu p ds IOON 206 Motor feedback configuration 352 Control chain diagrams Speed error calculation pe1ey 10419 peeds c0 pz engeBeu Joa p ds pO tz LJ ente ES amen moj Joe peeds ty yz eneA MOPUIM JOS peeds er YZ enen ejqeue ouos MOPUIM 10119 peeds Lt vc au Jay peeds 22 angen ke p ds jenjoe pasf ON al OIEA kat Ouer JO p ds JOJO N 10 06 ana uOnoalo9 p ds LUES emea H yno dwies Jos peeds 20 22 amen je pesn jou LO vz dwoo 998 bio 9g Gz H enen LA JP p amen eun Je due y 0 92 euim uoneAuep duJoo 99Y 9092 Control chain diagrams 353 Speed controller nDIEBA onuoo p ds ou l l l enbJo Les Ea O4JUOD peeds UIN Gc O pueuJuloo doe A uonoajes ejJqeue eouejeq Up peeds 6092 uonesu duloo 99e enbJo 9992 F Jap enbJo GS 9Z
168. a requesting Number of bits used in revolution count 92 15 Transient filter Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL Activates transient filtering for the encoder changes in 4880 Hz direction of rotation are ignored above the selected pulse frequency 4880 Hz Change in direction of rotation allowed below 4880 Hz 2440 Hz Change in direction of rotation allowed below 2440 Hz 1 1220 Hz Change in direction of rotation allowed below 1220 Hz 2 l 3 Disabled Change in direction of rotation allowed at any pulse frequency Parameters 253 92 20 Encoder cable fault Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL Fault func Selects the action taken by the drive in case an encoder wiring fault is detected by the FEN 31 encoder interface The drive generates a warning A7E1 Encoder 1 The drive trips on 7381 Encoder 1 2 92 21 Encoder cable fault Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL mode Selects which encoder cable channels and wires are monitored for wiring faults See also parameter 92 20 Encoder cable fault func A A B B A A B and B 2 A A B B Z A A B B Z and Z 9 Z 92 30 Serial link mode Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Initial pos Selects the serial link mode with an EnDat or SSI encoder Initial pos Single position transfer mode initial position Continuous position data transfer mode 1
169. a separate motor identification run ID run See also section Scalar motor control page 40 Settings Parameters 99 04 Motor ctrl mode page 266 and 99 13 Identification run request page 267 Reference ramping Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed torque and frequency reference With a speed or frequency reference the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and the value defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling or 46 02 Frequency scaling The user can switch between two preset ramp sets using a binary source such as a digital input For speed reference also the shape of the ramp can be controlled With a torque reference the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the reference to change between zero and nominal motor torque parameter 01 30 Nominal torque scale 36 Program features Special acceleration deceleration ramps The acceleration deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined separately see section Jogging page 38 Furthermore a deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop Off3 mode Settings e Speed reference ramping Parameters 23 77 23 79 and 46 01 pages 757 and 223 Torque reference ramping Parameters 01 30 26 18 and 26 19 pages 85 and 765 e Frequency reference ramping Parameters 28 71 28 75 and 46 02 pages 172 and 223 Jogging Param
170. address feedback Value 2403 Settings Parameter groups 60 D2D and DDCS communication page 233 61 D2D and DDCS transmit data page 237 and 62 D2D and DDCS receive data page 239 Program features 35 Motor control Direct torque control DTC The motor control of the ACS880 is based on direct torque control DTC The switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required stator flux and motor torque The switching frequency is changed only if the actual torque and stator flux values differ from their reference values by more than the allowed hysteresis The reference value for the torque controller comes from the speed controller or directly from an external torque reference source Motor control requires measurement of the DC voltage and two motor phase currents Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space Motor torque is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and the rotor current By utilizing the identified motor model the stator flux estimate is improved Actual motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control The main difference between traditional control and DTC is that torque control has the same time level as the power switch control There is no separate voltage and frequency controlled PVVM modulator the output stage switching is wholly based on the electromagnetic state of the motor The best motor control accuracy is achieved by activating
171. aled The number of analog inputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 12 Standard Al page 102 Programmable analog outputs The control unit has two current 0 20 mA analog outputs Each output can be filtered inverted and scaled The number of analog outputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 13 Standard AO page 104 Programmable digital inputs and outputs The control unit has six digital inputs a digital start interlock input and two digital input outputs One digital input DIG doubles as a PTC thermistor input See section Motor thermal protection page 56 Digital input output DIO 1 can be used as a frequency input DIO2 as a frequency output The number of digital inputs outputs be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter groups 10 Standard DI RO page 91 and 11 Standard DIO Fl FO page 96 Programmable relay outputs The control unit has three relay outputs The signal to be indicated by the outputs can be selected by parameters Relay outputs can be added by using FIO 0x I O extensions Settings Parameter group 70 Standard DI RO page 91 Program features 27 Programmable l O extensions Inputs and outputs can be added by using FIO xx I O extension modules One to three modules can be mounted on the slots of the control unit The table below shows the number of I O on the control unit
172. also parameter Inactive source 31 02 External event 1 type true O Trigger event 1 Normal operation 178 Parameters DIIL DIIL input 70 02 DI delayed status bit 15 Digital input DI1 10 02 DI delayed status bit 0 Digital input DI2 10 02 DI delayed status bit 1 Digital input DI3 10 02 DI delayed status bit 2 O4 10 02 salas br S L LL 10 02 ER meri Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page in 31 02 External event 1 Selects the type of external event 1 type Fault The external event generates a fault 0 The external event generates a warning 31 03 External event 2 Defines the source of external event 2 See also parameter nactive source 31 04 External event 2 type For the selections see parameter 31 01 External event 1 source External event 2 Selects the type of external event 2 ype Fault The external event generates a fault The external event generates a warning 31 05 External event 3 Defines the source of external event 3 See also parameter nactive source 31 06 External event 3 type For the selections see parameter 31 01 External event 1 source 31 06 External event 3 Selects the type of external event 3 type Fault The external event generates a fault The external event generates a warning 31 07 External event 4 Defines the source of external event 4 See also parameter Inactive source 31 08 External
173. ameter group 32 Supervision page 783 Maintenance timers and counters The program has six different maintenance timers or counters that can be configured to generate a warning when a pre defined limit is reached The contents of the message can be edited on the control panel by selecting Settings Edit texts The timer counter can be set to monitor any parameter This feature is especially useful as a service reminder There are three types of counters e On time timers Measures the time a binary source for example a bit in a status word is on e Signal edge counters The counter is incremented whenever the monitored binary source changes state e Value counters The counter measures by integration the monitored parameter An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak exceeds a user defined limit Settings Parameter group 33 Maintenance timer amp counter page 187 Energy savings calculator This feature consists of the following functionalities e An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total efficiency is maximized Acounter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in kWh currency or volume of CO emissions and Aload analyzer showing the load profile of the drive see separate section on page 62 62 Program features Note The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference
174. amples XAI 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm Note The sensor must be powered externally XAI T VREF Reference voltage output 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Ri 100 ohm XAI t VREF Reference voltage output 0 4 20 mA guit Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm Drive 1 XAI 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 24V Drive 2 XAI Power supply 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Ri 100 ohm Drive 3 XAI A2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA 4 Application macros Torque control macro This macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is required Torque reference is given through analog input Al2 typically as a current signal in the range of 0 20 mA corresponding to 0 100 of rated motor torque The start stop signal is connected to digital input DI1 The direction is determined by DI2 Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control It is also possible to change the control to local control panel or PC tool by pressing the Loc Rem key By default the local reference is speed if a torque reference is required the value of parameter 19 16 Local control mode should be changed to Torque A constant speed by default 300 rpm can be activated through DI4
175. and DDCS communication Preselects the data to be sent as word 1 onto the master follower link See also parameter 61 25 M F data 1 value The value is taken from another parameter 61 02 M F data 2 selection M F data 3 selection M F data 1 value 0 65535 Preselects the data to be sent as word 2 onto the master follower link See also parameter 61 26 M F data 2 value For the selections see parameter 61 01 M F data 1 selection Preselects the data to be sent as word 3 onto the master follower link See also parameter 61 27 M F data 3 value For the selections see parameter 61 01 M F data 1 selection Displays the data to be sent onto the master follower link as word 1 as an integer If no data has been preselected by 61 01 M F data 1 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter Data to be sent as word 1 in master follower communication None 1 5 None None 238 Parameters 61 26 M F data 2 value Displays the data to be sent onto the master follower link as word 2 as an integer If no data has been preselected by 61 02 M F data 2 selection the value to be sent can be written directly into this parameter 0 65535 Data to be sent as word 2 in master follower communication 61 27 M F data 3 value Displays the data to be sent onto the master follower link as word 3 as an integer If no data has been preselected by 61 03 M F data 3 selection the valu
176. ant If not known use the rule of thumb value given in the table below Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time 1 to 10 kW gt 100 to 200 ms 10 to 200 kVV x 200 to 1000 ms 200 to 1000 kVV gt 1000 to 2000 ms Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time 21 03 Stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop command 1 Coast S received Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive The motor coasts to a stop WARNING If a mechanical brake is used ensure it is N safe to stop the drive by coasting Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 151 Torque limit Stop according to torque limits parameters 30 79 and 30 20 21 04 Emergency stop Selects the way the motor is stopped when an emergency Ramp stop mode stop command is received Off1 The source of the emergency stop signal is selected by parameter 21 05 Emergency stop source Ramp stop Off1 With the drive running 1 Normal operation Normal stop along the standard deceleration ramp defined for the particular reference type see section Reference ramping page 35 The drive can be restarted by removing the emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from 0 to 1 With the drive stopped 1 Starting allowed Starting not allowed Coast stop 2 With the drive runni
177. ary code see the event log identifies the interface module 0 Module 1 1 Module 2 Check the values of parameters 35 02 Measured temperature 1 and 35 03 Measured temperature 2 Check the cooling of the motor or other equipment whose temperature is being measured Check the warning limits for measured temperatures 1 and 2 in parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 40 C 104 F ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check the motor cabling Check cooling of drive module s Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check the connections between the drive control unit and the power unit Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual and description of parameter 31 22 STO indication run stop page 180 Contact your local ABB re
178. aster FFFFFFFFh 50 17 FBA A actual value Displays raw unmodified actual value ACT 1 sent by fieldbus 1 adapter A to the master PLC if debugging is enabled by parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 2147483648 Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master 2147483647 50 18 7 A actual value Displays raw unmodified actual value ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master 7 if debugging is enabled by parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable This parameter is read only 2147483648 Ravv ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master 2147483647 50 21 FBA A timelevel sel Selects the communication time levels Normal In general lower time levels of read write services reduce CPU load The table below shows the time levels of the read write services for cyclic high and cyclic low data with each parameter setting Selection Cyclic high Cyclic low 500 us Cyclic high data consists of fieldbus Control and Status words Ref1 Ref2 Act1 and Act2 Cyclic low data consists of the parameter data mapped to parameter groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out Acyclic data is handled as a background task mi med 0 Parameters 231 51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration 51 01 FBA type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 Module is not found or is not properly connected or is disabled by parameter 50 01 FBA A enable 1
179. at Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 36 SSI data format 93 40 SSI zero phase Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 40 SSI zero phase 93 45 Hliperface parity Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 45 Hiperface parity 93 46 Hiperface baud rate Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 46 Hiperface baud rate 93 47 Hlperface node Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc address See parameter 92 47 Hiperface node address 93 37 SSI baud rate Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 37 SS baud rate Auto rising Disable 1 Enable Disable 4880 Hz Fault A B Initial pos o0 ms 100 us 2 1 1 binary 100 kBit s 315 45 deg 4800 bits s O D Tl o TI 2 O 64 Parameters 257 95 HW configuration Various hardware related settings mE 95 01 Supply voltage Selects the supply voltage range This parameter is used by Not given the drive to determine the nominal voltage of the supply network The parameter also affects the current ratings and the DC voltage control functions trip and brake chopper activation limits of the drive WARNING An incorrect setting may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably or the overloading of the brake chopper or resistor M E another value is selected mi Im mmm Dm mm mm 95 02 Adaptive voltage Enables adaptive voltage limits Disable limi
180. at the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 of the nominal current of the inverter See also section Scalar motor control on page 40 99 06 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the value current on the motor rating plate If multiple motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of the motors Notes Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 of the nominal current of the drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running DA 0 0 6400 0 A Nominal current of the motor The allowable range is 1 6 2x 1 1A lig of the drive 0 2 x lua with scalar control mode 99 07 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor voltage as fundamental phase to 1 0 0 V voltage phase rms voltage supplied to the motor at the nominal operating point This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor Notes With permanent magnet motors the nominal voltage is the BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm e g 60 V per 1000 rpm the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is 3 x 60 V 180 V Note that the nominal voltage is not equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage EDCM specified by some motor manufacturers The nominal voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM voltage by 1 7 or square root of 3 The stress on the motor insulation is always dependen
181. ation LA O Co gt Q o O m o Q D N a E Lu 95 08 Forced charging enable O 95 09 Fuse switch control O o 2 e D 3 II NES 96 01 96 02 II Language Pass code 0 99999999 96 04 Macro select 96 05 Macro active Ew Ew Al A II 1 E Al 96 06 Parameter restore Parameter save 0 Control board boot 0 4294967295 User set status User set save load User set lO sel in1 Binary Src User set IO sel in2 Binary SIC 97 01 Switching frequency mode 97 03 Slip gain 0 200 d 96 07 96 08 96 10 96 11 96 12 96 13 1 o mi O e O Q O e T NO NO I 97 04 Voltage reserve 4 50 1 1 97 05 Flux braking 97 06 Flux reference select Binary SIC 97 07 0 200 100 1 97 11 25 400 1 1 97 13 0 00 50 00 100 1 o 4 0 Co c 2 3 O e O D 0 3 D e D o 98 02 Rs user Real 0 0000 0 50000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 03 Rr user Real 0 0000 0 50000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 04 Lm user Real 0 00000 10 00000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 05 SigmaL user Real 0 00000 1 00000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 06 Ld user Real 0 00000 10 00000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 07 Lq user Real 0 00000 10 00000 Du 100000 1 p u 98 08 PM flux user 0 00000 2 00000 100000 1 p u Additional parameter data 309 un z 8
182. ault BRAKE OPENING DELAY Opening conditions have been met and open signal activated 44 01 Brake control status bO is set The opening torque request is removed 44 01 Brake control status b1 0 The load is held in place by the speed control of the drive until 44 08 Brake open delay elapses At this point if 44 07 Brake acknowledge selection is set to No acknowledge the logic proceeds to BRAKE OPEN state If an acknowledgement signal source has been selected its state is checked if the state is not brake open the drive trips on a 71A3 Mechanical brake opening failed fault BRAKE OPEN The brake is open 44 01 Brake control status bO 1 Hold request is removed 44 01 Brake control status b2 7 0 and the drive is allowed to follow the reference 50 Program features BRAKE CLOSING BRAKE CLOSING WAIT Brake has been requested to close The drive logic is requested to ramp down the speed to a stop 44 01 Brake control status b3 1 The open signal is kept active 44 01 Brake control status b0 1 The brake logic will remain in this state until the motor speed has remained below 44 14 Brake close level for the time defined by 44 15 Brake close level delay BRAKE CLOSING DELAY Closing conditions have been met The open signal is deactivated 44 01 Brake control status bO 0 and the closing torque written into 44 02 Brake torque memory The ramp down request is maintained 44 01 Brake control status b3 1 The
183. ay the PID controller output is frozen Normal operation resumes after the feedback value leaves the deadband 40 39 Deadband range Setpoint A N FEA Feedback PID controller gt lt gt output ln c Y PID controller lt gt output frozen 40 40 Deadband delay EE Parameters 211 32768 0 Deadband range 32767 0 40 40 Deadband delay Delay for the deadband See parameter 40 39 Deadband S range 0 0 3600 0 s Delay for deadband area 1 1s 0 0 40 41 Sleep mode Selects the mode of the sleep function No See also section Sleep function for process PID control page 46 No Sleep function disabled Internal The motor speed is compared to the value of 40 43 Sleep level If the motor speed remains below this value longer than the sleep delay 40 44 Sleep delay the drive enters sleep mode Parameters 40 44 40 48 are in force External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by parameter 40 42 Sleep enable Parameters 40 44 40 48 are in force O zh 40 42 Sleep enable Defines a source that is used to activate the sleep function when parameter 40 41 Sleep mode is set to External 0 Sleep function disabled 1 Sleep function activated i 500 n DI2 Digital input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 10 02 DI delayed status bit 2 014 Digital input 014 70 02 DI delayed status bi
184. bers refer to detailed diagrams in chapter Control chain diagrams Speed reference source selection p 348 Torque reference Speed error calculation p 352 Speed reference Speed reference source selection ramping and shaping p 349 p 350 Speed controller p 353 Motor feedback configuration p 351 source selection and modification p 354 Reference selection for torque controller p 355 Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection p 360 Torque controller Reference modification for torque controller p 356 Process PID controller p 361 DTC motor control mode Scalar motor control mode Frequency reference source selection and modification pp 358 359 Speed control mode The motor follows a speed reference given to the drive This mode can be used either with estimated speed used as feedback or with an encoder or resolver for better speed control accuracy Control locations and operating modes 21 Speed control mode is available in both local and external control It is also available both in DTC Direct Torque Control and scalar motor control modes Torque control mode Motor torque follows a torque reference given to the drive This mode can be used either with or without an encoder or resolver When used with an encoder or resolver this mode provides for more accurate and dynamic motor control Torque control mode is available i
185. ble I O extensions page 27 Note The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I O extension module type See parameter 14 01 Module 1 type None See parameter 14 02 Module 1 location 1 Slot 1 See parameter 14 03 Module 1 status No option See parameter 14 05 DIO status See parameter 14 06 DIO delayed status See parameter 14 09 DIO1 configuration 15 10 DIO filter gain Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 10 DIO1 filter gain 15 11 DIO1 output source See parameter 14 11 DIO1 output source energized Input 7 5 US 5 15 12 DIO1 ON delay See parameter 14 12 DIO1 ON delay 0 0 s 15 13 DIO1 OFF delay See parameter 14 13 DIO1 OFF delay 0 0s 15 14 DIO2 configuration See parameter 14 14 DIO2 configuration Input 15 15 DIO2 filter gain Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 D Us See parameter 14 15 DIO2 filter gain 15 16 DIO2 output source See parameter 14 16 DIO2 output source Not energized 15 17 DIO2 ON delay See parameter 14 17 DIO2 ON delay 0 0s 15 18 DIO2 OFF delay See parameter 14 18 DIO2 OFF delay 0 0 s 15 19 DIO3 configuration Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Input See parameter 14 19 DIOS configuration 15 21 DIO3 output source Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 21 DIO3 output source energized 15 21 Al tune Visible when 15 01 Module 2 type FIO 11 No action See parameter 14 21 Al tune 15 22 DIO3 O
186. by parameters 11 42 11 45 as follows 11 39 11 45 0 16000 Hz Minimum frequency of frequency input 1 DIO1 1 1 Hz 11 43 Freqin 1 max Defines the maximum input frequency for frequency input 1 16000 Hz DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input See parameter 11 42 Ered in 1 min O 16000 Hz Maximum frequency for frequency input 1 DIO 1 11 44 Ered in 1 scaled at Defines the value that corresponds to the minimum input min frequency defined by parameter 11 42 Freq in 1 min See diagram at parameter 11 42 Freq in 1 min 11 45 HFreq in 1 scaled at Defines the value that corresponds to the maximum input max frequency defined by parameter 11 43 Freq in 1 max See diagram at parameter 11 42 Freq in 1 min 11 54 Freq out 1 actual Displays the value of frequency output 1 after scaling See value parameter 11 58 Freq out 1 src min This parameter is read only 0 16000 Hz Value of frequency output 1 121 100 Parameters No Name Value 11 55 Freq out 1 source Zero Motor speed used Output frequency Motor current Motor torque Dc voltage Povver inu out Speed ref ramp in Speed ref ramped Speed ref used Torq ref used Freq ref used Process PID out Process PID fbk Process PID act Process PID dev Other Selects a signal to be connected to frequency output 1 Motor speed used 01 01 Motor speed used page 84 01 06 Output frequency page 84 01 07 Motor current page 84 01 10 Mot
187. by 33 14 On time 1 warning select is given if enabled by this parameter and the timer reset The current value of the timer is readable from parameter 33 10 On time 1 actual Bit 0 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the time has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached CI CO EELER 188 Parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq16 33 14 On time 1 warning Selects the warning message for on time timer 1 select On time 1 Pre selectable warning message for on time timer 1 Device clean Pre selectable warning message for on time timer 1 Additional cooling Pre selectable warning message for on time timer 1 fan Cabinet fan Pre selectable warning message for on time timer 1 5 DC capacitor Pre selectable vvarning message for on time timer 1 9 Motor bearing Pre selectable warning message for on time timer 1 33 20 On time 2 actual Reading of on time timer 2 Can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool or from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 0 4294967295 s Reading of on time timer 2 e 33 21 On time 2 limit Sets the warning limit for on time timer 2 0s 0 4294967295 s Warning limi
188. by a short circuit in the motor cable Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse 3180 Charge relay lost No acknowledgement received Contact your local ABB representative from charge relay Check input power connections Incorrect input power and motor cable connection i e input power cable is connected to drive motor connection Try performing the current calibration again select Current measurement calibration at parameter 99 13 If the fault persists contact your local ABB representative Check motor load Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp speed control 26 Torque reference chain torque control or 28 Frequency reference chain frequency control Also check parameters 46 01 Speed scaling 46 01 Speed scaling and 46 03 Torque scaling Check motor and motor cable including phasing and delta star connection Check that the start up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check encoder cable including phasing Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables Measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB repr
189. c 22 14 Speed ref1 2 selection Binary src src Analog SIC 1 1 Binary 22 16 Speed share 8 000 8 000 1000 22 17 Additive speed ref2 o 22 21 Constant speed function EN 00b 11b 22 22 Constant speed sel1 22 23 Constant speed sel2 EB 55 Cl Ur Src m OOOO pM Src Constant speed sel3 pp src 100 rpm MU MU Constant spssd2 7 Constant speed3 Consiantspeed 7 Constant speed 5 Constant speede Real 30000 00 3000000 mm 100 trom 100 1 rpm 30000 00 30000 00 22 28 Constant speed 3 22 29 Constant speed 4 22 31 Constant speed 6 2 22 27 Constant speed 2 30000 00 30000 00 2 rpm rpm rpm rpm Constant speed 5 30000 00 30000 00 30000 00 30000 00 22 32 Constant speed 7 30000 00 30000 00 22 42 Jogging 1 ref 30000 00 30000 00 L l mm Critical speed 2 low 100 1 rpm iti DW 100 1 rpm iti o 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 100 1 rpm 22 56 Critical speed 3 low 30000 00 30000 00 22 57 Critical speed 3 high 30000 00 30000 00 22 81 Speed reference 1 act 30000 00 30000 00 22 82 Speed reference 2 act 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 22 83 Speed reference 3 act 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 22 84 Speed reference 4 act 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 22 85 Speed reference 5 act 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 100 1 rpm 22 55 Critical speed 2 high 30000 00 30000 00
190. cally reserved 52 01 FBA data in1 Parameters 52 01 52 12 select data to be transfered from None the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A CW 16bit Control Word 16 bits Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 16 bits Reference REFT 16 bits 0060606000 Control VVord 32 bits 11 2 8 E Other evalu taken fomanciherparameter H 6888680000 1 Parameters 233 53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transfered from fieldbus controller to drive through fieldbus adapter A Note 32 bit values require two consecutive parameters Whenever a 32 bit value is selected in a data parameter the next parameter is automatically reserved the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus adapter A SCENE One rre vales taken from another parameter fo z 0 EC 60 D2D and DDCS DDCS fiber optic communication configuration communication Fiber optic links connected to DDCS channels can be used to connect drives together to build a master follower network connect the drive to an external controller such as the AC 800M See also sections Master follower functionality page 27 and External controller interface page 32 60 01 M F communication Selects the DDCS channel used for master follower No connect port communication None communication disabled Slot 1A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 1 with ZCU control unit 1 only Slot 2A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 2 with ZCU control
191. cates which constant speed status word is active if any See also parameter 06 19 Speed control status word bit 7 This parameter is read only 2 Reverse Out of window Description Constant speed 1 1 Constant speed 1 selected 1 Constant speed 2 1 Constant speed 2 selected 2 Constant speed 3 1 Constant speed 3 selected 3 T 3 Constant speed 4 1 Constant speed 4 selected Constant speed 6 1 Constant speed 6 selected Constant speed 7 1 Constant speed 7 selected 15 Reserved D 5 2 4 Constantspeed5 Constant speed 5 selected B 0000h FFFFh Constant speed status vvord of 06 11 Main status vvord A specific bit in another parameter DEN A specific bitin another parameter of 06 11 Main status word IN CI AN n bi Aspecte bitin anote pan 06 32 User bit 2 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 13 1 False of 06 11 Main status word Parameters 91 Other bit A specific bit in another parameter pj of 06 11 Main status word LS Other i an All parameters in this group are read only 10703 Dote Type eanes 1 97 04 Firmware name Firmware geet 0705 Firmware version Version number ofthefimnware foo 10 01 DI status Displays the electrical status of digital inputs DIIL and DI8 DI1 The activation deactivation delays of the inputs if any are specified are ignored Bits 0 5 reflect the status of DI Dip bit 15
192. ce 1 1 Setpoint source 2 EN NENNEN CON RN EN NENNEN RN RN wm EEC 07771 osuyer a 82 iti 7022 Dr delayed status BRA 3 05 tapa 0 9002 Dr 4 ita inp 7022 EC other or Bi Gol N gt 208 Parameters 40 26 Setpoint min Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller setpoint int SE 40 27 Setpoint max Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller 32767 0 setpoint 32 68 0 Maximum limit for process P D controller setpoint 1 1 32767 0 40 28 Setpoint increase Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to increase 0 0 s time from 0 to 100 0 0 1800 0 s Setpoint increase time 40 29 Setpoint decrease Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to decrease 0 0 s time from 100 to 0 0 0 1800 0 s Setpoint decrease time 32 68 0 Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint 1 32767 0 40 30 Setpoint freeze Freezes or defines a source that can be used to freeze the Nof selected enable setpoint of the process PID controller This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process feedback connected to an analog input and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process 1 Process PID controller setpoint frozen See also parameter 40 38 Output freeze enable 7 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 Q l B OINI gt 40 31 Deviation inv
193. ce is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter The resulting value is Auto shown by 03 11 DDCS controller ref 1 Auto Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active control mode Parameters 237 DDCS controller ref2 type 60 61 DDCS controller act1 type DDCS controller act2 type 61 D2D and DDCS transmit data 61 01 M F data 1 selection Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from the external controller The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on vvhich reference type is selected by this parameter The resulting value is shovvn by 03 12 DDCS controller ref 2 For the selections see parameter 60 60 DDCS controller ref1 ype Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to the external controller The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on vvhich actual value type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 60 60 DDCS controller ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to the external controller The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 60 60 DDCS controller ref1 type Defines the data sent to the DDCS link See also parameter group 60 D2D
194. changed while the drive is running SSC BCEE n O Sour selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 97 140 Parameters No Name Value 20 27 Jogging 2 start 21 Start stop mode 21 01 Start mode Automatic If enabled by parameter 20 25 Jogging enable selects the source for the activation of jogging function 2 Jogging function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20 25 1 Active For the selections see parameter 20 26 Jogging 1 start Notes e Jogging function 1 has priority over jogging function 2 his parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Start and stop modes emergency stop mode and signal source selection DC magnetization settings autophasing mode selection Selects the motor start function See also section DC magnetization page 43 Notes Selections Fast and Const time are ignored if parameter 99 04 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected Fast or Const time With permanent magnet motors Automatic start mode must be used This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start The pre magnetizing time is determined automatically being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size This mode should be selected if a high break away torque is required The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start T
195. ck Programmable warning 90 45 Motor feedback fault FBA A communication Programmable warning 50 02 FBA A comm loss func DDCS controller comm loss Programmable warning 60 59 DDCS controller comm loss action MF comm loss Programmable warning 60 09 M F comm loss function Aux code 412 Pulse overfrequency Aux code 413 Cable fault The I O extension module types and locations specified by parameters do not match the detected configuration No motor speed feedback is received Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost DDCS fiber optic communication between drive and external controller is lost Master follower communication is lost Encoder 1 error Check the event log for an auxiliary code The code indicates which I O extension module is affected Check the type and location settings of the modules parameters 14 01 14 02 15 01 15 02 16 01 and 16 02 Check that the modules are properly installed Check the settings of the parameters in groups 90 Feedback selection 91 Encoder module settings 92 Encoder 1 configuration and 93 Encoder 2 configuration Check encoder installation Check status of fieldbus communication See user documentation of fieldbus interface Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter FBA 51 FBA A settings 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out Check cable con
196. coder 1 speed See par 21474836 47 rpm 46 01 90 11 Encoder 1 position Displays the actual position of encoder 1 within one revolution This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Encoder 1 position within one revolution 21474836 47 rev 90 12 Encoder 1 multiturn Displays the actual position of encoder 1 in full revolutions revolutions This parameter is read only 0 4294967295 Encoder 1 position in revolutions m 90 13 Encoder 1 Displays the revolution counter extension for encoder 1 The revolution extension counter is incremented when encoder position parameter 90 11 wraps around in the positive direction and decremented in the negative direction This parameter is effective only if position is absolute updated for both single turn and multiturn encoders This parameter is read only 2147483648 Encoder 1 revolution counter extension 2147483647 90 14 Encoder 1 position Displays encoder 1 position within one revolution as an 24 bit raw unsigned integer received from the encoder interface This parameter is read only 0 00 65535 00 Ravv encoder 1 position vvithin one revolution 90 15 Encoder 1 Displays encoder 1 revolutions as a ravv measurement revolutions rav This parameter is read only 0 65535 Ravv encoder 1 revolution count 90 20 Encoder 2 speed Displays encoder 2 speed in rpm This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Encoder 2 speed See par 21474836 47 rpm
197. ct1 16bit e 61 03 M F data 3 selection Act 16bit Specifications of the master follower link e Maximum fiber optic cable length e FDCO 01 02 with POF Plastic Optic Fiber 30 m e FDCO 01 02 with HCS Hard clad Silica Fiber 200 m e RDCO 04 with BCU x2 only with POF Plastic Optic Fiber 10 m e For distances up to 1000 m use two NOCR 01 optical converter repeaters with glass optic cable GOF 6 25 micrometers Multi Mode e Transmission rate 4 Mbit s e Total performance of the link lt 5 ms to transfer references between the master and followers Protocol DDCS Distributed Drives Communication System Settings and diagnostics Parameter groups 60 D2D and DDCS communication page 233 61 D2D and DDCS transmit data page 237 and 62 D2D and DDCS receive data page 239 External controller interface General The drive can be connected to an external controller such as the ABB AC 800M using fiber optic cables Drives with a ZCU 11 or ZCU 13 control unit require an Program features 33 additional FDCO DDCS communication module drives with a BCU x2 control unit require an RDCO module Topology An example connection with either a ZCU based or BCU based drive is shown below Ring and star configurations are also possible much in the same way as with the master follower link see section Master follower functionality on page 27 the notable difference is that the external controller connects to channel CHO on
198. ction is only available in external control see section Local control vs external control page 18 The bits of the binary number correspond to the following faults ili Ol Bl O N Overcurrent Overvoltage Undervoltage Reserved 10 BY Selectable fault see parameter 31 13 Selectable fault 11 y External fault 1 from source selected by parameter 31 01 External event 1 source External fault 2 from source selected by parameter 31 03 External event 2 source External fault 3 from source selected by parameter 31 05 External event 3 source External fault 4 from source selected by parameter 31 07 External event 4 source External fault 5 from source selected by parameter 31 09 External event 5 source 31 13 Selectable fault Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using parameter 31 12 Autoreset sel bit 10 The code is given in decimal The faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing page 311 31 14 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31 15 Trial time 0 5 Number of automatic resets 10 1 180 Parameters 31 15 Trial time Defines the time for the automatic reset function See 30 0 s parameter 31 74 Number of trials 1 0 600 0 s Time for automatic resets 10 1s 31 16 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 31 12 0 0s Autorese
199. d Z AB o reference unit See also section Operating modes of the drive page 20 and parameter 99 04 Motor ctrl mode Hz Hz The reference is taken from parameter 28 02 Frequency ref ramp out output of the frequency control chain Hpm Rpm The reference is taken from parameter 23 02 Speed ref 1 ramp out speed reference after ramping and shaping 132 Parameters No Name Value 20 Start stop direction 20 01 Ext1 commands Start stop direction and run start jog enable signal source selection positive negative reference enable signal source selection For information on control locations see section Local control vs external control page 18 Selects the source of start stop and direction commands for n7 Start In2 external control location 1 EXT1 See also parameters 20 02 20 05 Not selected In1 Start In1 Start In2 Dir In1 Start fwd In2 Start rev No start or stop command sources selected 56 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follovvs State of source 1 20 03 0 gt 1 20 02 Edge 1 20 02 Level Sch The source selected by 20 03 in1 is the start signal the source selected by 20 04 Ext1 in2 determines the direction The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows 20 03 20 04 0 gt 1 20 02
200. d constant is the distance the load moves during one turn of the motor shaft The translatory load position is shovvn by parameter 90 05 Load position scaled 2147483648 Feed constant numerator 2147483647 90 64 Feed constant See parameter 90 63 Feed constant numerator denominator 2147483648 Feed constant denominator 2147483647 248 Parameters 91 Encoder module Configuration of encoder interface modules settings 91 01 FEN DI status Displays the status of the digital inputs of FEN xx encoder interface modules This parameter is read only DI1 of interface 1 see parameters 91 11 and 91 12 1 DI2ofinterface 1 see parameters 91 11 and 91 12 Reserved 4 DI1 of interface 2 see parameters 91 13 and 91 14 5 DI2ofinterface 2 see parameters 91 13 and 91 14 6 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Status word of digital inputs on FEN xx modules 121 91 02 Module 1 status Displays the type of the interface module found in the location specified by parameter 91 12 Module 1 location 0 No module found 1 No communication 2 Unknown 3 FEN 01 4 FEN 11 5 FEN 21 6 FEN 31 This parameter is read only 91 08 Module 2 status Displays the type of the interface module found in the location specified by parameter 91 14 Module 2 location 0 No module found 1 No communication 2 Unknown 3 FEN 01 4 FEN 11 5 FEN 21 6 FEN 31 This parameter is read only 91 04 Module 1 Displays the t
201. d control and torque control of the follower are required n those cases an on the fly change between speed and torque control can be performed via a digital input of the follower With torque control follower parameter 26 15 Load share can be used to scale the incoming torque reference for optimal load sharing between the master and the follower Pulse encoders are recommended to be used in all torque controlled followers If a drive needs to quickly switch between master and follower statuses one user parameter set see page 64 can be saved with the master settings another with the follower settings The suitable settings can then be activated using eg digital inputs Communication The communication on the fiber optic link is based on the DDCS protocol which employs data sets specifically data set 41 One data set contains three 16 bit words The contents of the data set are freely configurable but the data set broadcast by the master typically contains the control word speed reference and torque reference while the followers return a status word with two actual values The followers from which data is read are selected by parameter 60 14 M F follower selection in the master In each follower drive the data to be sent is selected by parameters 61 01 61 03 The data is transfered in integer format over the link and then displayed by parameters 62 04 62 12 in the master To indicate faults or warnings in the followers ext
202. d when only one motor is connected to the inverter Program features 57 Temperature monitoring using PTC sensors One PTC sensor can be connected to digital input DI6 FEN xx encoder interfaces optional also have a connection for one PTC sensor Connecting a PTC sensor to DI6 requires a voltage divider circuit such as the one pictured below The resistance of a PTC sensor increases when its temperature rises The increasing resistance of the sensor decreases the voltage over the 1 kohm resistor and eventually the state of DI6 switches from 1 to 0 indicating overtemperature The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of temperature Ohm 4000 1330 550 100 T For detailed vviring information refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive or the User manual of the FEN xx encoder interface Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors 1 3 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output 58 Program features The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9 1 mA through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when
203. de energized 0000h FFFFh Status of relay outputs 14 31 filter gain Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects a hardware filtering time for AI1 No filtering See also parameter 14 32 A 7 filter time z 3 1 114 Parameters THT E 7 9375 milliseconds 7 1432 Al1 filter time Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 040 s Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 Unfiltered signal A Filtered signal T x 1 2 eil filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware See parameter 14 31 Al1 filter gain 0 000 30 000s Filter time constant 1000 15 14 33 Al1 min Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or Defines the minimum value for analog input Al1 See also parameter 14 21 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Minimum value of Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 34 ROT source Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Not Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1 energized For the available selections see parameter 14 11 DIO1 output source A 1 max Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Defines the maximum value for analog input Al1 di 10 000 mA or 14 34 1 See also parameter 14 21 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Maximum value of Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V Or V Parameters 115 1435
204. de is imis 000 111b Signal supervision status vvord 1 184 Parameters No Name Value 32 05 Supervision 1 function Disabled Low High Abs Low Abs High Both Abs Both 32 06 Supervision 1 action Warning Fault 32 07 Supervision 1 signal O Zero Speed Frequency Current Torque DC voltage Output power Alt Al2 Speed ref ramp in Speed ref ramp out Speed ref used Torque ref used Freq ref used Process PID output Feedback act value Other Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1 Determines how the monitored signal see parameter 32 07 is compared to its lower and upper limits 32 09 and 32 70 respectively The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32 06 Signal supervision 1 not in use Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its absolute lower limit Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its absolute upper limit Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its absolute low limit or rises above its absolute high limit Selects the action the drive takes when the value monitored by signal supervision 1 exce
205. ding phasing and delta star connection Check that the start up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check encoder cable including phasing Drive has detected load Check there are no power factor unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge absorbers earth fault in motor or motor in motor cable cable Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative Short circuit in motor cable s Check motor and motor cable or motor Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Excessive IGBT junction to Check motor cable case temperature This warning protects the IGBT s and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check the supply voltage setting too high when the drive is parameter 95 01 Supply voltage Note stopped that the wrong setting of the parameter may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably or the overloading of the brake chopper or resistor Check the supply voltage The voltage of the intermediate If the problem persists contact your local DC circuit has not yet risen to ABB representative operating level Intermediate circuit DC voltage t
206. drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy 17 r 0 Ta Braking torque d Br spee N Tn 100 Nm No flux braking 60 4 40 Flux braking 20 Flux braking No flux braking t s f Hz The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during flux braking Therefore flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of flux braking are The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking The cooling of the induction motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during flux braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor e Flux braking can be used with induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors Two braking power levels are available Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux braking is disabled The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive heating of the motor e Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking energy to motor thermal energy Braking time is shorter compared to moderate braking In cyclic use motor heating may be significant Setti
207. e FEN xx connection or module is not damaged Check earthings when disturbances are detected in communication between encoder interface module and encoder For more information on encoders see parameter groups 90 Feedback selection 91 Encoder module settings 92 Encoder 1 configuration and 93 Encoder 2 configuration Check the event log for an auxiliary code See appropriate actions for each code at warning A7E1 Encoder 1 page 317 7391 Encoder 2 feedback fault See fault 7381 73A0 73A1 7510 7581 Speed feedback configuration Load feedback FBA A communication Programmable fault 50 02 FBA A comm loss func DDCS controller comm loss Programmable fault 60 59 DDCS controller comm loss action Speed feedback configuration incorrect eg an encoder that is not present is selected as the feedback interface No load feedback received Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost DDCS fiber optic communication between drive and external controller is lost Check the feedback source selection parameters in group 90 Feedback selection In case the source is an encoder interface check parameter settings in groups 91 Encoder module settings 92 Encoder 1 configuration and 93 Encoder 2 configuration Check the setting of parameter 90 51 Load feedback selection and the actual source selected n case the so
208. e constant frequency is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 28 26 28 32 0000h FFFFh Constant speeds configuration word 1 1 170 Parameters 28 22 Constant frequency When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is sel1 0 Separate selects a source that activates constant frequency 1 When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 28 23 Constant frequency sel2 and 28 24 Constant frequency sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant frequencies as follows Source defined Source defined Source defined Constant frequency by par 28 22 by par 28 23 by par 28 24 active L3 9 T Corsten recency 0 3 T f Sensantfeqeny2 tt Costa recency torte recency 7 4 4242 On Ts Digital input DI1 70 02 DI delayed status bit 0 Digital input DI2 10 02 DI delayed status bit 1 0 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 7 i Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 28 23 Constant frequency When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is 0 Separate selects a source that activates constant frequency 2 When bit O of parameter 28 21 Constant frequency function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 28 22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28 24 Constant frequency
209. e module 2 93 03 Encoder 2 type act Displays the type of optional encoder resolver interface module 1 1 2 For the possible values see parameter 93 01 Encoder 2 type This parameter is read only 93 10 Pulses revolution Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL See parameter 92 10 Pulses revolution 93 10 Sine cosine number Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 10 Sine cosine number 93 10 Excitation signal Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Resolver 1 kHz frequency See parameter 92 10 Excitation signal frequency 93 11 Pulse encoder type Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL Quadrature See parameter 92 11 Pulse encoder type 93 11 Absolute position Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc None Source See parameter 92 11 Absolute position source 93 11 Excitation signal Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Resolver 4 0 V amplitude See parameter 92 11 Excitation signal amplitude 256 Parameters 93 12 Speed calculation Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL mode See parameter 92 72 Speed calculation mode 93 12 Zero pulse enable 1 Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 72 Zero pulse enable 93 12 Resolver polepairs Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Resolver See parameter 92 12 Resolver polepairs 93 13 Position estimation Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL enable See paramet
210. e motor cable and correcting the cabling is considered impractical Note After changing this parameter the sign of encoder feedback if any must be checked This can be done by setting parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection to Estimate and comparing the sign of 90 01 Motor speed for control to 90 10 Encoder 1 speed or 90 20 Encoder 2 speed If the sign of the measurement is incorrect the encoder wiring must be corrected or the sign of 90 43 Motor gear numerator reversed Reversed rotation direction 1 oe This group contains parameters related to the optional FSO xx safety functions module For details on the parameters in this group refer to the documentation of the FSO xx module 270 Parameters Additional parameter data 271 Additional parameter data What this chapter contains This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data For parameter descriptions see chapter Parameters page 81 Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Usually can only be monitored but not adjusted some counter type signals can however be reset Analog src The parameter can be set to the value of another parameter by choosing Other and selecting the source parameter from a list In addition to the Other selection the parameter may offer other pre selected settings Binary src The value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit in another parameter
211. e parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 20 10 Ext2 in3 Selects source 3 for parameter 20 06 Ext2 commands Off For the available selections see parameter 20 03 Ext1 in1 20 11 Run enable stop Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable mode signal switches off The source of the run enable signal is selected by parameter 20 12 Run enable 1 Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive The motor coasts to a stop WARNING If a mechanical brake is used ensure it is N safe to stop the drive by coasting Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 151 1 Torque limit Stop according to torque limits parameters 30 79 and 30 20 2 Parameters 137 20 12 Run enable 1 Selects the source of the external run enable signal If the run enable signal is switched off the drive will not start If already running the drive will stop according to the setting of parameter 20 11 Run enable stop mode 1 Run enable signal on Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running at AS E 1002 Dr He sans 3 0 08 900201 04 Pta DA 90 02 DI delay sans bra S E 5 1002 DI diyer als bra O LI A other i 20 19 Enable start Selects the source for the start enable signal command 1 Start enable ili Ol El O N With the signal switched off the drive
212. e representative should be contacted Warnings and faults are listed below in separate tables Each table is sorted by warning fault code Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of the Hardware manual before working on the drive Indications Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status The codes and names of active warnings faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as the Drive composer PC tool Only the codes of warnings faults are available over fieldbus In addition to warnings and faults there are pure events that are only recorded in the Event log of the drive The codes of these events are included in the Warning messages table For some warnings and faults the message text can be edited and instructions and contact information added To edit these messages choose Settings Edit texts on the control panel 312 Fault tracing How to reset faults After the cause of a fault has been corrected the fault can be reset from a selectable source see parameter 31 11 Fault reset selection such as the control panel Drive composer PC tool the digital inputs of the drive or fieldbus After the fault is removed the drive can be restarted Warning fault history Event log When a warning or fault is detected it is stored in the event log with a time stamp and other information The event log can be access
213. e to be sent can be written directly into this parameter 0 65535 Data to be sent as word 3 in master follower communication 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 Parameters 61 51 61 74 preselect data to be sent in None selection datasets 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 and 25 to the external controller Parameters 61 101 61 124 display the data to be sent to the external controller If no data has been preselected the value to be sent can be written directly into these parameters For example this parameter preselects the data for word 1 of dataset 11 Parameter 61 101 Data set 11 data 1 value displays the selected data in integer format If no data is preselected the value to be sent can be written directly into parameter 67 707 m 08080 61 52 Data set 11 data 2 1 Preselects the data to be sent as vvord 2 of dataset 11 to the selection external controller See also parameter 61 702 Data set 11 data 2 value For the selections see parameter 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 selection 61 53 Data set 11 data 3 Preselects the data to be sent as vvord 3 of dataset 11 to the selection external controller See also parameter 61 103 Data set 11 data 3 value For the selections see parameter 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 selection 61 54 Data set 13 data 1 1 See parameter 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 selection None selection 61 74 Data set 25 data 3 1 See parameter 61 51 Data set 11 data 1 selection None selection 61 101 Data set 11 data 1 1
214. eached the warning specified by 33 45 Edge counter 2 warning selection is given if enabled by this parameter and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 33 40 Edge counter 2 actual Bit 3 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate f warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached Count rising edges O Disable Rising edges are not counted 1 Enable Rising edges are counted Count falling edges O Disable Falling edges are not counted 1 Enable Falling edges are counted 4 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Edge counter 2 configuration word 1 1 source False AA ther iy Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page r divider signal edges increment the counter by 1 1 42497205 Divisorforsignaledge os 33 45 Edge counter 2 Selects the warning message for signal edge counter 2 Edge counter warning selection 2 Edge counter 2 Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 2 Main contactor Pre selectable warning message for signal edge counter 2 11 Parameters 191 33 50 Value counter 1 Reading of value counter 1 Can be reset from the Drive actual composer PC tool or from the
215. eatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power External temperature Measured temperature 1 or 2 Check the values of parameters 35 02 Editable message text has exceeded fault limit Measured temperature 1 and 35 03 Measured temperature 2 Check the cooling of the motor or other equipment whose temperature is being measured Check the fault limits for measured temperatures 1 and 2 in parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection Fan Cooling fan stuck or Check fan operation and connection disconnected Replace fan if faulty STO hardware failure Safe torque off hardware Contact your local ABB representative failure Safe torque off Safe torque off function is Check safe torque off circuit connections Programmable fault 31 22 active Le safety circuit For more information see appropriate STO indication run stop signal s connected to drive hardware manual and description of connector XSTO is broken parameter 31 22 STO indication run stop during start or run page 780 PU logic error Power unit memory has Contact your local ABB representative cleared Rating ID mismatch The hardware of the drive does Cycle the power to the drive not match the information stored in the memory unit This may occur eg after a firmware update or memory unit replacement PU communication Communication errors Check the connection between the drive detected between the drive control unit and the power unit
216. eceleration ramp Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active BENE control 1 Continue operation OFF2 inactive MH OFF coast to a stop 9 ez to OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SVVITCH ON INHIBITED Mu control 1 Continue operation OFF3 inactive ee stop stop within time defined by drive parameter Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Ensure motor and driven machine can be N stopped using this stop mode Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED Note Run enable signal must be active see drive documentation If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus this bit activates the signal inhibit operation Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED Ramp out zero iii operation Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR 7 OUTPUT ENABLED Force Ramp function generator output to zero The drive will immediately decelerate to zero speed observing the torque limits Ramp hold Enable ramp function Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED ramping Ramp Function Generator output held Ramp in zero R operation Proceed to OPERATING Note This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the m for this signal by drive parameters Force Ramp function generator input to zero Reset Fault reset if an active fault exists Proceed to SVVITCH ON INHIBITED Note This bit is effective only if the f
217. ecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the wake up level setpoint wake up deviation and the wake up delay has passed Program features 47 Setpoint Sleep boost time 40 45 Sleep boost step 40 46 m Time Actual value VVake up delay 40 48 Non inverted 40 37 Ref Fbk i Wake up level el 5 50 Setpoint VVake up deviation 40 47 Time Actual value Wake up level 00000 1 GER 2 Setpoint Wake up deviation 40 4 l Inverted 40 31 Fbk Ref Time Motor speed sa Sleep delay 40 44 Sleep mode i t lt tog i 4 Sleep level 14043 NAA N l Time STOP START Tracking In tracking mode the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40 50 or 41 50 Tracking ref selection The internal term of the PID controller is set so that no transient is allowed to pass on to the output so when the tracking mode is left normal process control operation can be resumed without a significant bump Settings Parameter 96 04 Macro select macro selection Parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1 page 203 and 41 Process PID set 2 page 214 48 Program features Mechanical brake control A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed vvhen the drive is stopped or not povvered
218. eck the supply line for static or transient overvoltage Check brake chopper and resistor if present Check deceleration time Use coast to stop function if applicable Retrofit drive with brake chopper and brake resistor Check supply cabling fuses and switchgear Check the condition of the supply voltage cabling fuses switchgear Contact your local ABB representative Connect motor cable Try other autophasing modes see parameter 21 13 Autophasing mode if possible Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 40 C 104 F ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check the motor cabling Check cooling of drive module s Code hex 42F1 4981 9080 9090 9092 LO 5681 5682 5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5696 5697 Fault tracing 323 IGBT temperature Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions excessive Check air flow and fan operation Check h
219. ed according to parameter 60 60 DDCS controller ref1 type See also section External controller interface page 32 30000 00 Scaled reference 1 received from external controller 1 30000 00 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 10 86 Parameters 03 12 DDCS controller ref Reference 2 received from the external DDCS controller 1 10 The value has been scaled according to parameter 60 67 DDCS controller ref2 type 03 13 M F or D2D reri Master follower reference 1 received from the master The value has been scaled according to parameter 60 10 M F ref1 type See also section Master follower functionality page 27 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 Master follower reference 2 received from the master The value has been scaled according to parameter 60 11 M F ref2 type 30000 00 Scaled reference 2 received from master 1 10 30000 00 04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last For explanations of individual warning and fault codes see chapter Fault tracing All parameters in this group are read only unless otherwise noted 04 01 Tripping fault Code of the 1st active fault the fault that caused the current mE trip 10102 Aaive aut 1 R eet WO coderen 00 0101 Resa EXE VACIA Resa 00 0700 Aee wemina T COCO IN WO Ave warning Code ofthe 20d aa na IN ELE 0 r 0406 Ave var n Cade oft
220. ed by parameter 12 28 A 2 max See the drawing at parameter 12 29 A 2 scaled at Al2 min 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value 121 32767 000 13 Standard AO Configuration of analog outputs mE D 13 11 AOT1 actual value isplays the value of AO1 in mA This parameter is read only 0 000 22 000 mA Value of AOT 1000 1 mA 13 12 AO1 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output Motor speed Alternatively sets the output to excitation mode to feed a used constant current to a temperature sensor Zero None 7 01 10 Motor torque page 84 8 LEH DR power page BN Parameters 105 69 excitation sensors See section Motor thermal protection page 56 Force KTY84 The output is used to feed an excitation current to a KTY84 21 excitation sensor See section Motor thermal protection page 56 Other The value is taken from another parameter 13 16 AO filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output 0 100 s ai Al a 0 NI Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 2 ef filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 106 Parameters 13 17 AO1 source min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 13 12 AO1 source that corresponds to the minimum AC output value defined by parameter
221. ed from the main Menu on the control panel It can also be accessed and reset using the Drive composer PC tool Auxiliary code Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the problem On the control panel the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details of the event in the Drive composer PC tool the auxiliary code is shown in the event listing Parameters that contain warning fault information The codes of active warnings and faults maximum five each and five previously occurred warnings and faults are stored in the parameters of group 04 Warnings and faults page 86 Fault tracing 313 Warning messages Note The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log Code Cause What to do hex Current measurement Informative warning calibration will occur at next start A2A1 A2B1 A2B3 A2B4 A2BA A3A1 A3A2 A3AA A3C1 Current calibration Overcurrent Earth leakage Short circuit IGBT overload DC link overvoltage DC link undervoltage DC not charged DC voltage difference Output current has exceeded Check motor load internal fault limit Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp speed control 26 Torque reference chain torque control or 28 Frequency reference chain frequency control Also check parameters 46 01 Speed scaling 46 01 Speed scaling and 46 03 Torque scaling Check motor and motor cable inclu
222. eds its limits Note This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32 01 Supervision status No action taken A warning 48B0 Signal supervision is generated The drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 1 01 10 Motor torque page 84 The value is taken from another parameter Def FbEq16 Disabled 1 2 3 iN Kl a gt Q l BB OINI Ol CO cl o 5 2 Zero 7 20 21 D S Q 3 D Cl o o Co dl 32 08 Supervision 1 filter Defines the filter time constant for signal supervision 1 0 000 s time 0 000 30 000 s Signal filter time 1000 1s 32 09 Supervision 1 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1 21474836 48 Low limit 21474836 47 32 10 Supervision 1 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1 21474836 48 Upper limit 21474836 47 32 15 Supervision 2 Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2 Determines function how the monitored signal see parameter 32 17 is compared to its lower and upper limits 32 19 and 32 20 respectively The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32 16 Disabled Signal supervision 2 not in use Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit Disabled 1 High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2 limit Abs Low Action is tak
223. eed active None External speed ofofo reference used 1 9 9 Constant speed T 0 0 Constmtspeed2 3 TT 0 Constant speed 3 o 9 1 Constant speed 4 T o TT Constant speed S o a TT TT Default parameter settings for the Sequential control macro Belovv is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed for the Factory macro in Parameter listing page 84 Parameter Sequential control macro 21 03 Stop mode Ramp 76 Application macros Default control connections for the Sequential control macro XPOW External power input 1 24V DC 2A Reference voltage and analog inputs External speed reference 0 2 10 V Rin gt 200 kohm By default not in use 0 4 20 MA Rin gt 100 ohm Motor speed rpm AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Motor current AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Nounwn ts XRO1 XRO2 XRO3 Relay outputs NC Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A NC Running 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Faulted 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XD24 Digital interlock DIIL 24VD DICOM 24VD DIOGND Digital input output ground O Digital input outputs DIO1 DIO2 Digital inputs DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 DI2 Forward 0 Reverse 1 DI3 Acc Dec time set 1 0 set 2 1 DI5 Constant speed selection see page 77 Safe torque off circuits must be closed fo
224. elected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 60 10 M F ref1 type 60 14 M F follower Effective in the master only Defines the followers from None selection which data is read See also parameters 62 28 62 33 None None 2 2 3 4 4 60 51 DDCS controller Selects the DDCS channel used for connecting an external No connect comm port controller such as an AC 800M None communication disabled Slot 1A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 1 with ZCU control unit 11 only Slot 2A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 2 with ZCU control unit 2 only Slot 3A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 3 with ZCU control unit 3 only Slot 1B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 1 with ZCU control unit 4 only Slot 2B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 2 with ZCU control unit 15 only Slot 3B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 3 with ZCU control unit only RDCO CHO Channel 0 on RDCO module with BCU control unit only 11 60 52 DDCS controller Selects the node address of the drive for communication with 1 node address the external controller No two nodes on line may have the same address 1 254 Node address 236 Parameters 60 55 DDCS controller Selects the topology of the fiber optic link Star HW connection Ring The devices are connected in a ring topology Forwarding of messages is enabled Star The devices are connected in a star topology for example through a branching unit Forwardi
225. emperature measured through the sensor input temperature of interface module 1 This parameter is read only 0 1000 C Temperature measured through interface module 1 91 06 Module 2 Displays the temperature measured through the sensor input temperature of interface module 2 This parameter is read only 0 1000 C Temperature measured through interface module 2 EN 91 10 Encoder parameter Forces a reconfiguration of the FEN xx encoder interface Done refresh modules which is needed for any parameter changes in groups 90 93 to take effect Note The parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running fex Reconigaraton done romaoo O EITC P Parameters 249 Specifies the slot 1 3 on the control unit of the drive into 91 12 Module 1 location which the interface module is installed 1 254 Slot number 91 13 Module 2 type Defines the type of the module used as interface module 2 None None None communication disabled FEN 01 FEN 01 FEN 11 FEN 11 FEN 21 FEN 21 FEN 31 FEN 31 91 14 Module 2 location Specifies the slot 1 3 on the control unit of the drive into which the interface module is installed 1 254 Slot number 91 21 Temperature meas Specifies the type of temperature sensor connected to None sel1 interface module 1 None None 1 KTY 84 KTY84 2 91 22 Temperature Defines a filtering time for the temperature measurement 1500 ms filtering time 1 throug
226. en 0 65535 ms Master follower communication timeout function communication break Drive trips on 7582 MF comm loss 2 60 10 M F ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from the Auto master follower link The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter The resulting value is shown by 03 13 M F or D2D refl Auto Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active control mode 0 D S Q 3 D Cl o i N LA dl 60 11 M F ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from the Auto master follower link The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter The resulting value is shown by 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 For the selections see parameter 60 10 M F ref1 type 60 12 M F type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to 1 Auto the master follower link The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 60 10 M F ref1 type 60 13 M F act2 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to 1 Auto the master follower link The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which actual value type is s
227. en whenever the absolute value of the signal falls 3 below its absolute lower limit Abs High Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4 rises above its absolute upper limit Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit Abs Both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its absolute low limit or rises above its absolute high limit 32 16 Supervision 2 Selects the action the drive takes when the value monitored action by signal supervision 2 exceeds its limits Note This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32 01 Supervision status A warning Signal supervision is generated 1 The drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision 32 17 Supervision 2 Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero signal function 2 N gt For the available selections see parameter 32 07 Supervision 1 signal 32 18 Supervision 2 filter 1 Defines the filter time constant for signal supervision 2 0 000 s time 0 000 30 000 s Signal filter time 1000 15 32 19 Supervision 2 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2 21474836 48 Low limit 21474836 47 32 20 Supervision 2 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2 21474836 48 Upper limit 21474836 47 186 Parameters 32 25 Supervision 3 Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3 Determi
228. equency reference is used WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 50 03 FBA A comm loss Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter timeout 50 02 FBA A comm loss func is taken Time count starts when the communication link fails to update the message 0 3 6553 5 s Time delay 1721s 50 04 FBA A ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from fieldbus adapter A The scaling of the reference is defined by Auto parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter currently active control mode rt Resened 8 50 05 FBA A ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from fieldbus adapter A The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46 01 46 04 depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter For the selections see parameter 50 04 FBA A ref1 type 50 06 FBA A SW sel Selects the source of the Status word to be sent to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A Source of the Status word is chosen automatically o Auto Auto EN O Parameters 229 Transparent mode The source selected by parameter 50 09 FBA A SW transparent source is transmitted as the Status word to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A m 50 07 FBA A actual 1 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to Auto
229. er 92 13 Position estimation enable 93 13 Position data width Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 13 Position data width 93 14 Speed estimation Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL enable See parameter 92 14 Speed estimation enable 93 14 Revolution data Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc width See parameter 92 14 Revolution data width 93 15 Transient filter Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL See parameter 92 15 Transient filter 93 20 Encoder cable fault Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL func See parameter 92 20 Encoder cable fault func 93 21 Encoder cable fault Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL or HTL mode See parameter 92 21 Encoder cable fault mode 93 30 Serial link mode Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 30 Serial link mode 93 31 EnDat calc time Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 31 EnDat max calculation time 93 32 SSI cycle time Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 32 SSI cycle time 93 33 SSI clock cycles Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 33 SSI clock cycles 93 34 SSI position msb Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 34 SS position msb 93 35 SSI revolution msb Visible when 93 01 Encoder 2 type Abs enc See parameter 92 35 SSI revolution msb 93 36 SSS data form
230. erence after application of critical unlimited frequencies but before ramping and limiting See the control chain diagram on page 359 This parameter is read only 500 00 500 00 Frequency reference before ramping and limiting See par Hz 46 02 30 Limits Drive operation limits 30 01 Limit word 1 Displays limit word 1 This parameter is read only Description Torq lim 1 Drive torque is being limited by the motor control undervoltage control current control load angle control or pull out control or by the torque limits defined by parameters Spd ctl tlim min 11 Speed controller output is being limited by 25 71 Min torque speed control Spd ctl tim max 1 Speed controller output is being limited by 25 12 Max torque speed control 3 Torq ref max 11 Torque reference is being limited by 26 09 Maximum torque ref 4 Torqrefmin T Torque reference is being limited by 26 08 Minimum torque ref 5 Tlim max speed 11 Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of maximum speed limit 30 72 Maximum speed Tlim min speed 11 Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of minimum speed limit 30 77 Minimum speed Speed reference is being limited by 30 12 Maximum speed 8 Minspeed ref lim 11 Speed reference is being limited by 30 11 Minimum speed 9 Y Maxfreq ref lim 11 Frequency reference is being limited by 30 14 Maximum frequency Min freq ref lim Frequency reference
231. ernal events see parameter group 31 Fault functions can be used For example use bit 3 Fault of the status word received from a follower typically parameter 62 04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel to trigger an external event Block diagrams of the master follower communication are presented on pages 362 and 363 Construction of the fiber optic link The master follower link is formed by connecting the drives together using fiber optic cables Drives with a ZCU 11 or ZCU 13 control unit require an additional FDCO DDCS communication module drives with a BCU x2 control unit require an RDCO module Examples of star and ring configurations are shown below Star configuration requires an NDBU 95C DDCS branching unit 30 Program features Ring configuration BCU Control unit OR 8 zx roii J T Transmitter R Receiver Star configuration 1 ZCU Control unit FDCO T Transmitter R Receiver MSTR CHO CH1 CH2 dag ee NDBU Program features 31 Star configuration 2 T Transmitter R Receiver CHx CHx CHx CHx dicc oc NDBU X13 REGEN Example parameter settings The following is a checklist of parameters that need to be set when configuring the master follower link In this example the master broadcasts the control word a speed reference and a torque reference The follower returns a status word and two actual values this is not compulsory but is shown for clarity
232. ersion Inverts the input of the process PID controller Ref Fbk 0 Setpoint Feedback 1 Feedback Setpoint See also section Sleep function for process PID control page 46 Fbk Ref 1 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 40 32 Gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller See 1 0 parameter 40 33 Integration time 0 1 100 0 Gain for PID controller 100 Parameters 209 No Name Value Description Def FbEq16 40 33 Integration time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller 60 0 s Error Controller output controller input error O controller output G gain Ti 7 integration time Note Setting this value to O disables the I part turning the PID controller into a PD controller 0 0 3600 0 s Integration time 40 34 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller The 0 0 s derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values Ex and Ex according to the following formula PID DERIV TIME x Ex Ek Ts in which Ts 2 ms sample time E Error Process reference process feedback 0 0 10 0s Derivation time time 1000 1s 40 35 Derivation filter time EE the time constant of the 1 pole filter used to smooth 0 0 s the derivative component of the process PID controller 0 4 Unfiltered signal ES Filtered signal e Ty fi
233. es the frequency of the excitation signal 1 20 kHz Excitation signal frequency 1 1 kHz 92 11 Pulse encoder type Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL or HTL Quadrature Selects the type of encoder Quadrature encoder has tvvo channels A and B Single track Single track encoder has one channel A 1 Parameters 251 92 11 Absolute position None source Selects the source of the absolute position information Serial interface Tamagawa 17 33 bit encoder 92 11 Excitation signal Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Resolver amplitude Defines the amplitude of the excitation signal 4 0 12 0 V Excitation signal amplitude 92 12 Speed calculation Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL 10 1V Auto rising mode Selects the speed calculation mode With a single track encoder parameter 92 11 Pulse encoder type is set to Single track the speed is always positive A amp B all Channels A and B Rising and falling edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Note With a single track encoder parameter 92 77 Pulse encoder type this setting acts like setting A all A all Channel A Rising and falling edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation A rising Channel A Rising edges are used for speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation A falling Channel A Falling edges are used for
234. es the time inside which the drive is stopped if an 3 000 s time emergency stop Off3 is activated i e the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling to zero Emergency stop mode and activation source are selected by parameters 21 04 Emergency stop mode and 21 05 Emergency stop source respectively Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus Note Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard deceleration ramp as defined by parameters 23 11 23 19 0 000 1800 000 s Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time 1021s 23 24 Ramp in zero Selects a source that forces the speed reference to zero Inactive 0 Force speed reference to zero 1 Normal operation Ae CON Ur Dalia bi 19 02 Dr delayed sitas bio 2 Diz 100201 delayed elos RTS itatinput bia 7002 Dr delayed satus BRB SEELEN S glatimurDis 7002 Dr delayed s s bra S D iar input 016 70 02 Dr delayed sinsbrs Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 23 26 Ramp out balance Selects the source for enabling disabling speed reference enable ramp balancing See parameter 23 27 Ramp out balance ref O Disabled 1 Enabled II Digital input 014 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 DI5 DI6 ATRAS ASA 07 mol DIB 7 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Digital input D
235. esentative Check motor and motor cable Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check motor cable Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance 322 Fault tracing Code hex 3210 3220 3280 3291 3381 3385 4210 4290 4310 4380 DC link overvoltage DC link undervoltage Standby timeout DC voltage difference Output phase loss Programmable fault 31 19 Motor phase loss Autophasing IGBT overtemperature Cooling Excess temperature Excess temperature difference Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient because of a missing supply phase blown fuse or fault in the rectifier bridge Automatic restart failed see section Automatic restart on page 54 Difference in DC voltages between parallel connected inverter modules Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection all three phases are not connected Autophasing routine see section Autophasing on page 41 has failed Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive Drive module temperature is excessive Power unit module temperature is excessive High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases Check that overvoltage control is on parameter 30 30 Overvoltage control Check that the supply voltage matches the nominal input voltage of the drive Ch
236. esistor temperature has Stop drive Let resistor cool down temperature exceeded warning limit defined Check resistor overload protection by parameter 45 12 Brake function settings parameter group 43 resistor warning limit Brake chopper Check warning limit setting parameter 43 12 Brake resistor warning limit Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits AT94 BR data Brake resistor data has not Check the resistor data settings been given parameters 43 08 43 10 A BC short circuit Short circuit in brake chopper Replace brake chopper IGBT Ensure brake resistor is connected and 79 BC IGBT excess Brake chopper IGBT Let chopper cool down temperature temperature has exceeded Check for excessive ambient internal warning limit temperature Check for cooling fan failure Check for obstructions in the air flow Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet Check resistor overload protection function settings parameters 43 006 43 10 Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits Check that drive supply AC voltage is not not damaged excessive A7A1 Mechanical brake Status of mechanical brake Check mechanical brake connection closing failed acknowledgement is not as Check mechanical brake settings in Programmable warning expected during brake close parameter group 44 Mechanical brake 44 17 Brake fault function control Check that acknowledgement signal matches actual status of brake
237. eters 23 20 and 23 21 page 154 Emergency stop Off3 mode Parameter 23 23 Emergency stop time page 154 Constant speeds frequencies It is possible to predefine up to 7 constant speeds Constant speeds be activated for example through digital inputs Constant speeds override the normal speed reference For frequency control seven constant frequencies can be defined in the same way Settings Parameter groups 22 Speed reference selection page 145 and 28 Frequency reference chain page 166 Critical speeds frequencies A critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of for example mechanical resonance problems A similar function is available for scalar motor control with a frequency reference Program features 37 Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm To make the drive jump over these speed ranges e enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit O of parameter 22 51 Critical speed function and set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below Motor speed rpm Par 22 52 540 rpm Par 22 53 690 rpm 1560 1380 690 940 3 Par 22 54 1380 rpm Par 22 55 1560 rpm 2 3 4 Speed reference rpm Settings Parameter groups 22 Speed reference selection page 145 and 28 Frequency reference chain
238. event 4 type For the selections see parameter 31 01 External event 1 source 31 08 External event 4 Selects the type of external event 4 type Fault The external event generates a fault The external event generates a warning 31 09 External event 5 Defines the source of external event 5 See also parameter Inactive source 31 10 External event 5 type For the selections see parameter 31 01 External event 1 source 31 10 External event 5 Selects the type of external event 5 type The external event generates a fault Warning The external event generates a warning 1 31 04 Parameters 179 31 11 Fault reset Selects the source of an external fault reset signal The signal D 3 selection resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists O gt 1 Reset Note A fault reset from the fieldbus interface is always observed regardless of this parameter ai on 02a CM SCENE IC Bia 7002 Dr delayed satis 4 Deiat input 00271 dele ss bais DIB o Digital input DI5 10 02 DI delayed status bit 4 8 De LET T T OWerpij TRES selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 87 31 12 HA utoreset sel Selects faults that are automatically reset The parameter is a 0000h 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding fault is automatically reset Note The autoreset fun
239. f parameter 20 12 Run received enable 1 Switch signal on e g in the fieldbus Control Word or check wiring of selected source AFF6 Identification run Motor ID run will occur at next Informative warning start AFF7 1 Autophasing Autophasing will occur at next Informative warning start STO event Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections For Programmable event active Le safety circuit more information see appropriate drive 31 22 STO indication signal s connected to hardware manual and description of run stop connector XSTO is lost parameter 31 22 STO indication run stop page 180 Fault messages Fault tracing 321 Code Cause What to do hex Measured offset of output phase current measurement or difference between output phase U2 and VV2 current measurement is too great the 2281 Calibration 2330 Earth leakage Programmable fault 31 20 Earth fault 2340 Short circuit 2381 IGBT overload 3130 Input phase loss Programmable fault 31 21 Supply phase loss 3181 Cross connection Programmable fault 31 23 Cross connection values are updated during current calibration Output current has exceeded internal fault limit Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Short circuit in motor cable s or motor Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature This fault protects the IGBT s and can be activated
240. filter Defines the time constant of the speed error low pass filter 0 ms time If the used speed reference changes rapidly the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another A very long filter time results in unstable control 0 10000 ms Speed error filtering time constant O filtering disabled Parameters 157 24 41 Speed error window Enables or disables speed error window control Disable control enable Speed error window control forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive It supervises the speed error value speed reference actual speed n the normal operating range window control keeps the speed controller input at zero The speed controller is evoked only if the speed error exits the speed error window When the speed error moves outside the window the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller parameter 25 02 Proportional gain which the torque selector adds to the torque reference The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive The window boundaries are defined by parameters 24 43 Speed error window high and 24 44 Speed error window low as follows
241. force 1 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force TN CI E secim 02 ai ESSE ROT CI Dg DelipuD OIDidiedsmus bi o Toplar n 100211 d ny c sis DM puDA UOZDIdeayeisaus bra S D Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 7 Pampa De 100271 delayed status T Other a Source selection s Terms and abbreviations on page 91 23 12 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed 20 000 5 to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate Ol Bl Wy N N If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits 0 000 1800 000 s Acceleration time 1 152 Parameters 23 13 Deceleration time 1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed 20 000 s to change from the speed defined by parameter 46 01 Speed scaling to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follo
242. fter scaling See parameters 12 29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12 30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max This parameter is read only 32768 000 Scaled value of analog input Al2 327617 000 12 25 Al2 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input Al2 Note This setting must match the corresponding jumper setting on the drive control unit see the hardware manual of the drive Control board reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings Milliamperes 1 12 26 Al2 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See 0 100 s parameter 12 16 A 1 filter time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 104 Parameters 12 27 AlI2 min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al2 0 000 mA or V 22 000 22 000 1 Minimum value of Al2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 12 28 AI2 max Defines the maximum value for analog input Al2 20 000 mA or 10 000 V 22 000 22 000 Maximum value of Al2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 12 29 2 scaled at Al2 Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0 000 min analog input Al2 value defined by parameter 12 27 A 2 min T 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al2 value 1 1 32767 000 12 30 Al2 scaled at Al2 Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum 100 000 max analog input Al2 value defin
243. ge from exceeding the overvoltage control limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached Undervoltage control If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue operation after the break if the main contactor if present remained closed Note Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit e g UPS to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break Tm fout Upc Nm Hz VDC 160 80 920 Upc intermediate circuit voltage of the drive aut output frequency of the drive motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fut 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy 54 Program features Automatic restart It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short max 5 seconds power supply failure by using the Automatic restart function provided that the drive is allowed to run for 5 seconds without the cooling fans operating When enabled the funct
244. gency stop SW b12 1 OFF3 CW b2 0 K BCD OFF3 V ACTIVE SW b5 0 CW b4 0 e n f 20 120 OPERATION CD ENABLED SW b2 1 A CW b5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 STATE RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED ep Condos B Z CW b6 0 CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 rising edge of bit SW Status word RFG ACCELERATOR l ENABLED bx it x n Speed C x Input Current x1xx x111 1111 CW Control word RFG Ramp Function Generator f Frequency OPERATION SW b8 1 D K 342 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Setting up the drive for fieldbus control Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the User s manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 1 2 10 Power up the drive Enable the communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module by setting parameter 50 01 FBA A enable to Enable With 50 02 FBA A comm loss func select how the drive should react to a fieldbus communication break Note This function monitors both the communication between the fieldbus master and the adapter module and the communication between the adapter module and the drive With 50 03 FBA A comm loss timeout define the time between communication break detection and the selected action Select application specific values for the rest of the parameters in group 50 Fieldbus adapter F
245. gency stop circuits are closed during ID run Mechanical brake is not opened by the logic for the ID run No motor ID run is requested This mode can be selected only if the ID run Normal Reduced Standstilll Advanced has already been performed once 268 Parameters Normal Normal ID run Guarantees good control accuracy for all 1 cases The ID run takes about 90 seconds This mode should be selected whenever it is possible Notes The driven machinery must be de coupled from the motor with Normal ID run if the load torque is higher than 2096 or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Reduced Reduced ID Run This mode should be selected instead of 2 the Normal or Advanced ID Run if e mechanical losses are higher than 20 i e the motor cannot be de coupled from the driven equipment or if e flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running i e in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals With Reduced ID run the control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as with the Normal ID run
246. h interface module 1 0 10000 ms Filtering time for temperature measurement 91 23 PTC filtering 1 Defines how many consecutive samples must be received by interface module 1 before the status of a PTC sensor is interpreted as true instead of false 0 65535 Number of samples 91 24 Temperature meas Specifies the type of temperature sensor connected to None sel2 interface module 2 KTY 84 KTY84 2 91 25 Temperature Defines a filtering time for the temperature measurement 1500 ms filtering time 2 through interface 2 0 10000 ms Filtering time for temperature measurement 91 26 PTC filtering 2 Defines how many consecutive samples must be received by interface module 2 before the status of a PTC sensor is interpreted as true instead of false 0 65535 Number of samples 250 Parameters 92 Encoder 1 Settings for encoder 1 configuration Notes The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected encoder type tis recommended that encoder connection 1 this group is used whenever possible since the data received through that interface is fresher than the data received through connection 2 group 93 Encoder 2 configuration 92 01 Encoder 1 type Activates the communication with optional encoder resolver None interface module 1 TIL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encoder 1 Interface Input TTL encoder input X31 TTL Communication active Module type FEN 01 TTL Encode
247. he FbEq column at the signal in question value is used The current value of the counter is readable from parameter 33 60 Value counter 2 actual Bit 5 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached Reserved Counter mode O Loop If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset 2515 0000h FFFFh Value counter 2 configuration word 121 33 63 Value counter 2 Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2 Not selected source EI e CN divider is divided by this value before integration 0 001 Divisor for value counter 1 2147483 647 33 65 Value counter 2 Selects the warning message for value counter 2 Value 2 warning selection Value 2 Pre selectable warning message for value counter 2 Motor bearing Pre selectable warning message for value counter 2 Parameters 193 35 Motor thermal Motor thermal protection settings protection See also section Motor thermal protection page 56 35 01 Motor estimated Displays the motor temperature in degrees Celsius as temperature estimated by the motor thermal protection model see parameters 35 50 35 55 This parameter is read only 60 1000 C Estimated motor temperature 1 1 C 35 02 Measured Disp
248. he break point frequency of the load curve e the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 35 51 Motor load curve towards the value of parameter 35 52 Zero speed load See parameter 35 51 Motor load curve 1 00 500 00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve 46 02 Parameters 199 35 54 Motornominal temp Defines the temperature rise of the motor when the motor is rise loaded with nominal current See the motor manufacturer s recommendations Temperature Motor nominal temperature rise Ambient temperature 35 55 Motor thermal time Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal const protection model i e time inside which the temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature See the motor manufacturer s recommendations Motor current 100 Temperature rise 100 63 Motor thermal time 100 10000 s Motor thermal time constant 1 15 200 Parameters 36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings See also section Load analyzer page 62 36 01 PVL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger Power inu The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by out parameter 36 02 PVL filter time The peak value is stored along with other pre selected signals at the time into parameters 36 70 36 75 The peak value logger can be reset using parameter 36 09 Reset loggers The date
249. he daa san n 0 R Srdacwewamning 0 r 0310 Aee warning Code orhe sh aci vaa F 04 11 Latest fault Code of the 1st stored non active fault EN 0000h FFFFh 1st stored fault 121 121 1 121 121 121 121 Parameters 87 04 12 2nd latest fault Code of the 2nd stored non active fault 04 13 3rd latest fault Code of the 3rd stored non active fault 0 A AA E KAN 2 LLL 04 16 Latest warning Code of the 1st stored non active warning 0000h FFFFh 1st stored warning 04 17 2nd latest warning Code of the 2nd stored non active warning 04 18 3rd latest warning Code of the 3rd stored non active warning 05 Diagnostics Various run time type counters and measurements related to drive maintenance All parameters in this group are read only unless otherwise noted 05 01 On time counter On time counter The counter runs when the drive is powered 05 02 Run time counter Motor run time counter The counter runs when the inverter 5 modulates 0 4294967295 d Motor run time counter 05 04 Fan on time Running time of the drive cooling fan Can be reset on the counter control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 0 4294967295 d Cooling fan run time counter 05 11 Inverter Estimated drive temperature in percent of fault limit temperature 40 0 160 0 Drive temperature in percent 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
250. he forced value for the DIIL input 0000h FFFFh Forced values of digital inputs 10 05 D 1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI1 D status TT ll Delayed DI status 755 SE lt gt toff ton torf ton 10 05 D 1 ON delay 10 06 D 1 OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 70 07 DI status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DI1 10 06 D 1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI1 See 0 0s parameter 10 05 D 1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for 10 07 DI2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI2 D status lil ll Delayed DI status PU o ton Lon ton 10 07 DI2 ON delay 10 08 DI2 OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 10 01 DI status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for DI2 10 08 DI2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI2 See 0 0 s parameter 10 07 DI2 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 5 Deactivation delay for DI2 Parameters 93 10 09 DI3 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI3 Delayed DI status D status Mi ll T ton tor ton 10 09 DI3 ON delay tog 10 10 DIS OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 70 07 DI
251. he pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21 02 Magnetization time This mode should be selected if constant pre magnetizing time is required e g if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake This setting also guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetizing time is set long enough WARNING The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases It includes the flying start function starting to a rotating machine and the automatic restart function a stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions Note If parameter 99 04 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default 2 Parameters 141 21 02 Magnetization time Defines the pre magnetization time 500 ms After the start command the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor for the set time To ensure full magnetizing set this parameter to the same value as or higher than the rotor time const
252. heck the event log for an auxiliary code A88C Warning generated by an on A88D DC capacitor warning time timer Check the source of the warning Programmable warnings corresponding to the code 0 33 13 On time 1 source 1 33 23 On time 2 source 10 05 04 Fan on time counter A88E Cabinet fan warning 33 14 On time 1 warning select 33 24 On time 2 warning select ABBE Cooling fan warning A890 Additional cooling fan warning Signal supervision Editable message text Programmable warning 32 06 Supervision 1 action 32 16 Supervision 2 action 32 26 Supervision 3 action Warning generated by a signal supervision function Check the source of the warning parameter 32 07 32 17 or 32 26 External warning 1 Editable message text Programmable warning 31 01 External event 1 Source 31 02 External event 1 type External warning 2 Editable message text Programmable warning 31 03 External event 2 Source 31 04 External event 2 type External warning 3 Editable message text Programmable warning 31 05 External event 3 source 31 06 External event 3 type Fault in external device 1 Fault in external device 2 Fault in external device 3 Check the external device Check setting of parameter 31 01 External event 1 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 37 03 External event 2 source Check the external device Check setting of parameter 37 05 External even
253. hernet PC tool reference 1 Red 30000 00 30000 00 Real 03 05 FBA reference 1 Real 100000 00 100000 00 03 06 FBA reference 2 100000 00 100000 00 100 1 100 1 100 1 100 1 100 1 100 1 100 1 100 1 rpm 03 11 DDCS controller ref 1 30000 00 30000 00 03 12 DDCS controller ref 2 30000 00 30000 00 03 13 or D2D ref 30000 00 30000 00 03 14 ME or D2D ref2 30000 00 30000 00 04 Warnings and faults 04 01 0000h FFFFh 04 02 Active fault 2 0000h FFFFh 04 03 Active fault 3 0000h FFFFh 04 04 Active fault 4 0000h FFFFh 4 05 Active fault 5 0000h FFFFh 4 06 Active warning 1 0000h FFFFh E II II II II K wa ii sx xi A II II II II 1 e all zx 0 0 04 07 Active warning 2 0000h FFFFh 04 08 Active warning 3 0000h FFFFh 04 09 Active warning 4 0000h FFFFh 04 10 Active warning 5 0000h FFFFh 04 11 Latest fault 0000h FFFFh 04 12 2nd latest fault 0000h FFFFh 04 13 3rd latest fault 0000h FFFFh 1 ak N N A gt Q o O o Q D N a E Lu 04 14 4th latest fault 0000h FFFFh 04 15 5th latest fault 0000h FFFFh 04 16 Latest warning 0000h FFFFh 04 17 2nd latest warning 0000h FFFFh 04 18 3rd latest warning 0000h FFFFh 04 19 4th latest warning 0000h FFFFh 04 20 5th latest warning 0000h FFFFh e o O
254. ich measured temperature 1 is Estimated source read temperature Disabled None Temperature supervision 1 is disabled Estimated Estimated motor temperature see parameter 35 01 Motor 1 temperature estimated temperature Z O 194 Parameters No Name Value KTY84 StdlO Extension module KTY84 module 1 KTY84 module 2 PT100 x1 StdlO PT100 x2 StdlO PT100 x3 StdlO PTC DI6 PTC module 1 PTC module 2 KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35 14 Supervision 1 Al select and an analog output The following settings are required 2 e Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog input to U voltage Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard Al to V volt In parameter group 13 Standard AO set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Force KTY84 excitation The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature the voltage over the sensor increases The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 1 3 See also parameters 91 21 Temperature meas sel1 and 91 22 Temperature filtering time 1 KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 2 4 See also parameters 91 24 Temperature meas sel2 and 91 25 Te
255. ieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters 0 Continue normal operation TT 1 1 ec to inching jogging setpoint 1 Note Inching does not o the acceleration deceleration ramps defined for jogging nching jogging 1 disabled uu 2 1 Accelerate to inching iogging setpoint 2 Note Inching does not follow the acceleration deceleration ramps defined for jogging 0 ST Inching jogging 2 disabled 10 Remote cmd Fieldbus control enabled Control word and reference not getting through to the drive except for bits OFF1 OFF2 and OFF3 11 Ext ctrl loc 1 Select External Control Location EXT2 Effective if control location parameterized to be selected from fieldbus Select External Control Location EXT1 Effective if control location parameterized to be selected from fieldbus 12 to 15 Reserved 340 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Contents of the fieldbus Status word The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram page 341 STATE Description Ready to switch READY TO SWITCH ON ON NOTREADYTO SWITCH ON 1 Ready run z Ready ref OPERATIONNH BTED o Tepe D Notut 4 oT2nacive mu D orare 5 of3inactve 0000777 ee Nd on inhibited SWITCH ON INHIBITED lu xu es setpoint OPERATING Actual value equals refere
256. igured and programmed with parameters Programming via parameters Parameters can be set via e the control panel as described in chapter Using the control panel e the Drive composer PC tool as described in Drive composer user s manual 3AUA0000094606 English or e the fieldbus interface as described in chapters Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive However if an external 24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit it is highly recommended to force a save by using parameter 96 07 Parameter save before powering down the control unit after any parameter changes If necessary the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96 06 Parameter restore Application programming The functions of the firmware program can be extended with application programming A standard drive delivery does not include an application program Program features 25 Application programs can be built out of function blocks based on the IEC 61131 standard 26 Program features Control interfaces Programmable analog inputs The control unit has two programmable analog inputs Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage 0 2 10 V or 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA input by a jumper on the control unit Each input can be filtered inverted and sc
257. in 31 Fault functions Settings that define the behavior of the drive upon fault situations 32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1 3 44 Mechanical brake control 46 Monitoring scaling settings Speed supervision settings actual signal filtering general scaling settings 30 Limits Drive operation limits 33 Maintenance timer amp Configuration of maintenance timers counters counter 145 51 55 58 64 68 75 77 83 87 93 00 03 14 15 17 21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 223 Parameters 83 using other parameters source and target settings 52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transfered from drive to fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A 53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transfered from fieldbus controller to drive through fieldbus adapter A 60 D2D and DDCS DDCS fiber optic communication configuration communication 61 D2D and DDCS transmit Defines the data sent to the DDCS link 237 data 62 D2D and DDCS receive Mapping of data received through the DDCS link 239 data 90 Feedback selection Motor speed feedback configuration 91 Encoder module settings Configuration of encoder interface modules 92 Encoder 1 configuration Settings for encoder 1 nos 264 265 93 Encoder 2 configuration Settings for encoder 2 95 HW configuration Various hardware related settings 96 System Language selection parameter save and restore user parame
258. in percent of nominal motor power 0 00 600 0096 Maximum motoring power 30 27 Power generating Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the 300 00 limit inverter in percent of nominal motor power 600 00 0 00 Maximum generating power 30 30 Overvoltage control Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link Enable Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque Note If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper and resistor or a regenerative supply unit the controller must be disabled 30 31 Undervoltage Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link Enable control If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor torque the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to a stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 31 Fault functions Settings that define the behavior of the drive upon fault situations 31 01 External event 1 Defines the source of external event 1 See
259. inactive Motor parameters amp The values of parameters 98 02 98 14 are used in the motor 3 position offset model and the value of parameter 98 15 is used as the rotor angle offset O 98 02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance Rs of the motor model With a star connected motor Rs is the resistance of one winding With a delta connected motor Rs is one third of the 0 00000 p u resistance of one winding 0 00000 0 50000 Stator resistance in per unit 98 03 Rr user the rotor resistance Rp of the motor model 0 00000 p u Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 0 50000 Rotor resistance in per unit 98 04 user Defines the main inductance Ly of the motor model 0 00000 p u Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 Main inductance in per unit 10 00000 p u 98 05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance O Ls 0 00000 Du Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 1 00000 Leakage inductance in per unit p u 98 06 Lduser Defines the direct axis synchronous inductance Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 Direct axis inductance in per unit 10 00000 p u 98 07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance 0 00000 p u 0 00000 p u Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 Quadratu
260. ing for ACS880 Description drives 50 01 FBA A enable 1 Enable Enables communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module 50 04 FBA A ref1 type 4 Speed Selects the fieldbus A reference 1 type and scaling 50 07 FBA A actual 1 type 0 Auto Selects the actual value type and scaling according to the currently active Ref1 mode defined in parameter 50 04 51 01 FBA type 1 Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module 51 02 Node address 37 Defines the PROFIBUS node address of the fieldbus adapter module 51 03 Baud rate 120001 Displays the current baud rate on the PROFIBUS network in kbit s 51 04 MSG type 1 PPO1 Displays the telegram type selected by the PLC configuration tool 51 05 Profile 0 PROFldrive Selects the Control vvord according to the PROF drive profile speed control mode 51 07 RPBA mode 0 Disabled Disables the RPBA emulation mode 344 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Drive parameter Setting for ACS880 Description drives 51 27 FBA par refresh 1 Configure Validates the configuration parameter settings 19 12 Ext1 control mode 1 2 Speed Selects speed control as the control mode 1 for external control location EXT1 20 01 Ext1 commands 12 Fieldbus A Selects fieldbus adapter A as the source of the start and stop commands for external control location EXT1 20 02 Ext1 start trigger 1 Level Selects a level triggered start signal for external con
261. interface of the drive is described first followed by a configuration example 334 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system through a serial communication link using a fieldbus adapter The fieldbus adapter can be installed into any free drive slot Fieldbus controller Other devices Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter installed on drive Drive Fieldbus Data Flow a Control word CW wf References Process l O cyclic Status word SW Actual values l Parameter R W requests responses Process I O cyclic or Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources such as digital and analog inputs Fieldbus adapters are available for various serial communication systems and protocols for example e PROFIBUS DP FPBA 01 adapter e CANopen FCAN 01 adapter e DeviceNet FDNA 01 adapter e EtherNet IP FENA 11 adapter e EtherCAT FECA 01 adapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 335 Basics of the fieldbus control interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 32 bit input and output data words The drive supports at the maximum the use of 12 data words 16 bit
262. interval into this parameter 2 30000 ms Variable slope rate 1 1 ms 24 Speed reference Speed error calculation speed error window control conditioning configuration speed error step See the control chain diagrams on pages 352 and 353 Used speed Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference before reference speed error calculation See the control chain diagram on page 352 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference used for speed error calculation 30000 00 rpm 156 Parameters 24 02 Used actual speed Displays the speed feedback used for speed error calculation See the control chain diagram on page 352 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed feedback used for speed error calculation See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 24 03 Speed error filtered Displays the filtered speed error See the control chain diagram on page 352 This parameter is read only 30000 0 Filtered speed error See par 30000 0 rpm 46 01 24 04 Speed error Displays the inverted unfiltered speed error See the control negative chain diagram on page 352 This parameter is read only 30000 0 Inverted speed error See par 30000 0 rpm 46 01 24 11 Speed correction Defines a speed reference correction This value is added to the existing reference between ramping and limitation See the control chain diagram on page 352 10000 10000 Speed reference correction See par 46 01 24 12 Speed error
263. ion takes the following actions upon a supply failure to enable a successful restart e The undervoltage fault is suppressed but a warning is generated e Modulation and cooling is stopped to conserve any remaining energy e DC circuit pre charging is enabled If the DC voltage is restored before the expiration of the period defined by parameter 21 18 Auto restart time and the start signal is still on normal operation will continue However if the DC voltage remains too low at that point the drive trips on a fault 3280 Standby timeout Voltage control and trip limits The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative to the supply voltage as well as drive inverter type The DC voltage Upc is approximately 1 35 times the line to line supply voltage and is displayed by parameter 01 11 DC voltage The following diagram shows the relation of selected DC voltage levels Note that the absolute voltages vary according to drive inverter type and AC supply voltage range Overvoltage fault level 1 3 x Uncmax Overvoltage control level 1 25 x Ubcmax Overvoltage warning level 1 15 x Ubcmax UDCmax UpCmin E OPERE Undervoltage control warning level 0 85 x Ubcmin Undervoltage fault level 0 6 x Ubcmin Upcmax DC voltage corresponding to the maximum of the AC supply voltage range UbCmin DC voltage corresponding to the minimum of the AC suppl
264. is being limited by 30 13 Minimum frequency 11 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Limit vvord 1 1 1 176 Parameters 30 02 Torque limit status Displays the torque controller limitation status word This parameter is read only Description Bit Name Description 0 Undemoiage E oral undenotage 1 fvervoltage ilis Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage 2 Minimum torque FT Torque is being limited by 30 19 Minimum Torque Reser T Terque is being ited by 3020 enum oz 4 Hugo x An inverter current limit identified by bits 8 11 is active angle VVith permanent magnet motors and reluctance motors only 1 Load angle limit is active ie the motor cannot produce any more torque Motor pullout With asynchronous motors only Motor pull out limit is active ie the motor cannot produce anymore torque Fees B remer EN IN SETE Maximum output current max is being limited frena IGBT 1 oma current is being limited by a elat thermal current value 15 Reserved E one out of bits 0 3 and one out of bits 9 11 can be on simultaneously The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first 0000h FFFFh Torque limitation status word 30 11 Minimum speed Defines the minimum allowed speed 1500 00 rpm WARNING This value must not be higher than 30 12 Maximum speed WARNING In frequency control mode this limit is not effective Make sure the frequency limits
265. ithin the limits defined by this parameter bit 8 of 06 11 Main status word is 1 If motor speed is not within the limits bit 8 is O 0 00 30000 00 Absolute value for motor speed window supervision See par rpm 46 01 46 22 Frequency setpoint Defines the absolute value for the motor frequency window 10 00 Hz hysteresis supervision ie the absolute value of the difference between actual frequency and frequency reference 01 06 Output frequency 28 96 Frequency ref ramp in When motor frequency is within the limits defined by this parameter bit 8 of 06 11 Main status word is 1 If motor frequency is not within the limits bit 8 is O 0 00 1000 00 Hz Absolute value for motor frequency window supervision See par 46 02 46 23 Torque setpoint Defines the absolute value for the motor torque window 10 hysteresis supervision ie the absolute value of the difference between actual torque and torque reference 07 70 Motor torque 26 73 Torque ref4 actual When motor torque is within the limits defined by this parameter bit 8 of 06 11 Main status word is 1 If motor torque is not within the limits bit 8 is 0 0 300 Absolute value for motor torque window supervision See par 46 03 46 31 Above speed limit Defines the supervision limit for actual speed 0 00 rpm See also parameter 06 11 Main status word bit 10 0 00 30000 00 Actual speed supervision limit See par rpm 46 01 46 32 Above frequency Defi
266. iven through DI6 the direction through 15 The reference signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to analog inputs Al1 and Al2 respectively A constant speed by default 300 rpm can be activated through DI4 Default parameter settings for the Hand Auto macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed for the Factory macro in Parameter listing page 84 Parameter Hand Auto macro default Name 12 30 Al2 scaled at Al2 max Bem lt 20 09 Ext2 in2 Application macros 69 Default control connections for the Hand Auto macro XPOW External power input 1 24VDC 2A I Reference voltage and analog inputs Speed reference Hand 0 2 10 V Rin gt 200 kohm Speed reference Auto 0 4 20 mA Rin gt 100 ohm Motor speed rpm AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Motor current AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Nounwn als XRO1 XRO2 XRO3 Relay outputs NC Ready 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Running 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Faulted 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XD24 Digital interlock DIIL 24VD DICOM Digital input ground 24VD DIOGND Digital input output ground IO Digital input outputs DIO1 Output Ready DIO2 Output Running Digital inputs DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 Hand DI2 Forvvard 0 Reverse 1 Hand DI3 Hand 0 Auto 1 014 015 Forward 0 Reverse 1 Auto St
267. l Delayed DI status ux 5 lt gt ton ton 10 15 016 ON delay log 10 16 016 OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 70 07 DI status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status Activation delay for DI6 parameter 10 15 DI6 ON delay Status of relay outputs RO8 RO1 Example 00000001b RO1 is energized RO2 RO8 are de energized Bit 5 of 06 16 Drive status word 1 see page 88 Magnetized Bit 1 of 06 17 Drive status word 2 see page 89 Bit 4 of 06 16 Drive status word 1 see page 88 wo gt Parameters 95 Bit 2 of 06 11 Main status word see page 88 8 Ss Bit 8 of 06 11 Main status word see page 88 9 1 1 10 25 ROT ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1 Status of selected source S ton fon 10 25 RO1 ON delay 10 26 RO1 OFF delay 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for RO1 10 26 RO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1 See 0 0s parameter 10 25 RO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for RO1 96 Parameters 10 27 RO2 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2 Running For the available selections see parameter 70 24 RO1 source 10 20 RO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2 Status of selected source 7 ton ton 10 28 R
268. l macro default 12 30 AI2 scaled at Al2 max 1500 000 19 11 Ext1 Ext2 selection 20 01 Ext1 commands In1 Start Off 20 04 Ext1 in2 Enz Of 40 08 AI2 scaled A A oO aja CR l 2 Application macros Default control connections for the PID control macro XPOW External power input 1 24V DC 2A Reference voltage and analog inputs Process or Speed reference 0 2 10 V Rin gt 200 kohm Process feedback 0 4 20 mA Rin gt 100 ohm Motor speed rpm AGND 0 20 mA R lt 500 ohm Motor current AGND 0 20 mA R 500 ohm Nounwn ts XRO1 XRO2 XRO3 Relay outputs NC Ready 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A NC Running 250 V AC 30V DC 2A NC Faulted 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A XD24 Digital interlock 24VD DICOM 1TDigital input ground 24VD DIOGND Digital input output ground O Digital input outputs DIO1 DIO2 Digital inputs DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 Speed control 012 013 Speed control 0 Process control 1 DIS Stop 0 Start 1 Process control Safe torque off circuits must be closed for the drive to start See Hardware manual of drive X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connection EE G EE EE x Q E 1 2 3 d 5 6 For sensor connection examples see page 73 Application macros 73 Sensor connection ex
269. l output C 14 26 DIO4 output source Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output See DIO4 when parameter 14 24 DIO4 configuration is set to Output For the available selections see parameter 14 11 D O1 output source 14 26 AIT actual value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input Al1 in mA or V depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage This parameter is read only 22 000 22 000 Value of analog input Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 27 DIO4 ON delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO4 1 DIO status Delayed DIO status tor ton ton 14 27 DIO4 ON delay log 14 28 DIO4 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 74 05 DIO status Indicated by 14 06 DIO delayed status Parameters 113 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DIO4 1021s 14 2 Al scaled value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input after scaling See parameter 14 35 A 1 scaled at Al1 min This parameter is read only 32768 000 Scaled value of analog input Al1 1 1 32767 000 14 28 DIO4 OFF delay Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 01 Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DI
270. l supervision 3 0 000 s time 21474836 47 21474836 48 Upper limit 21474836 47 Parameters 187 33 Maintenance timer Configuration of maintenance timers counters counter See also section Maintenance timers and counters page 61 33 01 Counter status Displays the maintenance timer counter status word indicating which maintenance timers counters have exceeded their limits This parameter is read only Bi Rame LEO On time timer 1 has reached its preset limit om On time timer 2 has reached its preset limit 2 Ete 1 1 Signal edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit 3 Edge 2 1 Signal edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit 4 X Valuet 1 Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit 5 Vaue2 1 Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit 6 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Maintenance time counter status word 121 33 10 On time 1 actual Reading of on time timer 1 Can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool or from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 0 4294967295s Reading of on time timer 1 33 11 On time 1 limit Sets the warning limit for on time timer 1 0 4294967295 s Warning limit for on time counter 1 33 12 On time 1 function Configures on time timer 1 This timer runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 33 13 On time 1 source is on After the limit set by 33 17 On time 1 limit is reached the warning specified
271. lative output voltage boost at zero speed IR 0 00 compensation The function is useful in applications with a high break away torque where direct torque control DTC mode cannot be applied U Ux 7 Relative output voltage IR compensation set to 15 Relative output voltage No IR compensation Field weakening point 5096 of nominal frequency See also section R compensation for scalar motor control on page 41 0 00 50 0096 Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor 1 196 voltage 264 Parameters 98 User motor Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor parameters model 98 01 User motor model Activates the motor model parameters 98 02 98 14 and the No rotor angle offset parameter 98 75 Notes e Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is selected by parameter 99 13 Identification run request The values of parameters 98 02 98 15 are updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run Measurements made directly from the motor terminals are likely to produce slightly different values than those detected by the ID run This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Parameters 98 02 98 15 inactive Motor parameters The values of parameters 98 02 98 14 are used in the motor 1 model Position offset The value of parameter 98 15 is used as the rotor angle 2 offset Parameters 98 02 98 14 are
272. lays the temperature received through the source temperature 1 defined by parameter 35 11 Supervision 1 source Note With a PTC sensor either 0 ohm normal temperature or the value of parameter 35 12 Supervision 1 fault limit excessive temperature is shown This parameter is read only 10 1000 C or Measured temperature 1 1 1 unit ohm 35 03 Measured Displays the temperature received through the source temperature 2 defined by parameter 35 21 Supervision 2 source Note With a PTC sensor either 0 ohm normal temperature or the value of parameter 35 22 Supervision 2 fault limit excessive temperature is shown This parameter is read only 10 1000 C or Measured temperature 2 1 1 unit ohm 35 10 Supervision 1 Defines the action taken by the drive when measured protection temperature 1 parameter 35 02 exceeds the appropriate limits set by parameters 35 12 Supervision 1 fault limit and 35 13 Supervision 1 warning limit Warning Warning A491 External temperature is generated when measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 13 Supervision 1 warning limit Fault Warning A491 External temperature is generated when measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 13 Supervision 1 warning limit The drive trips on fault 4981 External temperature when measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 12 Supervision 1 fault limit 35 11 Supervision 1 Selects the source from wh
273. le or needed Motor voltage IR compensation No compensation f Hz Settings Parameters 19 20 Scalar control reference unit page 131 97 13 IR compensation page 263 and 99 04 Motor ctrl mode page 266 e Parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain page 168 Autophasing Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position of the magnetic flux of a permanent magnet synchronous motor or the magnetic axis of a synchronous reluctance motor The motor control requires the absolute position of the rotor flux in order to control motor torque accurately Sensors like absolute encoders and resolvers indicate the rotor position at all times after the offset between the zero angle of rotor and that of the sensor has been established On the other hand a standard pulse encoder determines the rotor position when it rotates but the initial position is not known However a pulse encoder can be used as an absolute encoder if it is equipped with Hall sensors albeit with coarse initial position accuracy The Hall sensors generate so called commutation 42 Program features pulses that change their state six times during one revolution so it is only known within which 60 sector of a complete revolution the initial position is N Rotor 0 Absolute encoder resolver The autophasing routine is performed vvith permanent magnet synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors i
274. logger 2 samples between 10 and 20 36 42 AL2 20 to 30 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 0 00 fall between 20 and 30 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30 36 43 AL2 30 to 40 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 1 0 0096 fall between 30 and 40 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40 36 44 12 40 to 50 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 0 0096 fall between 40 and 50 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50 36 45 AL2 50 to 60 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 1 0 0096 fall between 50 and 60 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60 36 46 AL2 60 to 70 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 0 00 fall between 60 and 70 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70 36 47 12 70 to 80 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 1 0 0096 fall between 70 and 80 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80 36 48 AL2 80 to 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 0 00 fall between 80 and 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90 36 49 AL2 over 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that 1 0 00 exceed 90 838 The dete on which amplitude logger2 was Tastre
275. lt FA82 Safe torque off 2 Normal operation 31 23 Cross connection Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and Fault motor cable connection i e input power cable is connected to drive motor connection N No action taken Fault The drive trips on fault 3787 Cross connection 1 31 24 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition Fault A stall condition is defined as follows The drive is at stall current limit 37 25 Stall current limit and the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 31 27 Stall frequency high or the motor speed is below the level set by parameter 37 26 Stall speed high and e the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 31 28 Sfall time Warning The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning 1 Fault The drive trips on fault 7727 Motor stall 2 31 25 X Stall current limit Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the 200 0 motor See parameter 31 24 Stall function 0 0 1600 0 Stall current limit 31 26 Stall speed high Stall speed limit in rpm See parameter 31 24 Stall function 150 0 rpm 0 0 10000 0 rpm Stall speed limit See par 46 01 15 00 Hz No None stall supervision disabled 31 27 Stall frequency high Stall frequency limit See parameter 31 24 Stall function Note Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended 0 00 500 00 Hz Stall frequency limit See par
276. ltage control the supply voltage range parameter 95 01 Supply voltage has been selected correctly Disabled Brake chopper control disabled LN Enabled with Brake chopper control enabled with resistor overload thermal model protection 216 Parameters 2 Enabled without Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload thermal model protection This setting can be used for example if the resistor is equipped with a thermal circuit breaker that is wired to stop the drive if the resistor overheats 43 07 Brake chopper Selects the source for quick run time brake chopper control runtime enable O Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off 1 Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation This parameter can be used to program the chopper control to function only when the drive is operating in generating Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 LEE 43 08 Brake resistor Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor for 0 thermal tc overload protection S O 10000 s Brake resistor thermal time constant 1721s 43 09 Brake resistor Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will Pmax cont raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value The value is used in the overload protection 0 10 Maximum continuous braking power 1 1 kW 10000 00 kW 43 10 Brake resistance Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor The value 0ohm is used for brake choppe
277. lter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1021s 210 Parameters 40 36 Output min Defines the minimum limit for the process PID controller 32 68 0 output Using the minimum and maximum limits it is possible to restrict the operation range 32768 0 Minimum limit for process PID controller output 1 1 32767 0 40 37 Output max Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller 32767 0 output See parameter 40 36 Output min 32 68 0 Maximum limit for process PID controller output 1 1 32767 0 40 38 Output freeze Freezes or defines a source that can be used to freeze the 1 Vot selected enable output of the process PID controller This feature can be used when for example a sensor providing process feedback must to be serviced without stopping the process 1 Process PID controller output frozen See also parameter 40 30 Setpoint freeze enable Net selected Process PID contoieroutputnotfrozen 10 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 CU T HL 10 201 delayed lotus MB Oei Stume selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 0 0 40 39 Deadband range Defines a deadband around the setpoint Whenever process feedback enters the deadband a delay timer starts f the feedback remains within the deadband longer than the delay 40 40 Deadband del
278. lues selector for analog outputs 1 1 FFFFFFFFh 1 14 76 AO1 actual value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of AO1 in mA This parameter is read only 0 000 22 000 mA Value of AO1 1000 1 mA 14 77 1 source Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Zero Selects a signal to be connected to analog output Alternatively sets the output to excitation mode to feed a constant current to a temperature sensor m NN Motor speedused DEIS CN 122 Parameters 01 10 Motor torque page 84 8 EELER 40 04 Deviation actual value page 203 Force PT100 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1 3Pt100 20 excitation sensors See section Motor thermal protection page 56 Force KTY84 The output is used to feed an excitation current to a KTY84 21 excitation sensor See section Motor thermal protection page 56 The value is taken from another parameter E 14 78 AO1 force data Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output signal See parameter 14 71 AO force selection 0 000 22 000 mA Forced value of analog output 1000 1 mA 14 79 AOT filter time Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 100 s Defines the filtering time constant for analog output Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 eil filter input step O filter output t time
279. meter 28 72 60 000 s Acceleration time 1 0 000 1800 000 Acceleration time 2 1021s S 28 75 Deceleration time 2 Defines deceleration time 2 See parameter 28 73 60 000 s Deceleration time 1 0 000 1800 000 Deceleration time 2 1021s S 28 76 Ramp in zero Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to zero nactive O Force frequency reference to zero 1 Normal operation IN CIN ita 70 02 Dr delayed status BS D 7 Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 28 77 Ramp hold Selects a source that forces the output of the frequency ramp Inactive generator to actual frequency value 0 Force ramp output to actual frequency 1 Normal operation 174 Parameters CEET 8 06 patina 100201 Mee gt T Soure saecion Terns ard abbrevatonson page on 28 78 Ramp output Defines a reference for frequency ramp balancing The output 0 0 Hz balance of the ramp generator is forced to this value when balancing is enabled by parameter 28 79 Ramp output balance enable 500 00 500 00 Frequency ramp balancing reference See par Hz 46 02 28 79 Ramp output Selects the source for enabling disabling speed ramp Off balance enable balancing See parameter 28 78 Ramp output balance 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 9 RE Ba ita inpat D2 70 02 Di ctayed awe BRB a Dita 10 02 Dr deayec sans MI A D Pitalito 70 02 Dr
280. meter 62 33 Follower node 3 data 3 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the third None follower ie the follower with node address 4 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 34 Follower node 4 data 1 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the third None follower ie the follower with node address 4 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 35 Follower node 4 data 2 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the third None follower ie the follower with node address 4 through the master follower link See also parameter 62 36 Follower node 4 data 3 value For the selections see parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection Follower only Displays in integer format the data received from the master as word 1 Parameter 62 01 M F data 1 selection can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters Follower only Displays in integer format the data received from the master as word 2 Parameter 62 02 M F data 2 selection can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 2 i
281. meter data H me le Rae H 52103 bata ss TO Rep 9 8595 Il 92404 Data set 2 sta Rea 9 8595 1 92705 Data se T2sta2vane Rea 9 8595 92406 Data st 72 data value Rea 9 8595 1 92707 Dataset T data Tuae ns 9 8595 52108 Dataset T data va v Rea v s 92709 Dataset T data value Rep ms 52110 Data apna Rea 9 8595 C serres zvane Rep 02112 Data apna ede Rep ms sarma Dataset TB data value Rea ms 02114 Data ser18dataz value Rep ms 62115 Dataset TB deta value Rep 52110 Data ser20 data value Rea 9 8595 62117 Data serz0 deta value Rep ms 52118 Data ser20 data value Rea s s 1 62110 Data ser22 data value Rep s s 52120 Data ser22data2 value Rea ms 1 62121 Data ser22 deta value Rep ms 92422 Data sel 24 ata Rea 9 8595 52123 Data ser 24 aa zvane Rep ms 92 14 Data setae data value Rea 90 Feedback selection 90 01 Motor speed for control Real 21474836 48 rpm 100 1 rpm 21474836 47 90 02 Motor position Real 21474836 48 rev 100 1 rev 21474836 47 90 03 Load speed Real 21474836 48 rpm 100 1 rpm
282. mode List Encoder 1 type List Encoder 1 source Encoder 1 type act NO SES xa a A Other parameters in this group when parameter 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc 92 10 0 65535 MI 92 11 S 92 12 92 13 75 92 14 2 92 30 Serial link mode WEN 92 31 NEN 92 32 SSI cycle time 92 33 SSI clock cycles 92 34 SSI position msb 92 35 92 36 A a x a W em o ca wl l c l xl xl gil gt em x Sine cosine number List List Real Real List List List Real Real Real List Absolute position source Zero pulse enable ei Position data width Revolution data width N d l I I I esch d l d d l wesch EnDat max calculation time 3 127 126 126 ala I ES SSI revolution msb SSI data format 92 37 SSI baud rate List 92 40 SSI zero phase List 92 47 Hiperface node address 0 255 o Other parameters in this group when parameter 92 01 Encoder 1 type Resolver Ol Al eX xx i NES b Q olo 92 11 92 12 DT Range TER Excitation signal amplitude 93 Encoder 2 configuration 93 02 Encoder 2 source 1 2 EMEN 93 03 Encoder 2 type act dist Other parameters in this group when parameter 93 01 Encoder 2 type TTL TTL
283. mperature filtering time 2 Pt100 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 5 parameter 35 14 Supervision 1 Al select and an analog output The following settings are required e Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog input to U voltage Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard Al to V volt In parameter group 13 Standard AO set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Force PT100 excitation The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature the voltage over the sensor increases The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees As selection P7100 x1 StdlO but with two sensors connected in series Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly As selection P7100 x1 StdlO but with three sensors T connected in series Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly PTC sensor connected to digital input DI6 PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 1 See also parameters 91 21 Temperature meas sel1 91 22 Temperature filtering time 1 and 91 23 PTC filtering 1 PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 2 10 See also parameters 91 24 Temperature meas sel2 91 25 Temperature filtering time 2 and 91 26 PTC filtering 2 Parameters 195
284. mple if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not Stall protection parameters 31 24 31 28 The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits current frequency and time and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition 60 Program features Overspeed protection parameter 31 30 The user can set overspeed limits by specifying a margin that is added to the currently used maximum and minimum speed limits Local control loss detection parameter 49 05 The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break Automatic fault resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage and external faults The user can also specify a fault that is automatically reset By default automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the user Settings Parameters 31 12 31 16 page 179 Program features 61 Diagnostics Signal supervision Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function Whenever a supervised signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits a bit in 32 01 Supervision status is activated and a warning or fault generated The contents of the message can be edited on the control panel by selecting Settings Edit texts The supervised signal is low pass filtered Settings Par
285. n N sch a Ors x 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 76 Application macros Sequential control macro The Sequential control macro is suited for speed control applications in which a speed reference multiple constant speeds and two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used The macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital inputs DI4 DI6 see parameter 22 21 Constant speed function An external speed reference can be given through analog input Al1 The reference is active only when no constant speed is activated digital inputs DI4 DI6 are all off Operational commands can also be given from the control panel The start stop commands are given through digital input DI1 running direction is determined by DI2 Two acceleration deceleration ramps are selectable through DI3 The acceleration and deceleration times as well as ramp shapes are defined by parameters 23 12 23 19 Operation diagram The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro Speed Speed 3 Speed 2 Stop along deceleration ramp Speed 1 Accel2 Decel2 Speed 3 Time Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2 Start Stop A 06060 Accel1 Decel1 IT E Speed 1 Speed 2 9E t 7 LLL Ig Application macros 77 Selection of constant speeds By default constant speeds 1 7 are selected using digital inputs DI4 DI6 as follows Di4 DIS Die Constant sp
286. n This parameter is effective only if position is absolute updated for both single turn and multiturn encoders This parameter is read only 2147483648 Motor revolution counter extension 2147483647 90 27 Load revolution Displays the load revolution counter extension The counter is extension incremented when encoder position wraps around in the positive direction and decremented in the negative direction This parameter is effective only if position is absolute updated for both single turn and multiturn encoders This parameter is read only 2147483648 Load revolution counter extension 2147483647 90 41 Motor feedback Selects the motor speed feedback value used in control Estimate selection A calculated speed estimate is used Encoder 1 Actual speed measured by encoder 1 The encoder is setup 11 by the parameters in group 92 Encoder 1 configuration Encoder 2 Actual speed measured by encoder 2 The encoder is set up 2 by the parameters in group 93 Encoder 2 configuration 90 42 Motor speed filter Defines a filter time for motor speed feedback used for control 3 ms time 90 01 Motor speed for control 0 10000 ms Motor speed filter time 1 1ms 246 Parameters 1 90 43 Motor gear Parameters 90 43 and 90 44 define a gear function between numerator the motor speed feedback and motor control The gear is used to correct a difference between the motor and encoder speeds for example if the encoder is not
287. n both local and external control Frequency control mode The motor follows a frequency reference given to the drive Frequency control is only avallable for scalar motor control Special control modes In addition to the above mentioned control modes the follovving special control modes are avallable Process PID control For more information see section Process PID control page 45 Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3 Drive stops along the defined deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops Jogging mode Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the jogging signal is activated For more information see section Jogging page 36 22 Control locations and operating modes Program features 23 Program features VVhat this chapter contains This chapter describes the features of the control program 24 Program features Drive configuration and programming The drive control program is divided into two parts e firmware program e application program Drive control program Application program opeed control Torque control Frequency control Function block program Parameter Drive logic interface I O interface Standard block library Fieldbus interface Protections Feedback The firmware program performs the main control functions including speed and torque control drive logic start stop I O feedback communication and protection functions Firmware functions are conf
288. n integer format the data received from the value external controller as word 2 of dataset 10 A target for this data can be selected by parameter 62 52 Data set 10 data 2 selection The value can also be used as a source by another parameter 0 65535 Data received as word 2 of dataset 10 62 103 Data set 10 data 3 Displays in integer format the data received from the value external controller as word 3 of dataset 10 A target for this data can be selected by parameter 62 53 Data set 10 data 3 selection The value can also be used as a source by another parameter 0 65535 Data received as word 3 of dataset 10 62 104 Data set 12 data 1 Displays in integer format the data received from the value external controller as word 1 of dataset 12 A target for this data can be selected by parameter 62 54 Data set 12 data 1 selection The value can also be used as a source by another parameter 0 65535 Data received as word 1 of dataset 12 62 124 Data set 24 data 3 1 Displays in integer format the data received from the value external controller as word 3 of dataset 24 A target for this data can be selected by parameter 62 74 Data set 24 data 3 selection The value can also be used as a source by another parameter 0 65535 Data received as word 3 of dataset 24 90 Feedback selection 1 Motor speed feedback configuration See also section Encoder support page 37 and the diagram on page 387 90 01 Motor s
289. n master follower communication 0 65535 Data received as word 1 in master follower communication Parameters 241 62 27 MF DA D data 3 Follower only Displays in integer format the data received value from the master as word 3 Parameter 62 03 M F data 3 selection can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 3 in master follower communication 62 28 Follower node 2 Displays in integer format the data received from the first data 1 value follower ie follower with node address 2 as word 1 Parameter 62 04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address 2 62 29 Follower node 2 Displays in integer format the data received from the first data 2 value follower ie follower with node address 2 as word 2 Parameter 62 05 Follower node 2 data 2 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address 2 62 30 Follower node 2 Displays in integer format the data received from the first data 3 value follower ie follower with node address 2 as word 3 Parameter 62 06 Follower node 2 data 3 sel can be used
290. n the follovving cases 1 One time measurement of the rotor and encoder position difference when an absolute encoder a resolver or an encoder with commutation signals is used 2 Atevery power up when an incremental encoder is used 3 With open loop motor control repetitive measurement of the rotor position at every start Several autophasing modes are available see parameter 21 13 Autophasing mode The turning mode is recommended especially with case 1 as it is the most robust and accurate method In turning mode the motor shaft is turned back and forward 360 polepairs in order to determine the rotor position In case 3 open loop control the shaft is turned only in one direction and the angle is smaller The standstill modes can be used if the motor cannot be turned for example when the load is connected As the characteristics of motors and loads differ testing must be done to find out the most suitable standstill mode A rotor position offset used in motor control can also be given by the user See parameter 98 15 Position offset user The drive is capable of determining the rotor position when started to a running motor in open loop or closed loop modes n this situation the setting of 27 13 Autophasing mode has no effect Settings Parameters 21 13 Autophasing mode page 144 98 15 Position offset user page 265 and 99 13 Identification run request page 267 Program features 43 Flux braking The
291. nal cycled 2 Operation 1 Drive is ready to operate allowed Ready to 1 Drive is ready to receive a start command start 6 Moduia ng H Drive is modulating output stage is being controlled B Local Drive is in local sol o Network ctrl 1 Drive is in network control 10 active 1 Control location EXT1 active Ext2 active 1 Control location EXT2 active 11 12 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Status word 1 121 Parameters 89 06 17 Drive status word 2 Drive status word 2 This parameter is read only Bi pame escip o D Identification run done 1 Motor identification ID run has been performed Power control 1 Power control mode active 5 Safe reference active 11 A safe reference is applied by functions such as parameters 49 05 and 50 02 Last speed active 1 A last speed reference is applied by functions such as parameters 49 05 and 50 02 7 loss ofreference Reference signal os 8 Emergency stop failed 1 Emergency stop failed 9 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Control status word 1 121 06 18 Start inhibit status Start inhibit status word This word specifies the source of the word inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from starting The conditions marked with an asterisk only require that the start command is cycled In all other instances the inhibiting condition must be removed first See also parameter 06 16
292. nce is within tolerance limits i e in speed control speed error is 10 max of nominal motor speed Actual value differs from reference is outside tolerance limits 5 em 1 SOT DTive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 e B Drive control location LOCAL limit Actual speed frequency or torque equals or exceeds supervision limit Valid in both directions of rotation The supervision limits are defined by parameters 46 37 46 33 Actual speed frequency or torque within supervision limit TT userbto Ses parameter 06 30 User bit selection 6 12 serbtT Ses parameter 06 37 User bit T selection 13 Userbiz Ses parameter 06 32 User bit Z selection 14 userbi3 See parameter 06 33 User bit 3 selection 15 Reserved Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 341 The state diagram K SWITCH ON from any state INHIBITED SW b6 1 Fault Power ON CW b0 0 S e NOT READY TO AUT sw b3 1 SWITCH ON SW b0 0 CW b7 1 CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx x110 S CW b3 0 V READY TO T OPERATION SWITCH ON SW b0 1 INHIBITED SW b2 0 from any state operation 8 Emergency stop inhibited CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx x111 OFF2 CW b1 0 2 READY TO from any state OPERATE SW b1 1 ACTIVE F SW b4 0 OFF1 CW b0 0 CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and gt OFF1 SW b12 1 ACTIVE SW b1 0 Y from any state 7 n f 20 120 CW 7 and Emer
293. ncoder 1 groups 93 Encoder 2 configuration are interface FEN xx cannot be correct found Note Nevv settings vvill only take effect after parameter 91 10 Encoder parameter refresh is used or after the drive control unit is powered up the next time Check the event log for an auxiliary code See appropriate actions for each code at warning A7E1 Encoder 1 ATEE Panel loss Control panel or PC tool Check PC tool or control panel Programmable warning selected as active control connection 49 05 Communication loss location for drive has ceased 1 Check control panel connector ge communicating Disconnect and reconnect the control panel A880 Motor bearing warning Warning generated by an on Check the event log for an auxiliary code Programmable warnings time timer or a value counter 1 Check the source of the warning 33 14 On time 1 warning corresponding to the code 7 0 33 13 On time 1 source 7 1 33 23 On time 2 source 33 55 Valie counter 1 4 33 53 Value counter 1 source warning select 5 33 63 Value counter 2 source 33 65 Value counter 2 warning selection A881 Output relay warning Warning generated by an edge Check the event log for an auxiliary code A882 Motor starts warning counter Check the Source of the Warning Programmable warnings corresponding to the code A883 33 35 Edge counter 1 warning 2 33 33 Edge counter 1 source selection 3 33 43 Edge counter 2 source 884 Main contact
294. ncreases The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load torque reference speed controller output At 100 speed controller output drooping is at its nominal level e equal to the value of this parameter The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load The droop rate can be used e g to adjust the load sharing in a Master Follower application run by several drives In a Master Follower application the motor shafts are coupled to each other The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice Speed decrease Speed controller output x Drooping x Nominal speed Example Speed controller output is 5096 droop rate is 196 nominal speed of the drive is 1500 rpm Speed decrease 0 50 x 0 01 x 1500 rpm 7 5 rpm Motor speed in of nominal No drooping 100 25 08 Drooping rate Drooping Speed controller Drive load output 100 25 09 Speed ctrl balance Selects the source for enabling disabling speed controller enable output balancing See parameter 25 10 Speed ctrl balance reference O Disabled 1 Enabled um N r LEALES E EE CECR EE sus ita S 05 ali 01 70 02 DI ela sus ita 5 06 ati 0 10 02 DI ely sus ira T Oreb Seuceselecion see Toms and abbreviations on page an GQ l A Parameters 163 25 10 Speed ctrl balance Defines the
295. ncy output 1 See O Hz min diagrams at parameter 11 58 Freq out 1 src min 0 16000 Hz Minimum value of frequency output 1 11 61 Freq out 1 at src Defines the maximum value of frequency output 1 See 16000 Hz max diagrams at parameter 11 58 Freq out 1 src min 0 16000 Hz Maximum value of frequency output 1 102 Parameters 12 Standard Al Configuration of analog inputs 12 11 actual value Displays the value of analog input Al1 in mA or V depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage by jumper J1 This parameter is read only 22 000 22 000 Value of analog input Al1 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 12 12 Al1 scaled value Displays the value of analog input Al1 after scaling See parameters 12 19 scaled at Al1 min and 12 20 scaled at Al1 max This parameter is read only 32768 000 Scaled value of analog input Al1 1 1 32767 000 12 15 1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI1 Note This setting must match the corresponding jumper setting on the drive control unit see the hardware manual of the drive Control board reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings v 08 E 12 16 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 0 100 s Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 _ eil
296. nd select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field Contact us www abb com drives www abb com drivespartners 3AUA0000085967 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE 2012 07 16 Power and productivity AA EP for a better world FP W HD
297. nections Check if communication master is able to communicate Check status of controller See user documentation of controller Check settings of parameter group 60 D2D and DDCS communication Check cable connections If necessary replace cables Check status of other drives on the master follower link Check settings of parameter group 60 D2D and DDCS communication Check cable connections If necessary replace cables Check that the parameter settings in groups 92 Encoder 1 configuration are correct Note New settings will only take effect after parameter 91 10 Encoder parameter refresh is used or after the drive control unit is powered up the next time Check the event log for an auxiliary code See appropriate actions for each code below Contact your local ABB representative Check the wiring of the encoder See also parameters 92 20 Encoder cable fault func and 92 21 Encoder cable fault mode 318 Fault tracing too ere O mmm hex Aus code 414 Resolver ID run fault Contact your local ABB representative Jusen Resolver SWversion 7 Ise zg ResoWver speed scale Jusen Datareademor 0 Aux code 425 Cable fault mode not Current setting of 92 21 Encoder cable supported fault mode not supported by the FEN xx module 35 Aux code 514 Check the vviring of the encoder ATE2 Encoder 2 Encoder 2 has been activated 1 Check that the parameter settings in by parameter but the e
298. nes function how the monitored signal see parameter 32 27 is compared Disabled to its lower and upper limits 32 29 and 32 30 respectively The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32 26 Disabled Signal supervision 3 not in use Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit 1 High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2 limit Abs Low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls 3 below its absolute lower limit Abs High Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4 rises above its absolute upper limit Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or 5 rises above its high limit Abs Both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its absolute low limit or rises above its absolute high limit 32 26 Supervision 3 Selects the action the drive takes when the value monitored action by signal supervision 3 exceeds its limits Note This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32 01 Supervision status A warning 48B0 Signal supervision is generated 1 The drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision 32 27 Supervision 3 Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero signal function 3 Didi For the available selections see parameter 32 07 Supervision 1 signal 32 28 Supervision 3 filter Defines the filter time constant for signa
299. nes the supervision limit for actual frequency 0 00 Hz limit See also parameter 06 11 Main status word bit 10 0 00 1000 00 Hz Actual frequency supervision limit 46 02 Parameters 225 46 33 Above torque limit Defines the supervision limit for actual torque 0 0 Nem See also parameter 06 11 Main status word bit 10 0 0 300 0 Nem Actual torque supervision limit 1 1Nem 47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters source and target settings Note that there are different storage parameters for different data types See also section Data storage parameters page 64 47 01 Data storage 1 Data storage parameter 1 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 02 Data storage 2 Data storage parameter 2 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 03 Data storage 3 Data storage parameter 3 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 04 Data storage 4 Data storage parameter 4 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 05 Data storage 5 Data storage parameter 5 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 06 Data storage 6 Data storage parameter 6 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 07 Data storage 7 Data storage parameter 7 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit data 2147483 008 47 08 Data storage 8 Data storage parameter 8 0 000 real32 2147483 008 32 bit da
300. ng 1 1 Normal operation e Stop by coasting The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from to 1 With the drive stopped 1 Starting allowed Starting not allowed 142 Parameters Eme ramp stop With the drive running 2 Off3 e 1 Normal operation e Stop by ramping along emergency stop ramp defined by parameter 23 23 Emergency stop time The drive can be restarted by removing the emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from to 1 With the drive stopped 1 Starting allowed Starting not allowed 21 05 Emergency stop Selects the source of the emergency stop signal The stop Inactive source mode is selected by parameter 21 04 Emergency stop mode true O Emergency stop active 1 Normal operation Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running CN DIIL DIIL input 70 02 DI delayed status bit 15 Digital input DI1 70 02 DI delayed status bit 0 Digital input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 06 yev Other i Bou selection feee Terms and abbreviations on page 21 06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit The motor is stopped along a 30 00 rpm speed ramp until the defined zero speed limit is reached After the zero speed delay the motor coasts to a stop 0 00 30000 00 Zero speed limit See par rpm 46 01 Parameters 143 N
301. ng is performed during the ID run Turning See section Autophasing on page 41 Turning This mode gives the most accurate autophasing result This mode can be used and is recommended if the motor is allowed to rotate during the ID run and the start up is not time critical Note This mode will cause the motor to rotate during the ID run Standstill 1 Faster than the Turning mode but not as accurate The motor 1 will not rotate Standstill 2 An alternative standstill autophasing mode that can be used if 12 the Turning mode cannot be used and the Standstill 1 mode gives erratic results However this mode is considerably slower than Standstill 1 Parameters 145 21 18 Auto restart time The motor can be automatically started after a short supply power failure using the automatic restart function See section Automatic restart page 54 When this parameter is set to 0 0 seconds automatic restarting is disabled Otherwise the parameter defines the maximum duration of the power failure after which restarting is attempted Note that this time also includes the DC pre charging delay 0 1 5 0s Maximum power failure duration 22 Speed reference Speed reference selection selection See the control chain diagrams on pages 348 350 22 01 Speed ref unlimited Displays the output of the speed reference selection block See the control chain diagram on page 349 This parameter is read only
302. ng of messages is disabled 60 57 DDCS controller Defines the light intensity of the transmission LEDs link control In general use higher values with longer fiber optic cables The maximum setting is applicable to the maximum length of the fiber optic link See Specifications of the master follower link page 32 60 58 DDCS controller Sets a timeout for communication with the external controller 2000 ms comm loss time If a communication break lasts longer than the timeout the O action specified by parameter 60 59 DDCS controller comm loss action is taken comm loss action between the drive and the external controller Drive trips on 7581 DDCS controller comm loss 1 Last speed Drive generates an A7CA DDCS controller comm loss 2 warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low pass filtering WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7CA DDCS controller comm loss warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22 41 Speed ref safe or 28 41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is used WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 60 60 DDCS controller Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from the ref1 type external controller The scaling of the referen
303. ngs Parameter 97 05 Flux braking page 262 DC magnetization DC magnetization can be applied to the motor to lock the rotor at or near zero speed Pre magnetization Pre magnetization refers to DC magnetization of the motor before start Depending on the selected start mode 21 01 Start mode pre magnetization can be applied to 44 Program features guarantee the highest possible breakaway torque up to 200 of the nominal torque of the motor By adjusting the pre magnetization time 21 02 Magnetization time it is possible to synchronize the motor start and for example the release of a mechanical brake DC hold The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at near zero speed in the middle of normal operation DC hold is activated by parameter 27 06 DC current control When both the reference and motor speed drop below a certain level parameter 27 09 DC hold speed the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 21 10 DC current reference When the reference exceeds parameter 21 09 DC hold speed normal drive operation continues DC hold lt a gt Motor speed Reference 21 09 DC hold speed Note DC hold is only available in speed control Post magnetization This feature keeps the motor magnetized for a certain period parameter 27 77 Post magnetization time after stopping This is to prevent the machinery from m
304. nication loss action e 50 02 FBA A comm loss func Safe speed reference See par 46 01 Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1 For more 0 00 rpm information on jogging see page 38 Speed reference for jogging function 1 See par 46 01 Parameters 149 22 43 Jogging 2 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2 For more 0 00 rpm information on jogging see page 38 30000 00 Speed reference for jogging function 2 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 51 Critical speed Enables disables the critical speeds function Also 00b function determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not See also section Critical speeds frequencies page 36 Enable 1 Enable Critical speeds enabled O Disable Critical speeds disabled 1 Sign mode 1 Signed The signs of parameters 22 52 22 57 are taken into account O Absolute Parameters 22 52 22 57 are handled as absolute values Each range is effective in both directions of rotation 2 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Critical speeds configuration word 22 52 Critical speed 1 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1 0 00 rpm Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22 53 Critical speed 1 high 30000 00 Low limit for critical speed 1 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 53 Critical speed 1 Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1 0 00 rpm high Note This value must be
305. ning limit The drive trips on fault 4981 External temperature when measured temperature 2 exceeds the limit set by parameter 35 22 Supervision 2 fault limit 35 21 Supervision 2 Selects the source from which measured temperature 2 is source read Disabled None Temperature supervision 2 is disabled Estimated Estimated motor temperature see parameter 35 01 Motor 1 temperature estimated temperature O 196 Parameters No Name Value KTY84 StdlO Extension module KTY84 module 1 KTY84 module 2 PT100 x1 StdlO PT100 x2 StdlO PT100 x3 StdlO PTC DI6 PTC module 1 PTC module 2 KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35 24 Supervision 2 Al select and an analog output The following settings are required 2 e Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog input to U voltage Any change must be validated by a control unit reboot Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard Al to V volt In parameter group 13 Standard AO set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Force KTY84 excitation The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature the voltage over the sensor increases The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 1 3 See also parameters
306. o Name Value Description Def FbEq16 21 07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function The 0 ms function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows the rotor position accurately Without zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21 06 Zero speed limit inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to a stop With zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21 06 Zero speed limit the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live the inverter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart Zero speed delay can be used e g with the jogging function Speed Speed controller remains active Motor is decelerated to true zero speed 0 30000 ms Zero speed delay 1 1 ms 144 Parameters 21 08 current control Activates deactivates the DC hold and post magnetization 00b functions See section DC magnetization page 43 Note DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up In applications where long DC magnetization times are required externally ventilated motors should be used
307. o ereer foo eanas a Z Parameters 203 40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control Two different sets of parameter values can be pre defined The first set is made up of parameters 40 07 40 56 the second set is defined by the parameters in group 41 Process PID set 2 The binary source that defines which set is used is selected by parameter 40 57 Sel between set1 set2 See also the control chain diagrams on pages 360 and 361 The remaining parameters in this group are common for both sets 40 01 Process PID actual Displays the output of the process PID controller See the value control chain diagram on page 361 This parameter is read only The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 32768 32 67 Process PID controller output 1 1 unit 40 02 Feedback actual Displays the value of process feedback after source value selection mathematical function parameter 40 70 Feedback function and filtering See the control chain diagram on page 360 This parameter is read only The unit is selected by parameter 40 72 Unit selection 32768 32767 Process feedback 1 1 unit 40 03 Setpoint actual Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source value selection mathematical function 40 78 Setpoint function limitation and ramping See the control chain diagram on page 367 This parameter is read only The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 32768 32 67 Set
308. ocations and operating modes What this chapter contains This chapter describes the control locations and operating modes supported by the control program 18 Control locations and operating modes Local control vs external control The ACS880 has two main control locations external and local The control location is selected with the Loc Rem key on the control panel or in the PC tool ACS880 Drive to drive D2D link or master follower link D Fieldbus adapter Fxxx or DDCS communication module Control panel or Drive composer a e PC tool optional Encoder 1 Extra inputs outputs can be added by installing optional I O extension modules FIO xx in drive slots 2 Encoder or resolver interface module s FEN xx installed in drive slots Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC equipped with Drive composer when the drive is in local control Speed and torque control modes are available for local control frequency mode is available when scalar motor control mode is used see parameter 79 76 Local control mode Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control Changing the control location to local can be prevented by parameter 19 17 Local control disable The user can select by a parameter 4
309. ode Activates deactivates process PID control Note Process PID control is only available in external control see section Local control vs external control page 18 Process PID control inactive 0 Process PID control active 1 B n On when drive Process PID control is active when the drive is running 2 running 40 08 Feedback 1 source Selects the first source of process feedback See the control A 1 scaled chain diagram on page 360 Al1 scaled 12 12 Al1 scaled value see page 102 Al2 scaled 12 22 Al2 scaled value see page 103 Freq in scaled 11 39 Freq in 1 scaled see page 99 01 10 Motor torque 6 see page 84 7 For the selections see parameter 40 08 Feedback 1 source 40 10 Feedback function Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two In sources selected by parameters 40 08 Feedback 1 source and 40 09 Feedback 2 source Int In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2 In1 In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1 In1 In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2 In1 In2 Source 1 divided by source 2 No Name Value MAX In1 In2 Parameters 205 MIN In1 In2 omaller of the two sources 8 5 Greater of the two sources 6 AVE In1 In2 Average of the two sources sqrt In1 Square root of source 1 8 mme sn rerontorissune1 suen 0 0 40 12 40 14 Unit selection Setpoint base Defines the unit for parameters 40 01 40 05 40 21 40 24 rpm and 40 47
310. odule 3 type FIO 11 1500 0 max See parameter 14 36 A 1 scaled at Al1 max 16 37 2 source Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 Not See parameter 14 37 RO2 source energized 16 38 RO2 ON delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 38 RO2 ON delay 16 39 RO2 OFF delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 39 RO2 OFF delay 16 41 A 2 actual value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 47 A 2 actual value 16 42 AI2 scaled value Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 42 A 2 scaled value 16 43 Al2 force data Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA See parameter 14 43 A 2 force data 16 44 AI2 HW switch pos Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 44 A 2 HW switch pos Parameters 129 16 45 Al2unit selection Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 45 AI2 unit selection 16 46 12 filter gain Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 46 AI2 filter gain 16 47 A12 filter time Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 100 s See parameter 14 47 AI2 filter time 16 48 Al2 min Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 48 AI2 min V 16 49 Al2 max Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 49 A12 max V 16 50 Al2 scaled at Al2 Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 min See
311. of the reference sources is used as frequency 5 reference 1 28 14 Frequency ref1 2 Configures the selection between frequency references 1 and Frequency selection 2 The sources of the references are defined by parameters reference 1 28 11 Frequency ref1 selection and 28 12 Frequency ref2 selection respectively 0 Frequency reference 1 1 Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference 1 Frequency 1 1 reference 2 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 5777 00b 28 21 Constant frequency Determines how constant frequencies are selected and function whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant frequency 1 Packed 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 28 22 28 23 and 28 24 0 Separate Constant frequencies 1 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 28 22 28 23 and 28 24 respectively In case of conflict the constant frequency with the smaller number takes priority 1 Dir ena 1 Start dir To determine running direction for a constant frequency the sign of the constant frequency setting parameters 28 26 28 32 is multiplied by the direction signal forward 1 reverse 1 For example if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant frequency is negative the drive will run in the forward direction O According to par The running direction for th
312. of the revolution count within an SSI message Selects the data format for an SSI encoder Selects the baud rate for an SSI encoder 200 kBit s 200 kbit s 500 kBit s 500 kbit s 1000 kBit s 1000 kbit s 92 40 SSI zero phase Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Defines the phase angle within one sine cosine signal period that corresponds to the value of zero on the SSI serial link data The parameter is used to adjust the synchronization of the SSI position data and the position based on sine cosine incremental signals Incorrect synchronization may cause an error of 1 incremental period Note This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI encoder is used in initial position mode see parameter 92 30 Serial link mode 92 45 Hliperface parity Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Defines the use of parity and stop bits with a HIPERFACE encoder Typically this parameter need not be set Odd J Odd parity indication bit one stop bit Even parity indication bit one stop bit 1 92 46 Hiperface baud rate Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc 4800 bits s Defines the transfer rate of the link with a HIPERFACE 315 45 deg 1 2 3 encoder Typically this parameter need not be set 4800 bits s 4800 bit s 9600 bits s 9600 bit s 1 19200 bits s 19200 bit s 2 Parameters 255 38400 bits s 38400 bit s 3 92 47 mHiperface node Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc
313. ominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate 0 000 Nem torque motor model Not obligatory Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 00 Nominal motor torque 1 100 Nem 42946 72329 296 Nem 99 13 Identification run Selects the type of the motor identification performed at the request next start of the drive for Direct Torque Control During the identification the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control After the ID run the drive is stopped Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Once the ID run is activated it can be cancelled by stopping the drive If ID run has already been performed once parameter is automatically set to NO If no ID run has been performed yet parameter is automatically set to Standstill In this case the ID run must be performed Notes ID run cannot be performed if parameter 99 04 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar ID run must be performed every time any of the motor parameters 99 04 99 06 99 12 have been changed Parameter is automatically set to Standstill after the motor parameters have been set With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor the motor shaft must NOT be locked and the load torque must be 10 during the ID run Normal Reduced Standstill For the Advanced ID run the machinery must always be de coupled from the motor Ensure that possible Safe Torque Off and emer
314. on 1 fault limit Or 121 ohm 35 13 Supervision 1 warning limit Real 1000 C or 1 1 C ohm E 20 5 2 protection 0 2 1 1 1 ELE 22 2 fault limit NE 1000 C or 1 1 C ohm 35 23 Supervision 2 warning limit Real 1000 C or 1 1 C ohm 35 50 Motor ambient temperature 60 100 Cc 151 1 1 1217 35 51 Motor load curve 50 150 Ca 1 1 35 52 Zero speed load 50 150 35 53 Break point 1 00 500 00 100 1 Hz 5 54 Motor nominal temp rise 0 300 35 55 Motor thermal time const 100 10000 36 Load analyzer 36 01 PVL signal Analog 1 1 src 36 02 PVL filter time 0 00 120 00 100 1s 36 06 AL2 signal Analog 121 src 36 07 AL2 signal base 0 00 32767 00 MESA 100 1 36 10 PVL peak value 32768 00 32767 00 pe 100 1 Additional parameter data 293 KS we Range LIT mer iber 9642 l l T 266 Pviresetdate l l 1 eaae ate g st at 38 40 Process PID set 1 40 01 Process PID actual value Real 32768 32767 rpm or 100 1 rpm Hz or Hz 40 02 Feedback actual value Real 32768 32767 rpm 9o or 100 1 rpm 90 Hz or Hz 40 03 Setpoint actual value Real 32768 32767 rpm or 100 1 rpm Hz or Hz 40 04 Deviation actual value Real 32768 32767 rpm or 100 1 rpm 90 Hz or Hz 40 05 Trim output actual value Real 32768 32767 rpm or 100
315. ontrol chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference after additive 2 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 87 Speed reference 7 act 30000 00 30000 00 rpm Displays the value of speed reference before application of critical speeds See the control chain diagram on page 349 The value is received from 22 86 Speed reference 6 act unless overridden by any constant speed a jogging reference control panel reference safe speed reference This parameter is read only Speed reference before application of critical speeds See par 46 01 e network control reference Parameters 151 23 Speed reference Speed reference ramp settings ramp See the control chain diagram on page 350 23 01 Speed ref ramp in Displays the used speed reference before ramping and shaping in rpm See the control chain diagram on page 350 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference before ramping and shaping See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 23 02 Speed ref ramp out Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm See the control chain diagram on page 350 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference after ramping and shaping See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 23 11 Ramp set selection Selects the source that switches between the two sets of acceleration deceleration times defined by parameters 23 12 23 15 0 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in
316. ontrolled by bit O of parameter 44 01 Brake control status This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output or a digital input output in output mode which is then wired to the brake actuator through a relay See the wiring example on page 52 The brake control logic in various states will request the drive control logic to hold the motor increase the torque or ramp down the speed These requests are visible in parameter 44 01 Brake control status Settings Parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control page 217 Program features 49 Brake state diagram from any state from any state 9 2 BRAKE DISABLED BRAKE CLOSED 09 BRAKE OPENING S BRAKE OPENING VVAIT m BRAKE OPENING 1 DELAY 5 o BRAKE OPEN BRAKE CLOSING BRAKE CLOSING DELAY m BRAKE CLOSING WAIT Pos State descriptions State name Description BRAKE DISABLED Brake control is disabled parameter 44 06 Brake control enable 0 and 44 01 Brake control status b4 0 The open signal is active 44 01 Brake control status bO 1 BRAKE OPENING BRAKE OPENING WAIT Brake has been requested to open The drive logic is requested to increase the torque up to opening torque to hold the load in place 44 01 Brake control status b1 1 and b2 1 The state of 44 11 Keep brake closed is checked if it is not 0 within a reasonable time the drive trips on a 7145 Mechanical brake opening not allowed f
317. oo low when the drive is stopped Difference in DC voltages Contact your local ABB representative between parallel connected inverter modules 314 Fault tracing Code hex A490 A491 A4A1 A4A9 AABO AAB1 AAF6 A580 A5A0 ASEA ASEB Incorrect temperature sensor setup External temperature Editable message text IGBT overtemperature Cooling Excess temperature Excess temperature difference IGBT temperature PU communication Safe torque off Programmable vvarning 31 22 STO indication run stop Measurement circuit temperature PU board powerfail Power unit power supply failure Sensor type mismatch or Faulty wiring between an encoder interface module and the temperature sensor Measured temperature 1 or 2 has exceeded warning limit Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive Drive module temperature is excessive Power unit module temperature is excessive High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Communication errors detected between the drive control unit and the power unit Safe torque off function is active i e safety circuit signal s connected to connector XSTO is lost Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive Check the settings of supervision source parameters 35 11 and 35 21 against 91 21 and 91 24 Check the wiring of the sensor The auxili
318. op 0 Start 1 Auto Safe torque off circuits must be closed for the drive to start See Hardware manual of drive X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connection N sch a Ors x 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 Application macros PID control macro The PID control macro is suitable for process control applications for example closed loop pressure level or flow control systems such as e pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems level controlling pumps of water reservoirs pressure boost pumps of district heating systems e material flow control on a conveyor line The process reference signal is connected to analog input Al1 and the process feedback signal to Al2 Alternatively a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through Al1 Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the process variable Selection between direct speed control control location EXT1 and process variable control EXT2 is done through digital input DI3 The stop start signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to DI1 and DI6 respectively A constant speed by default 300 rpm can be activated through DIA Application macros 71 Default parameter settings for the PID control macro Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed for the Factory macro in Parameter listing page 84 Parameter PID contro
319. or 33 45 Edge counter 2 warning mn 9 warning selection 885 DC charge warning A886 On time 1 Warning generated by on time Check the source of the warning Editable message text timer 1 parameter 33 13 On time 1 source Programmable warning 33 14 On time 1 warning select gt gt A887 1 On time 2 Warning generated by on time Check the source of the warning Editable message text timer 2 parameter 33 23 On time 2 source Programmable warning 33 24 On time 2 warning select Code hex A888 Edge counter 1 Editable message text Programmable warning 33 35 Edge counter 1 warning selection A889 Edge counter 2 Editable message text Programmable vvarning 33 45 Edge counter 2 warning selection ABBA Value counter 1 Editable message text Programmable vvarning 33 55 Value counter 1 warning select A88B Value counter 2 Editable message text Programmable warning 33 65 Value counter 2 warning selection Warning generated by edge counter 1 Warning generated by edge counter 2 Warning generated by value counter 1 Warning generated by value counter 2 Fault tracing 319 Check the source of the warning parameter 33 33 Edge counter 1 source Check the source of the warning parameter 33 43 Edge counter 2 source Check the source of the warning parameter 33 53 Value counter 1 source Check the source of the warning parameter 33 63 Value counter 2 source C
320. or operate the drive system 12 Introduction to the manual Contents of the manual This manual consists of the following chapters e Using the control panel provides the basic instructions for use of the control panel e Control locations and operating modes describes the control locations and operating modes of the drive e Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACS880 primary control program e Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram Parameters describes the parameters of the drive e Additional parameter data contains further information on the parameters e Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with possible causes and remedies e Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive e Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter module e Drive to drive link describes the communication between drives connected together by the drive to drive D2D link Control chain diagrams Related documents Note A quick start up sequence for a speed control application is provided by ACS880 drives with primary control program Quick start up guide 3AUA0000098062 delivered with the drive A list of related manuals i
321. or torque page 84 DN ES 35 CNN LN anoe r DEER EEES 2302 Speed reramp ou page T m 2407 Used speed reference page TR TR 7002 Torque refused page 10 8 02 Frequency fran out pape L 001 Process PID actual vate page 209 m 002 Feedback actual E E dT 003 Sepont actual ave page m 004 actual vale q z m The value is taken from another parameter 1 4 7 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 Parameters 101 11 58 Freq out 1 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 0 000 11 55 Freq out 1 source and shown by parameter 11 54 Freq out 1 actual value that corresponds to the minimum value of frequency output 1 defined by parameter 11 60 Freq out 1 at src min 11 54 Signal real selected by par 11 55 Signal real selected by par 11 55 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum value of 1 1 32767 000 frequency output 1 11 59 Freq out 1 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 1500 000 11 55 Freq out 1 source and shown by parameter 11 54 Freq out 1 actual value that corresponds to the maximum value of frequency output 1 defined by parameter 11 61 Freq out 1 at src max See parameter 11 58 Freq out 1 src min 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum value of 1 1 32767 000 frequency output 1 11 60 Freq out 1 at src Defines the minimum value of freque
322. ore information on the connectivity of the control unit is given in the Hardware manual of the drive General Application macros are sets of default parameter values suitable for the application in question When starting up the drive the user typically selects the best suited application macro as a basis and makes the necessary changes and saves the result as a user parameter set Application macros can be selected by parameter 96 04 Macro select User parameter sets are managed by the parameters in group 96 System 66 Application macros Factory macro The Factory macro is suited to relatively straightforvvard speed control applications such as conveyors pumps and fans and test benches In external control the control location is EXT1 The drive is speed controlled with the reference signal connected to analog input Al1 The start stop commands are given through digital input DI1 running direction is determined by DI2 Faults are reset through digital input 013 14 switches between acceleration deceleration time sets 1 and 2 The acceleration and deceleration times as well as ramp shapes are defined by parameters 23 12 23 19 DI5 activates constant speed 1 Default parameter settings for the Factory macro The default parameter settings for the Factory macro are listed under Parameter listing page 84 Application macros 67 Default control connections for the Factory macro XPOW External power input 1
323. ort on the communication drive 1 49 01 Node ID number Defines the node ID of the drive All devices connected to the network must have a unique node ID Note For networked drives it is advisable to reserve ID 1 for spare replacement drives 49 04 Communication Sets a timeout for control panel or PC tool communication If loss time a communication break lasts longer than the timeout the action specified by parameter 49 05 Communication loss action is taken 0 1 3000 0 s Panel PC tool communication timeout 10 1s 49 05 Communication Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool Fault loss action communication break Drive trips on 7081 Panel port communication 1 Last speed Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and freezes the 2 speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low pass filtering WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22 41 Speed ref safe or 28 41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is used WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 49 06 Refresh settings Applies the settings of parameters 49 01 49 05 Note Refreshing may cause a communication break so reconnecting the drive
324. osition interpolation extrapolated at the time of data request 92 19 Position data width Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Defines the number of bits used to indicate position within one revolution For example a setting of 15 bits corresponds to 32768 positions per revolution The value is used when parameter 92 11 Absolute position source is set to EnDat Hiperface or SSI When parameter 92 11 Absolute position source is set to Tamagawa this parameter is internally set to 17 0 32 Number of bits used in position indication vvithin one 1 1 revolution 92 14 Speed estimation Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL Disable enable Selects whether calculated or estimated speed is used Estimation increases the speed ripple in steady state operation but improves the dynamics Disable Last calculated speed used The calculation interval is 62 5 microseconds to 4 milliseconds Estimated speed estimated at the time of data request is used 92 14 Revolution data Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc width Defines the number of bits used in revolution counting with an multiturn encoder For example a setting of 12 bits would support counting up to 4096 revolutions The value is used when parameter 92 11 Absolute position source is set to EnDat Hiperface or SSI When parameter 92 11 Absolute position source is set to Tamagawa setting this parameter to a non zero value activates multiturn dat
325. ot selected source Motor speed 01 01 Motor speed used see page 84 The value is taken from another parameter DEN 33 54 Value counter 1 Divisor for value counter 1 The value of the monitored signal 1 000 divider is divided by this value before integration 0 001 Divisor for value counter 1 2147483 647 33 55 Value counter 1 Selects the warning message for value counter 1 Value 1 warning select Value 1 Pre selectable warning message for value counter 1 192 Parameters Motor bearing Pre selectable warning message for value counter 1 33 60 Value counter 2 Reading of value counter 2 Can be reset from the Drive actual composer PC tool or from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 2147483008 Reading of value counter 2 2147483008 33 61 Value counter 2 Sets the warning limit for value counter 2 0 limit 2147483008 VVarning limit for value counter 2 2147483008 3 62 Value counter 2 Configures value counter 2 This counter measures by 00b function integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 33 63 Value counter 2 source A divisor may be applied to the count see 33 64 Value counter 2 divider When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 33 61 Value counter 2 limit the warning specified by 33 65 Value counter 2 warning selection is given if enabled by this parameter The signal is sampled at 1 second intervals Note that the scaled see t
326. other parameters For example this parameter selects a target for word 1 of dataset 10 Parameter 62 101 Data set 10 data 1 value displays the received data in integer format and can also be used as a source by other parameters None None CW 16bit Control Word 16 bits 2 3 Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 16 bits a 4 Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 16 bits 3 The value is taken from another parameter 247 62 52 Data set 10 data 2 selection Data set 10 data 3 selection 62 54 Data set 12 data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 2 of dataset 10 None See also parameter 62 102 Data set 10 data 2 value For the selections see parameter 2 57 Data set 10 data 1 selection Defines a target for the data received as word 3 of dataset 10 None See also parameter 62 103 Data set 10 data 3 value For the selections see parameter 62 51 Data set 10 data 1 selection 62 74 Data set 24 data 3 selection 62 101 Data set 10 data 1 value See parameter 62 51 Data set 10 data 1 selection See parameter 62 51 Data set 10 data 1 selection Displays in integer format the data received from the external controller as vvord 1 of dataset 10 A target for this data can be selected by parameter 2 51 Data set 10 data 1 selection The value can also be used as a source by another parameter 0 65535 Data received as vvord 1 of dataset 10 Parameters 243 62 102 Data set 10 data 2 Displays i
327. outputs on the extension module Example 0000001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off This parameter is read only 0000h FFFFh Delayed status of digital input outputs 14 09 DIO1 configuration Selects whether DIO1 of the extension module is used asa Input digital input or output DIO1 is used as a digital input Output DIO1 is used as a digital output 1 14 10 DIO1 filter gain Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 7 5 us Determines a filtering time for DIO1 when it is used as an input 780 us 780 microseconds 2 Parameters 109 4 680 ms 4 680 milliseconds 14 11 D O1 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital input output Not DIO1 of the extension module when parameter 14 09 DIO1 energized configuration is set to Output Running Bit 4 of 06 16 Drive status word 1 see page 86 7 Faut A E Other i 14 12 DIO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input output DIO1 Delayed DIO status DIO status Mi ll Se em p m gt cvs on on 14 12 DIO1 ON delay tog 14 13 DIO1 OFF delay Electrical status of DIO in input mode or status of selected source in output mode Indicated by 14 05 DIO status Indicated by 14 06 DIO delayed status 0 0 3000 0 5 Activation delay for DIO1 14 13 DIO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input output DIO1 0 0 s See parameter 1
328. oving under load for example before a mechanical brake can be applied Post magnetization is activated by parameter 21 08 DC current control The magnetization current is set by parameter 21 10 DC current reference Note Post magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode see parameter 21 03 Stop mode Settings Parameters 21 01 Start mode 21 02 Magnetization time and 21 08 21 11 page 144 Program features 45 Application control Application macros See chapter Application macros page 65 Process PID control There is a built in process PID controller in the drive The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure flow or fluid level In process PID control a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level setpoint The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control For a more detailed block diagram see page 360 Setpoint 9 Limitation opeed torque or frequency Process PID Filter AH reference chain Al2 Process bd actual D2D values FBA The control program contains two complete sets of process PID controller settings that can be alternated wheneve
329. p anjea aun eseeJurjulodjes 82 01 emea uw qurodjes 92 op q EA Cajal 4 AL mass UNDIES julodj9s sz Ov mE a uonoajas uogoaj s julod as 4 6 Ob 99JnoS Z juiodies Op enn p Uiod as jeujedu 72 eneA e1urodies jeujedu 6207 zjulodjes euJajul 2207 enjeA enjoe jurodjas 0 Or tat Mat Q RN v m HT ane L vomas ena lodi s jeuiexul Lz Ov d 0 08 jutodjes 9105 nw ensi laav Z V3ulodi s e qeue 2 6 Or amen julodjas gb o mea xeujuiodjes 2 07 Control chain diagrams 361 Process PID controller Lp dnoub ees ajqeyiene osje s z 199 Old sse2oJg SON eneA a uomers d ls LOP enen a uonoeres lqeu d ls CV OV anen oseq nd no amen Aejepd mea seq yuiod es ro anien dn axem Gt Op nen uonennap degen Ar O NP edd enea poul uonejedo Cid 20707 enieA elo 99 aren Alep d sis prop ne eum s li uonenueg op SR uonounJ DEn A d j 7 ew l n deals eov nea eum uonenued ren anea UONeJ1Ba ul ee enea euin ee 0 Z jene 14 S9901d Lok T ureo ze or UOISJOAU uonei eg LEO EN D anea
330. page 166 Encoder support The program supports two single turn or multiturn encoders or resolvers The following optional interface modules are available TTL encoder interface FEN 01 two TTL inputs TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching e Absolute encoder interface FEN 11 absolute encoder input TTL input TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching Resolver interface FEN 21 resolver input TTL input TTL output for encoder emulation echo and two digital inputs for position latching e HTL encoder interface FEN 31 HTL encoder input TTL output for encoder emulation and echo and two digital inputs for position latching The interface module is installed onto any option slot on the drive control unit or onto an FEA xx extension adapter Quick configuration of HTL encoder feedback 1 Specify the type of the encoder interface module parameter 91 11 Module 1 type FEN 31 and the slot the module is installed into 97 72 Module 1 location 38 Program features 2 Specify the type of the encoder 92 07 Encoder 1 type HTL The parameter listing will be re read from the drive after the value is changed 3 Specify the interface module the encoder is connected to 92 02 Encoder 1 source Module 1 4 Set the number of pulses according to encoder nameplate 92 10 Pulses revolution 5 If the encoder rotates at a diffe
331. parameter 14 27 AI1 scaled value 16 28 DIO4 OFF delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 28 DIO4 OFF delay 16 28 force data Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 28 A 1 force data 16 29 Al1 HW switch pos Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 29 HW switch pos 16 30 Al unit selection Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 mA See parameter 14 30 A 1 unit selection 16 31 RO status Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 See parameter 14 31 RO status 16 31 filter gain Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 No filtering See parameter 14 31 A 1 filter gain 16 32 filter time Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 040 s See parameter 14 32 A 1 filter time 16 33 Al min Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or See parameter 14 33 A 1 min V 16 34 RO1 source Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type 1 01 Not See parameter 14 34 RO7 source energized 16 34 Al1 max Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or See parameter 14 34 A 1 max V 16 35 RO1 ON delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 35 RO1 ON delay 16 35 AIT scaled at Al1 Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 11 0 000 m n See parameter 14 35 A 1 scaled at Al1 min 16 36 RO1 OFF delay Visible when 16 01 Module 3 type FIO 01 0 0s See parameter 14 36 RO1 OFF delay 16 36 AIT scaled at Al1 Visible when 16 01 M
332. parameter 40 47 Wake up deviation The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the wake up level 40 47 Wake up deviation and resets if the deviation falls below the wake up level 0 00 60 00 s Wake up delay 1s 40 49 Tracking mode Activates or selects a source that activates tracking mode Off In tracking mode the value selected by parameter 40 50 Tracking ref selection is substituted for the PID controller output See also section Tracking page 47 1 Tracking mode enabled NEN NEM a MEM Off O n 1 glaimnuDi 007271 delayed sas bio 2 iting D2 10 02 DI delay s s 1 3 Digital input DI3 10 02 DI delayed status bit 2 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 o L L 100201 delayed sans iS D i 40 50 Tracking ref Selects the value source for tracking mode See parameter Zero selection 40 49 Tracking mode CO l N Zero None 40 51 Trim mode Activates the trim function and selects between direct and proportional trimming or a combination of both With trimming it is possible to apply a corrective factor to the drive reference setpoint The output after trimming is available as parameter 40 05 Trim output actual value See the control chain diagram on page 361 Off The trim function is inactive o O A j N gt zh D S Q 3 D Cl o o No LA Direct The trim function is active The trimming factor is relative
333. peed for Displays the estimated or measured motor speed that is used control for motor control ie final motor speed feedback selected by parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection and filtered by parameter 90 42 Motor speed filter time This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Motor speed used for control See par 21474836 47 rpm 46 01 90 02 Motor position Displays the motor position received from the source selected by parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Motor position 21474836 47 rev 90 03 Load speed Displays the estimated or measured load speed that is used for motor control ie final load speed feedback selected by parameter 90 51 Load feedback selection and filtered by parameter 90 52 Load speed filter time This parameter is read only 21474836 48 Load speed See par 21474836 47 rpm 46 01 244 Parameters 90 04 Load position Displays the load position received from the source selected by parameter 90 51 Load feedback selection This parameter is read only 2147483648 Load position 2147483647 rev 90 05 Load position Displays the load position scaled vvith feed constant see scaled parameters 90 63 Feed constant numerator and 90 64 Feed constant denominator This parameter is read only 2147483648 Scaled load position 2147483647 90 10 Encoder 1 speed Displays encoder 1 speed in rpm This parameter is read only 21474836 48 En
334. point for process PID controller 1 1 unit 40 04 Deviation actual Displays the process PID deviation By default this value value equals setpoint feedback but deviation can be inverted by parameter 40 31 Deviation inversion See the control chain diagram on page 361 This parameter is read only The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 32768 32767 PID deviation 1 1 unit 40 05 Trim output actual 1 Displays the trimmed reference output See the control chain value diagram on page 361 This parameter is read only The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 204 Parameters 40 06 PID status word Displays status information on process PID control This parameter is read only Bt ee PID active 1 Process PID control active 1 Setpoint frozen 1 Process PID setpoint frozen 2 Output frozen 1 Process PID controller output frozen 3 P D sleep mode 1 Sleep mode active 4 Sleep boost 1 Sleep boost active 9 Trim mode 1 Trim function active Tracking mode 1 Tracking function active 7 BTOutput limit high 11 PID output is being limited by par 40 37 8 Outputlimitlow 11 PID output is being limited by par 40 36 9 Deadband active 1 Deadband active see par 40 39 10 P D set J0 Parameter set 1 in use 1 Parameter set 2 in use 11 15 Reserved 0000h FFFFh Process PID control status word 121 40 07 PID operation m
335. power when connected directly to the supply The value is used for reference when energy savings are calculated Note The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of this value 0 0 10000000 0 Motor power 1 1kW kW 45 21 Energy calculations Resets the savings counter parameters 45 01 45 09 Done reset Reset not requested normal operation Reset Reset the savings counter parameters The value reverts 1 automatically to Done 46 Monitoring scaling Speed supervision settings actual signal filtering general settings scaling settings 46 01 Speed scaling Defines the terminal speed value used in acceleration and the 1500 rom initial soeed value used in deceleration see parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp Also defines the 16 bit scaling of speed related parameters The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in fieldbus master follower etc communication 0 30000 rpm Acceleration deceleration terminal initial speed 1 1 rpm 46 02 Frequency scaling Defines the terminal frequency value used in acceleration and the initial speed value used in deceleration see parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain 50 00 HZ Also defines the 16 bit scaling of frequency related parameters The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in fieldbus master follower etc communication 0 10 1000 00 Hz Acceleration deceleration terminal initial frequency 10
336. pper of the drive is enabled all energy fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into heat When this parameter rolls over parameter 45 02 Saved MW hours is incremented This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 0 999 9 kWh Energy savings in kWh 10 1 kWh 45 05 Saved money Monetary savings in thousands compared to direct on line x1000 motor connection This parameter is incremented when 45 06 Saved money rolls over The currency is defined by parameter 45 17 Tariff currency unit This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 4294967295 Monetary savings in thousands of units 1 1 thousands thousand 45 06 Saved money Monetary savings compared to direct on line motor connection This value is a calculated by multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff 45 14 Tariff selection When this parameter rolls over parameter 45 05 Saved money x1000 is incremented The currency is defined by parameter 45 17 Tariff currency unit This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 00 999 99 units Monetary savings 222 Parameters 45 08 CO2 reduction in Reduction in CO emissions in metric kilotons compared to kilotons direct on line motor connection This value is incremented when parameter 45 09 CO2 reduction in tons rolls over This parameter is read only see
337. presentative Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 315 Code Cause What to do hex A5EC PU communication Communication errors Check the connections between the drive internal detected between the drive control unit and the power unit control unit and the power unit ASED Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault Contact your local ABB representative ADC A5EE Measurement circuit fault Contact your local ABB representative DFF A5EF 1 PU state feedback State feedback from output Contact your local ABB representative phases does not match control signals A5FO Charging feedback Charging feedback signal Check the feedback signal coming from missing the charging system AGA4 Motor nominal value The motor parameters are set Check the settings of the motor incorrectly configuration parameters in group 99 The drive is not dimensioned Check that the drive is sized correctly for correctly the motor A6A5 No motor data Parameters in group 99 have 1 Check that all the required parameters in not been set group 99 have been set Note t is normal for this vvarning to appear during the start up until the motor data is entered Voltage category The supply voltage range has Define supply voltage range parameter unselected not been defined 95 01 Supply voltage FBA A parameter The drive does not have a Check PLC programming conflict functionality requested by Check se
338. que ref Defines the minimum torque reference 300 0 1000 0 0 0 Minimum torque reference See par 46 03 26 09 Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference 300 0 0 0 1000 0 Maximum torque reference See par 46 03 26 11 Torque reri Selects torque reference source 1 See also parameter 26 13 Zero selection Torque ref1 function 03 05 FB A reference 1 see page 85 FB A ref2 03 06 FB A reference 2 see page 85 DS ocs anen DDCS ctrl ref2 03 12 DDCS controller ref 2 see page 86 D2D or M F 03 13 M F or D2D ref1 see page 86 reference 1 D2D or M F 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 see page 86 reference 2 40 01 Process PID actual value output of the process PID controller The value is taken from another parameter 26 12 Torque ref2 Selects torque reference source 2 See also parameter 26 13 selection Torque ref1 function For the available selections see parameter 26 11 Torque ref1 selection 26 19 Torque ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 26 11 Torque ref1 selection and 26 12 Torque ref2 selection The result of the function is then selectable as torque reference 1 in parameter 26 14 Torque ref1 2 selection Ref 1 Signal selected by 26 11 Torque ref1 selection is used as torque reference 1 as such Add The sum of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1 1 Parame
339. r ie follower with node address 4 as word 1 Parameter 62 10 Follower node 4 data 1 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address 4 242 Parameters No Name Value 62 35 Follower node 4 data 2 value Displays in integer format the data received from the third follower ie follower with node address 4 as word 2 Parameter 62 11 Follower node 4 data 2 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters 0 65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address 4 62 36 Follower node 4 data 3 value follower ie follower with node address 4 as word 3 Parameter 62 12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel can be used to select a target for the received data This parameter can also be used as a signal source by other parameters Displays in integer format the data received from the third m 0 65535 Data received as word 3 from follovver with node address 4 62 51 Data set 10 data 1 selection Parameters 62 51 62 74 define a target for the data received in datasets 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 and 24 from the external controller Parameters 62 101 62 124 display the data received from the external controller in integer format and can be used as sources by
340. r interface Input TTL encoder input with commutation support X32 Abs enc Communication active Module type FEN 11 Absolute Encoder nterface nput Absolute encoder input X42 Resolver Communication active Module type FEN 21 Resolver Interface nput Resolver input X52 HTL Communication active Module type FEN 31 HTL Encoder 5 Interface Input HTL encoder input X82 92 02 Encoder 1 source Selects the interface module that the encoder is connected Module 1 to The physical locations and types of encoder interface modules are defined in parameter group 91 Encoder module settings Module 1 Interface module 1 1 Module 2 Interface module 2 2 92 03 Encoder 1 type act Displays the type of optional encoder resolver interface 1 For the possible values see parameter 92 01 Encoder 1 type This parameter is read only 92 10 Pulses revolution Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL Defines the pulse number per revolution 0 65535 Number of pulses 92 10 Sine cosine number Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Defines the number of sine cosine wave cycles within one revolution Note This parameter need not be set when an EnDat or SSI encoder is used in continuous mode See parameter 92 30 Serial link mode 0 65535 Number of sine cosine wave cycles within one revolution 92 10 Excitation signal Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Resolver 1 kHz frequency Defin
341. r necessary see parameter 40 57 Sel between sei set2 Note Process PID control is only available in external control see section Local control vs external control page 18 46 Program features Quick configuration of the process PID controller 1 Activate the process PID controller parameter 40 07 PID operation mode 2 Select a feedback source parameters 40 08 40 11 3 Select a setpoint source parameters 40 16 40 25 4 Set the gain integration time derivation time and the PID output levels 40 32 Gain 40 33 Integration time 40 34 Derivation time 40 36 Output min and 40 37 Output max 5 The PID controller output is shown by parameter 40 01 Process PID actual value Select it as the source of for example 22 11 Speed ref1 selection Sleep function for process PID control The sleep function can be used in PID control applications where the consumption varies When used it stops the pump completely during low demand instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range The following example visualizes the operation of the sleep function The drive controls a pressure boost pump The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the process PID controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor would never stop rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unn
342. r protection 0 1000 ohm Brake resistor resistance value 1 1 ohm 43 11 Brake resistor fault Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor temperature 105 limit supervision When the limit is exceeded the drive trips on fault 7183 BR excess temperature The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43 09 Brake resistor Pmax cont 0 150 Brake resistor temperature fault limit 1 1 43 12 Brake resistor Selects the warning limit for the brake resistor temperature 95 warning limit supervision When the limit is exceeded the drive generates a A793 BR excess temperature warning The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43 09 Brake resistor Pmax cont O 150 Brake resistor temperature warning limit 1 1 Parameters 217 44 Mechanical brake Configuration of mechanical brake control control See also section Mechanical brake control page 48 44 01 Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word This parameter is read only Open command Close open command to brake actuator 0 close 1 open Connect this bit to desired output 1 S Opening torque 11 Opening torque requested from drive logic 2 Hold stopped 1 Hold requested from drive logic request 3 jRamptostopped 1 Ramping down to zero speed requested from drive logic 5
343. r the drive to start See Hardware manual of drive X12 Safety options connection X13 Control panel connection X205 Memory unit connection NS U 5 x Q E 1 2 3 d 5 6 Application macros 79 Fieldbus control macro This application macro is not supported by the current firmware version 80 Application macros Parameters 81 Parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the parameters including actual signals of the control program Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by the drive or contains status information Most actual signals are read only but some especially counter type actual signals can be reset Def In the following table shown on the same row as the parameter name The default value of a parameter for the Factory macro For information on macro specific parameter values see chapter Application macros page 65 FbEq16 In the following table shown on the same row as the parameter range or for each selection 16 bit fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in fieldbus communication when a 16 bit value is selected in parameter group 52 FBA A data in or 53 FBA A data out A dash indicates that the parameter is not accessible in 16 bit format The corresponding 32 bit scalings are listed in chapter Additional parameter data
344. ration 1 Force torque reference additive 2 to zero O D Digital input DI1 70 02 DI delayed status bit O D Digital input DI2 70 02 D delayed status bit 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 DI4 Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 DI5 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Digital input DI6 70 02 DI delayed status bit 5 1 N 2 a a o DIO1 Digital input output DIO1 77 02 DIO delayed status bit 0 DIO2 Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 on El Col Ml gt O i cil B AN 5 m oe Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 26 41 Torque step VVhen enabled by parameter 26 42 Torque step enable adds an additional step to the torque reference 300 00 300 00 Torque step See par 46 03 26 42 Torque step enable Enables a torque step defined by parameter 26 47 Torque Disable step Disable Torque step disabled 7 10 11 0 0 0 Parameters 167 26 70 Torque ref1 actual Displays the value of torque reference source 1 selected by parameter 26 11 Torque ref1 selection See the control chain diagram on page 354 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Value of torque reference source 1 46 03 26 71 Torque ref2 actual Displays the value of torque reference source 2 selected by parameter 26 12 Torque ref2 selec
345. re axis inductance in per unit 10 00000 p u Parameters 265 98 08 PM flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux 0 00000 p u Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00000 2 00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit 7 p u 98 09 Rs user 51 Defines the stator resistance Rs of the motor model 0 00000 ohm 0 00000 Stator resistance 100 00000 ohm 98 10 Rruser SI Defines the rotor resistance Rp of the motor model 0 00000 ohm Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00000 Rotor resistance 100 00000 ohm 98 11 user SI Defines the main inductance Ly of the motor model 0 00 mH Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00 100000 00 Main inductance 1 10000 mH mH 98 12 SigmaL user SI Defines the leakage inductance O Lg 0 00 mH Note This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors 0 00 100000 00 Leakage inductance 1 10000 mH mH 98 13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis synchronous inductance 0 00 mH Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00 100000 00 Direct axis inductance 1 10000 mH mH 98 14 Lq user SI Defines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance 0 00 mH Note This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 00 100000 00 Quadrature axis inductance 1 10000 mH mH 98 15 Position offset user Defines an angle offset between the zero position of the synchronous motor and the
346. rence source 1 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 82 Speed reference 2 act Displays the value of speed reference source 2 selected by parameter 22 12 Speed ref2 selection See the control chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Value of reference source 2 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 83 Speed reference 3 act Displays the value of speed reference after the mathematical function applied by parameter 22 13 Speed ref1 function and reference 1 2 selection 22 14 Speed ref1 2 selection See the control chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference after source selection See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 84 Speed reference 4 act Displays the value of speed reference after application of 1st speed additive 22 15 Additive speed ref1 See the control chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference after additive 1 See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 85 Speed reference 5 act Displays the value of speed reference after the application of the speed share scaling factor 22 16 Speed share See the control chain diagram on page 348 This parameter is read only 30000 00 Speed reference after speed share scaling See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 22 86 Speed reference 6 act Displays the value of speed reference after application of 2nd speed additive 22 17 Additive speed ref2 See the c
347. rent speed to the motor ie is not mounted directly on the motor shaft enter the gear ratio in 90 43 Motor gear numerator and 90 44 Motor gear denominator 6 Set parameter 91 10 Encoder parameter refresh to Configure to apply the new parameter settings The parameter will automatically revert to Done 7 Check that 91 02 Module 1 status and 92 03 Encoder 1 type act are showing the correct interface module and encoder types HTL and FEN 31 respectively Also check the status of the FEN 31 module both LEDs should be glowing green 8 Start the motor with a reference of eg 400 rpm 9 Compare the estimated speed 01 02 Motor speed estimated with the measured speed 01 04 Encoder 1 speed filtered If the values are the same set the encoder as the feedback source 90 41 Motor feedback selection Encoder 1 10 Specify the action taken in case the feedback signal is lost 90 45 Motor feedback fault Settings Parameter groups 90 Feedback selection page 243 91 Encoder module settings page 248 92 Encoder 1 configuration page 250 and 93 Encoder 2 configuration page 255 Jogging Two jogging functions 1 or 2 are available When a jogging function is activated the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed parameter 22 42 Jogging 1 ref or 22 43 Jogging 2 ref along the defined jogging acceleration ramp 23 20 Acc time jogging When the function is deactivated Jogging 1 2 start 0 the drive decelerates
348. rgency stop devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill the required emergency stop categories For more information contact your local ABB representative e After an emergency stop signal is detected the emergency stop function cannot be canceled even though the signal is canceled e f the minimum or maximum torque limit is set to 0 the emergency stop function may not be able to stop the drive Motor thermal protection The control program features two separate motor temperature monitoring functions The temperature data sources and warning trip limits can be set up independently for each function The motor temperature can be monitored using e the motor thermal protection model estimated temperature or e sensors installed in the windings This will result in a more accurate motor model Motor thermal protection model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 When power is applied to the drive for the first time the motor is at ambient temperature defined by parameter 35 50 Motor ambient temperature After this when power is applied to the drive the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature 2 Motor temperature is calculated using the user adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Note The motor thermal model can be use
349. rms and abbreviations 271 Fieldbus addresses 272 Parameter groups 1 9 273 Parameter groups 10 99 275 8 Fault tracing What this chapter contains ik Ex tues DER RR REY RUE PI Ee a s SESE bn de 311 A II 7 311 INGICALOAS rms saves aer ctas yax n Aa aa s rn n a 311 HOW IO d TT s acum s pep dq q9 36a sawdust posts rta raro sata 312 Warning Tault HISIOEV ua der md WE rere E o e des rues d Bon r d a rud 312 zuo ee EC E EE RE EE EE EE 312 Parameters that contain warning fault information 312 Warning Message rd a a rd e ais 313 Fault messages EE 321 9 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface EFB 10 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains 333 System overview 334 Basics of the fieldbus control interface 335 Control word and Status word res 336 References 337 Actal VaAlUGS EE 338 Contents of the fieldbus Control word 339 Contents of the fieldbus Status word
350. rque ref filter time Defines a low pass filter time constant for the torque 0 000 s reference 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant for torque reference 1000 15 26 18 Torque Defines the torque reference ramp up time ie the time for the 0 000 s time reference to increase from zero to nominal motor torque 0 000 60 000 s Torque reference ramp up time 100 15 gt O 166 Parameters 26 19 Torque ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp down time e the time for 0 000 s time the reference to decrease from nominal motor torque to zero 0 000 60 000 s Torque reference ramp down time 100 15 26 25 Torque additive 2 Selects the source of torque reference additive 2 Zero source The value received from the selected source is added to the torque reference after operating mode selection Because of this the additive can be used in speed and torque modes Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when an emergency stop is active See the control chain diagram on page 356 D2D or M F 03 13 M F or D2D ref1 see page 86 reference 1 D2D or M F 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 see page 86 12 reference 2 40 01 Process PID actual value output of the process PID 15 controller Other The value is taken from another parameter 26 26 Force torque ref Selects a source that forces torque reference additive 2 see add 2 zero parameter 26 25 Torque additive 2 source to zero O Normal ope
351. s in each direction Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters 52 01 FBA data in1 52 12 FBA data in12 The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53 01 FBA data out1 53 12 FBA data out12 Fieldbus netvvork Fieldbus adapter FBA Profile EXT1 2 Start func Profile 4 FBA MAIN CW FBA REF1 selection DATA OUT selection Par 10 01 99 99 selection Group 53 FBA MAIN SW FBA ACT1 selection Par 01 01 99 99 Cyclic communication Group 52 Acyclic communication See the manual of the fieldbus 20 01 20 06 Speed Torque REF1 sel 22 11 26 11 26 12 Fieldbus specific interface DATA IN Speed Torque REF2 sel 22 12 26 11 26 12 Parameter adapter module table 1 See also other parameters which can be controlled from fieldbus 2 The maximum number of used data words is protocol dependent 3 Profile instance selection parameters Fieldbus module specific parameters For more information see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 4 With DeviceNet the control part is transmitted directly 5 With DeviceNet the actual value part is transmitted directly 336 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Control word and Status word The Control word is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system lt is
352. s T r A E ser sede 2708000 mem 190 1 _ arepas O H EO T Jarmergan m o 1 r 14 33 Al1 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V or V ECN Fes ESE Im 74 36 scedstAT Real 199 1 War Nzsedidue Fes Ra TT 199 1 MECA CELE 1 H EAE vaqe JI o m 14 48 AI2 min Real 22 000 22 000 mA or V 1000 1 mA or V 2 or V Rap Leem eem 390 1 Nz mak Rea 92708000 32797000 10007 1457 Li Lem 767 000 TRT JA Horses Jl 1450 Il 14 61 14 62 14 63 14 64 14 65 14 66 14 71 14 76 14 77 14 78 14 79 14 80 14 81 14 82 14 83 AI3 filter gain Al3 filter time 15 I O extension module 2 Real Analog Sr Real d r bl bl D D D D D Z S ENEE DL L LV BX y 3 3 gt gt gt gt ala O O II gt a o O J 2 O Q 3 D Cl D Lu Cl Lu N N O Range 0 000 30 000 22 000 22 000 22 000 22 000 32768 000 32767 000 32768 000 32767 000 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 0 000 22 000 0 000 22 000 0 000 30 000 32768 0 32767 0 32768 0 32767 0 0 000 22 000 0 000 22 000 S mA or V mA or V S m m
353. s four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters lt is also possible to use digital inputs to switch between user parameter sets A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10 99 except extension module settings groups 14 16 e data storage parameters group 47 e fieldbus adapter specific settings groups 51 56 and e encoder settings groups 90 93 As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets make sure the settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set In an application where different motors are used with the drive the motor ID run needs to be performed with each motor and the results saved to different user sets The appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched Settings Parameters 96 10 96 13 page 260 Data storage parameters Twenty four sixteen 32 bit eight 16 bit parameters are reserved for data storage These parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for linking testing and commissioning purposes They can be written to and read from using other parameters source or target selections Settings Parameter group 47 Data storage page 225 Application macros 65 Application macros What this chapter contains This chapter describes the intended use operation and default control connections of the application macros M
354. s printed on the inside of the front cover Terms and abbreviations AC 800M Type of programmable controller manufactured by ABB ACS AP I Type of control panel used with ACS880 drives Introduction to the manual 13 Term abbreviation Definition DDCS Distributed drives communication system a protocol used in optical fiber communication Digital input interface for digital input signals Digital input output interface that can be used as a digital input or output Digital output interface for digital output signals A arre tte el input atraco arde puelle Pigereetpubintetesderdigaloupuelgnde IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor a voltage controlled semiconductor type widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and high switching frequency Input Output ID run Motor identification run During the identification run the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control LSB Least significant bit LSW Least significant word MSB Most significant bit MSVV Most significant vvord 14 Introduction to the manual Network control With fieldbus protocols based on the Common Industrial Protocol 1 such as DeviceNet and Ethernet IP denotes the control of the drive using the Net Ctrl and Net Ref objects of the ODVA AC DC Drive Profile For more information see www odva org and the following manuals FDNA 01 DeviceNet adapter module User
355. sent by the fieldbus master station to the drive through the adapter module The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions on the Control word and returns status information to the master in the Status word The contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 339 and 340 respectively The drive states are presented in the state diagram page 341 If parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable is set to Enable the Control word received from the fieldbus is shown by parameter 50 13 FBA A control word and the Status word transmitted to the fieldbus network by 50 16 FBA A status word Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 337 References References are 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources including analog and digital inputs the drive control panel and a fieldbus adapter module In order to have the drive controlled through the fieldbus the module must be defined as the source for control information e g Reference If parameter 50 72 FBA A debug enable is set to Enable the references received from the fieldbus are displayed by 50 14 FBA A reference 1 and 50 15 FBA A reference 2 Scaling of references The references are scaled as shown below The
356. source Binary Sr External event 4 type 0 External event 5 source Binary Src 0 31 04 0 31 05 d 31 06 31 07 31 08 31 09 290 Additional parameter data wi me Rae mee St Evemdeenshe ust tT ur 1 SIC 31 12 Autoreset sel 5275 0000h FFFFh Dos 153 31 13 Selectable fault 0 65535 m ter 31 16 Delay time 0 0 120 0 31 25 Stall current limit 0 0 1600 0 10 1 31 26 Stall speed high 0 0 10000 0 100 1 rpm 31 27 Stall frequency high 0 00 500 00 100 1 Hz 31 30 Speed trip margin 0 10000 100 1 rem 32 Supervision 32 01 Supervision status 57 000b 111b eh SIC 32 08 Supervision 1 filter time 0 000 30 000 1000 15 32 09 Supervision 1 low Real 21474836 48 100 1 21474836 47 32 10 Supervision 1 high Real 21474836 48 100 1 21474836 47 CO Gl O CO OO O 32 17 Supervision 2 signal Analog 1 1 SIC RES 32 18 Supervision 2 filter time 0 000 30 000 S 1000 15 32 19 Supervision 2 low Real 21474836 48 21474836 47 32 20 Supervision 2 high 1 32 15 Supervision 2 function 100 1 32 25 Supervision 3 function SIC Real 21474836 48 100 1 21474836 47 32 28 Supervision 3 filter time Real 0 000 30 000 1000 15 Additional parameter data 291 Mme s age Um mee NN NN 21474836 47 M T R 21474836 47 an Cowiersus PE mmm Er mmm SIC saz
357. speed calculation Channel B Defines the direction of rotation Auto rising One of the above modes is selected automatically depending on the pulse frequency as follows Pulse frequency of the scada mode channel s lt 2442 Hz A amp B all 2442 4884 Hz gt 4884 Hz Auto falling One of the above modes is selected automatically depending on the pulse frequency as follovvs Pulse frequency of the ced mode channel s lt 2442 Hz A amp B all 2442 4884 Hz N Blo Ei wo Mm O lt 4 5 gt 4884 Hz A falling 92 12 Zero pulse enable 1 Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Abs enc Enables the encoder zero pulse for the absolute encoder input X42 of the FEN 11 interface module Note No zero pulse exists with serial interfaces ie when parameter 92 11 Absolute position source is set to EnDat Disable Hiperface SSI or Tamagawa 252 Parameters 92 12 Resolver polepairs Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type Resolver 1 Defines the number of pole pairs of the encoder Number of encoder pole pairs 1 1 92 13 Position estimation Visible when 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL TTL or HTL Enable enable Selects whether position estimation is used with encoder 1 to increase position data resolution or not Disable Measured position used The resolution is 4 x pulses per revolution for quadrature encoders 2 x pulses per revolution for single track encoders Enable Estimated position used Uses p
358. st ak II SES 92 12 FBA data in12 53 FBA A data out 53 01 FBA data out1 List II SEN List 53 12 FBA data out12 60 D2D and DDCS communication 60 01 60 02 60 03 60 05 60 07 60 08 60 09 M F comm loss function List 1151 Real List List Real Real List M F communication port M F node address M F mode M F HW connection M F link control M F comm loss timeout 204 0 65535 O lolo N T N o Additional parameter data 301 wl Name le Re Um mee g z Mee ue H HT H C 0 si os H C H HTH H CHH 9m H 60 52 DDCS controller node address 1 254 61 26 M F data 2 value 0 65535 61 27 M F data 3 value 0 65535 61 61 Data set 17 data 2 selection EE eres Data set 19 data soleeton ust Sid Si Dataset daa 2 session Lu 7 ero Data s t 19 daa selection e oo EE Sir Data sett daa selection im 302 Additional parameter data No Name le 1 Range ni GE Daa set 21 data 3 section tie 6169 Data set 23 data telecon L amp 6170 Bala set 23 data zseton Lu o Data setZ3 daa selen Lu 6172 Bala s t 25 data 1 selection Ts 6173 Data s t 25 daa 2steoion Lu 6174 Data set 25 data 3 selection Lu 7 77 61 01 Data set Res 0 889 61102 Data set 1
359. sta Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication Adapter is not configured Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive Conf err Adapter configuration error mapping file not found in the file N I c O 5 D system of the drive or mapping file upload has failed more than three times Fieldbus communication is off line 232 Parameters 5 On line Fieldbus communication is on line or fieldbus adapter has been configured not to detect a communication break For more information see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter Adapter is performing a hardware reset 8 1 51 32 FBA comm SW ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy minor revision number Z correction number or letter Example 190A revision 1 904 51 33 FBA appl SW ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy minor revision number z correction number or letter Example 190A revision 1 904 MA Application program version of adapter module m 52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transfered from drive to fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A Note 32 bit values require two consecutive parameters Whenever a 32 bit value is selected in a data parameter the next parameter is automati
360. status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DI3 10 10 DIS OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI3 See 0 0s parameter 70 09 DI3 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DI3 10 11 DI4 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DIA D status Mi ll Delayed DI status a us ton 10 11 D 4 ON delay tog 10 12 014 OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 70 07 DI status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for D14 10 12 14 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input 014 See 0 0 s parameter 10 11 DI4 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DI4 94 Parameters 10 13 DI5 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI5 Delayed DI status D status TT l lt gt lt gt lt gt toff ton torf ton 10 13 DI5 ON delay 10 14 DIS OFF delay Electrical status of digital input Indicated by 70 07 DI status Indicated by 10 02 DI delayed status 0 0 3000 0 s Activation delay for DI5 10 14 5 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI5 See 0 0 s parameter 10 13 DI5 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for DI5 10 15 DI6 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI6 D status TT l
361. t 0 Parameters 207 Digital input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 LN m Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 Digital input DI5 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Omer Sour selection see Terns and abbrevatons on page T 40 21 Internal setpoint 1 Process setpoint preset 1 See parameter 40 19 Internal m Digital input DI4 70 02 DI delayed status bit 3 setpoint selection 1 The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 92768 0 Process setpoint preset 1 1 1 unit 32767 0 40 22 Internal setpoint 2 Process setpoint preset 2 See parameter 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 92768 0 Process setpoint preset 2 1 1 unit 32767 0 40 23 Internal setpoint 3 Process setpoint preset 3 See parameter 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 92768 0 Process setpoint preset 3 1 1 unit 32767 0 40 24 Internal setpoint 4 Process setpoint preset 4 See parameter 40 19 Internal setpoint selection 1 The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection 32768 0 Process setpoint preset 4 1 32767 0 1 unit 40 25 Setpoint selection Configures the selection between setpoint sources 1 40 16 Off and 2 40 17 This parameter is only effective when parameter 40 18 Setpoint function is set to n1 or In2 0 Setpoint sour
362. t 3 DI5 Digital input DI5 70 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Dila input DIS 70 02 DI delayed status S 17 other i 40 41 Sleep mode is set to nternal 40 44 Sleep delay Defines a delay for the sleep function 60 0 s The delay timer starts when the sleep condition selected by parameter 40 41 Sleep mode becomes true and resets if the condition becomes false 0 0 3600 0 s Sleep start delay 40 45 Sleep boost time Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step See parameter 0 0 s 40 46 Sleep boost step 0 0 3600 0 s Sleep boost time 1 15 40 46 Sleep boost step When the drive is entering sleep mode the process setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 40 45 Sleep boost time If active sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up 0 0 32767 0 Sleep boost step 121 ol Bl wl n A o 212 Parameters 40 47 Wake up deviation Defines the wake up level as deviation between process setpoint and feedback The unit is selected by parameter 40 12 Unit selection When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter and remains there for the duration of the wake up delay 40 48 Wake up delay the drive wakes up See also parameter 40 31 Deviation inversion 2147483648 Wake up level as deviation between process setpoint and 1 1 unit 2147483647 feedback 40 48 Wake up delay Defines a wake up delay for the sleep function See 0 50 s
363. t 3 source 320 Fault tracing Code Cause What to do hex A984 A985 AF8C A External warning 4 Fault in external device 4 Check the external device Editable message text Check setting of parameter 31 07 Programmable warning External event 4 source 31 07 External event 4 source 31 08 External event 4 type External warning 5 Fault in external device 5 Check the external device Editable message text Check setting of parameter 37 09 Programmable warning External event 5 source 31 09 External event 5 source 31 10 External event 5 type Process PID sleep The drive is entering sleep Informative warning See section Sleep mode function for process PID control page 46 and parameters 40 41 40 48 FAA Autoreset A fault is about to be autoreset Informative warning See the settings in parameter group 31 Fault functions AFE1 AFE2 AFEA AFEB Emergency stop off2 Drive has received an Check that it is safe to continue emergency stop mode operation selection off2 command Return emergency stop push button to normal position Emergency stop off1 Drive has received an emergency stop mode Restart drive selection off1 or off3 command Enable start signal No enable start signal Check the setting of and the source missing received selected by parameter 20 19 Enable Editable message text start command Run enable missing No run enable signal is Check setting o
364. t RO1 See parameter 14 35 RO1 ON delay 0 0 3000 0 s Deactivation delay for RO2 14 41 AI2 actual value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage This parameter is read only 22 000 22 000 Value of analog input AI2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 42 AI2 scaled value Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling See parameter 14 50 Al2 scaled at Al2 min This parameter is read only 32768 000 Scaled value of analog input AI2 121 32767 000 14 43 12 force data Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input See parameter 74 22 Al force sel 22 000 22 000 Forced value of analog input AI2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 44 12 HW switch pos Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Shows the position of the hardware current voltage selector on the I O extension module Note The setting of the current voltage selector must match the unit selection made in parameter 14 45 A 2 unit selection I O module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings Parameters 117 14 45 Al2 unit selection Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects the
365. t for on time counter 2 f 33 22 On time 2 function Configures on time timer 2 This timer runs whenever the OOb signal selected by parameter 33 23 On time 2 source is on After the limit set by 33 27 On time 2 limit is reached the warning specified by 33 24 On time 2 warning select is given if enabled by this parameter and the timer reset The current value of the timer is readable from parameter 33 20 On time 2 actual Bit 1 of 33 01 Counter status indicates that the time has exceeded the limit Warning enable O Disable No warning is given when the limit is reached 1 Enable A warning is given when the limit is reached Counter mode O Loop If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active only for 10 seconds 1 Saturate If warning is enabled by bit 1 it stays active until reset ee CT o Other Source selection see Termo and abbreviations on peoe nl gt 33 24 On time 2 warning Selects the warning message for on time timer 2 On time 2 select On time 2 Pre selectable vvarning message for on time timer 2 1 Device lean PresecsewammgmesmeirovimeWmerz s mge Pre seletable wang message Por orme mer s Parameters 189 33 30 Edge counter 1 Reading of signal edge counter 1 Can be reset from the actual Drive composer PC tool or from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds 0 4294967295 Reading of signal edge counter 1 33 31 Edge counter 1 limit Sets the
366. t on the drive supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 0 800 0 Nominal voltage of the motor 10 1V 99 08 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor frequency 50 0 Hz frequency Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 0 500 0 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor 10 1 Hz Parameters 267 99 09 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor speed The setting must match the 0 rpm speed value on the rating plate of the motor Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 30000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor 99 10 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor power The setting must match the 0 00 kW power value on the rating plate of the motor If multiple motors are connected to the drive enter the total power of the motors Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 10000 00 Nominal power of the motor 1 1kW 10000 00 kW 99 11 Motor nominal cosfil Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model Not applicable to permanent magnet motors Not obligatory if set should match the value on the rating plate of the motor Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 00 1 00 Cosphi of the motor 100 1 99 12 Motor nominal Defines the n
367. t sel 0 0 120 0 s Autoreset delay 1021s 31 19 Motor phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is Fault detected 0 The drive trips on fault 3387 Output phase loss 1 1 31 20 Earth fault Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault or current Fault unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable No No action taken The drive trips on fault 2330 Earth leakage 2 The drive generates an A2B3 Earth leakage warning 31 21 Supply phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is Fault detected The drive trips on fault 3730 Input phase loss 1 31 22 STO Indication Selects which indications are given when one or both Safe Fault Fault run stop torque off STO signals are switched off or lost The indications also depend on whether the drive is running or stopped when this occurs The tables at each selection below show the indications generated with that particular setting Notes This parameter does not affect the operation of the STO function itself The STO function will operate regardless of the setting of this parameter a running drive will stop upon removal of one or both STO signals and will not start until both STO signals are restored and all faults reset The loss of only one STO signal always generates a fault as it is interpreted as a malfunction For more information on the STO see the Hardware manual of the drive r Indication running or stopped N1
368. ta 2147483 008 47 11 Data storage 1 Data storage parameter 9 int32 2147483648 32 bit data 2147483647 47 12 Data storage 2 Data storage parameter 10 int32 2147483648 32 bit data 2147483647 226 Parameters No Name Value 47 13 Data storage 3 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 14 Data storage 4 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 15 Data storage 5 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 16 Data storage 6 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 17 Data storage 7 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 16 Data storage 6 int32 2147483648 2147483647 47 21 Data storage 1 int16 32768 32767 47 22 Data storage 2 int16 32768 32767 47 23 Data storage 3 int16 32768 32767 47 24 Data storage 4 int16 32768 32767 47 25 Data storage 5 int16 32768 32767 47 26 Data storage 6 int16 32768 32767 47 27 Data storage 7 int16 32768 32767 47 26 Data storage 6 int16 32768 32767 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 18 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 19 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 20 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 21 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 22 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 23 16 bit data 121 Data storage parameter 24 16 bit data 121 Parameters 227 N O 49 Panel port Communication settings for the control panel p
369. tal input DI2 70 02 DI delayed status bit 1 Digital input DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 2 77 15 705 0177 68 70 02 Di delayed status bkdy s 7002 D deleyed R T Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 20 24 Negative speed Selects the source of the negative speed reference enable reference enable command See parameter 20 23 Positive speed reference enable 10 11 On Parameters 139 20 25 Jogging enable Selects the source for enabling parameters 20 26 Jogging 1 1 Off start and 20 27 Jogging 2 start 1 Jogging is enabled 0 Jogging is disabled Note Jogging can be enabled using this parameter only when no start command from an external control location is active On the other hand if jogging is already enabled the drive cannot be started from an external control location apart from jog commands through fieldbus IC CO KM Digital input DI5 10 02 DI delayed status bit 4 bis iat nat 16 7002 RR R Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 20 26 Jogging 1 start If enabled by parameter 20 25 Jogging enable selects the Off source for the activation of jogging function 1 Jogging function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20 25 1 Active Notes e The jogging functions can only be used in speed and frequency scalar control e This parameter cannot be
370. ter sets control unit reboot 97 Motor control Switching frequency slip gain voltage reserve flux braking 262 signal injection IR compensation 98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor bul model 99 Motor data Motor configuration settings 265 64 Parameters Parameter listing 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive All parameters in this group are read only unless otherwise noted 01 01 Motor speed used Measured or estimated motor speed depending on which type of feedback is used see parameter 90 41 Motor feedback selection A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46 11 Filter time motor speed 30000 00 Measured or estimated motor speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 01 02 Motor speed Estimated motor speed in rpm A filter time constant for this estimated signal can be defined by parameter 46 11 Filter time motor speed 30000 00 Estimated motor speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 01 04 Encoder 1 speed Speed of encoder 1 in rpm A filter time constant for this filtered signal can be defined by parameter 46 17 Filter time motor speed 30000 00 Encoder 1 speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 01 01 05 Encoder 2 speed Speed of encoder 2 in rpm A filter time constant for this signal filtered can be defined by parameter 46 11 Filter time motor speed 30000 00 Encoder 2 speed See par 30000 00 rpm 46 0
371. ters 165 Sub The subtraction 26 11 Torque ref1 selection 26 12 Torque ref2 selection of the reference sources is used as torque 2 reference 1 Mul The multiplication of the reference sources is used as torque 3 reference 1 Min The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque 4 reference 1 Max The greater of the reference sources is used as torque 5 reference 1 26 14 Torque ref1 2 Configures the selection between torque references 1 and 2 Torque selection The sources of the references are defined by parameters reference 1 26 11 Torque ref1 selection and 26 12 Torque ref2 selection respectively O Torque reference 1 1 Torque reference 2 Torque reference 1 Other bit Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 26 15 Load share Defines the scaling factor for the torque reference the torque 1 000 reference is multiplied by the value 8 000 8 000 Torque reference scaling factor 1000 1 26 16 Torque additive 1 Selects the source for torque reference additive 1 Zero Source Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when an emergency stop is active See the control chain diagram on page 354 D2D or M F 03 13 M F or D2D ref1 see page 86 reference 1 D2D or M F 03 14 M F or D2D ref2 see page 86 12 reference 2 40 01 Process PID actual value output of the process PID 15 controller Other The value is taken from another parameter 26 17 To
372. the RDCO board instead of CH2 With ZCU based drives the channel on the FDCO communication module can be freely selected T Transmitter R Receiver Communication The communication between the controller and the drive consists of data sets of three 16 bit words each The controller sends a data set to the drive which returns the next data set to the controller The communication uses data sets 10 33 Data sets with even numbers are sent by the controller to the drive while data sets with odd numbers are sent by the drive to the controller The contents of the data sets are freely configurable but data set 10 typically contains the control word and one or two references while data set 11 returns the status word and selected actual values The word that is defined as the control word is internally connected to the drive logic the coding of the bits is as presented in section Contents of the fieldbus Control word page 339 Likewise the coding of the status word is as shown in section Contents of the fieldbus Status word page 340 Data sets 32 and 33 are dedicated for mailbox use they can be used for setting or inquiring parameter values as follows 34 Program features Controller ACS880 Parameter vvrite to drive Transmit address Value 1901 Transmit data Value 1234 Transmit address feedback Value 1901 Parameter read from drive Inquire address Value 2403 Inquired data Value 4300 Inquire
373. the integrator if the controller output is limited The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value v Time 0 00 1000 00 s Integration time for speed controller 160 Parameters 25 04 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller Derivative 0 000 s action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Ky Tp x 2S 4 p Ts Boxe Error value A ta B III I Kp X lt e Error value M J T Time Gain Kp 1 T Integration time gt Tpz Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 250 us Ae Error value change between two samples Note Changing this parameter value is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used 0 000 10000 000 Derivation time for
374. the manual What this chapter contains rns 11 ADDIICADIIL E s uso ste dass ecu presea eras BB SN AT Sd 11 Safety INSWUCHONG z a aaisan RUN i ERe9 3x a a godere ES Rud ad E 11 Target audience s arcos yanl kek ze acm RU RO RIPE de EE Ru R oes 11 Contents of the manual se e Rd Re K ane S9 BE dne depa UE ER Bu D 99599 9 99 8 5 12 Related documents 12 Terms and abbreviations les 222 12 2 Using the control panel 3 Control locations and operating modes What this chapter contains 17 Local control vs external control 18 Eses CONTO NEE 18 External control enn rra as a Ra 19 Operating modes of the drive aaaea 20 Speed control mode 20 Torque control mode 21 Frequency control mode 21 Special control modes 21 4 Program features VVhat this chapter contains 23 Drive configuration and programming 24 Programming via parameters 24 Application programming s zc aue 777 777777
375. tion See the Ge chain diagram on page 354 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Value of torque reference source 2 46 03 26 72 Torque ref3 actual Displays the torque reference after the function applied by parameter 26 13 Torque ref1 function if any and after selection 26 14 Torque ref1 2 selection See the control chain diagram on page 354 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference after selection 46 03 26 73 Torque ref4 actual Displays the torque reference after application of reference additive 1 See the control chain diagram on page 354 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference after application of reference additive 1 46 03 26 74 Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping See the control chain diagram on page 354 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference after limiting and ramping 46 03 26 75 Torque ref5 actual 1 Displays the torque reference after control mode selection See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference after control mode selection 46 03 26 76 Torque ref6 actual Displays the torque reference after application of reference additive 2 See the control chain diagram on page 356 This parameter is read only 1600 0 1600 0 Torque reference after application of reference additive 2 46
376. tions for the Hand Auto macro 22222 2222 69 PIO CONTO MAC rosada errata ets cr 7 70 Default parameter settings for the PID control macro lll 71 Default control connections for the PID control macro 72 Sensor connection examples 73 Torque control macro 14 Default parameter settings for the Torque control macro 74 Default control connections for the Torque control macro 75 Sequential control macro eere 76 Operation diagram 76 selection of constant speeds eras 77 Default parameter settings for the Sequential control macro 77 Default control connections for the Sequential control Macro 78 Fieldbus control macro 79 Table of contents 7 6 Parameters What this chapter contains Rss 81 Terms and abbreviations x uc ee eee eee een rar WES E EE muz ER EE RR 81 Summary of parameter groups 82 Parameter listing d unm ad al e a E a a a e ER CR a 84 17771 E got ous o eee hehehe Hes ene 454 eee rr iaa sas 84 03 Input referenc s iz vogue 0005000077 85 04 Warnings and fa
377. to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp 23 21 Dec time jogging One push button can be used to start and stop the drive during jogging The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to control the machinery locally Jogging functions 1 and 2 are activated by a parameter The jogging function can also be activated through eg fieldbus or application program see 06 01 Main control word bits 8 9 but then the jogging acceleration deceleration ramps mentioned above will not be observed Program features 39 The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive during jogging Note that they cannot be directly applied to jogging commands through fieldbus as those require no enable signal see parameter 20 25 Jogging enable They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input 20 26 Jogging 1 start or 20 27 Jogging 2 start Jog enable State of the source set by 20 25 Jogging enable Start cmd State of the drive start command Speed 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Jog Jog Start Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function ERE Drive runs at the jogging speed Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function Drive is stopped 5 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along
378. trol location EXT1 22 11 Speed ref1 selection 14 FB A rer Selects fieldbus A reference 1 as the source for speed reference 1 1 Read only or automatically detected set 2 Example The start sequence for the parameter example above is given below Control word e 47Eh 1150 decimal gt READY TO SWITCH ON e 47Fh 1151 decimal gt OPERATING Speed mode Drive to drive link 345 Drive to drive link This feature is not supported by the current firmware version 346 Drive to drive link Control chain diagrams 347 Control chain diagrams What this chapter contains The chapter presents the reference chains of the drive For a general diagram see section Operating modes of the drive page 20 348 Control chain diagrams Speed reference source selection joe G e2ueJojoJ peeds Gg zz 39 y eoueueje1 peeds 9g zz amea p ds 9122 joe eoueJojeJ peeds 8 zz ye y peeds 7822 eneA a uomers Zie p ds Ice uonoajes uonoejes 2 p ds rL zz joe z peeds z9 zz 106 e2u849jJoJ pasds L ze a uonsajag uonounj je peeds 6122 eneA uomers lue peeds cL ZZ uos uonoajes zjeJ peeds 2122 a uonoers uon f s Lal p ds 1 zz es BuribbBor 9z0z Control chain diagrams 349 CNV L
379. trol unit 1 96 10 User set status Shows the status of the user parameter sets This parameter is read only See also section User parameter sets page 64 n a No user parameter sets have been saved Loading A user set is being loaded Saving A user set is being saved Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set User lO active User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96 12 User set IO sel in and 96 13 User set lO sel in2 User2 lO active User set 2 has been selected by parameters 96 12 User set 15 IO sel in1 and 96 13 User set lO sel in2 User3 lO active User set 3 has been selected by parameters 96 12 User set IO sel in and 96 13 User set lO sel in2 IO sel in and 96 13 User set lO sel in2 Parameters 261 96 11 User set save load Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power up Notes e Some hardware configuration settings such as I O extension module fieldbus adapter and encoder configuration parameters groups 14 16 50 56 and 90 93 respectively are not part of the user parameter sets Parameter changes made after loading a set are not automatically stored they must be saved using this parameter Noaction action Load or save operation LN normal operation rt sel in and 96 13 User set lO sel in2 et tement D ett Load userparameterset O
380. ts Adaptive voltage limits can be used if for example an IGBT supply unit is used to raise the DC voltage level If the communication between the inverter and IGBT supply unit is active the voltage limits are fixed to the DC voltage reference from the IGBT supply unit Otherwise the limits are calculated based on the measured DC voltage at the end of the pre charging sequence 95 04 Control board Specifies how the control unit of the drive is powered Internal 24V supply Internal 24V The drive control unit is powered from the drive power unit it is connected to This is the default setting External 24V The drive control unit is powered from an external power supply 258 Parameters 95 08 Forced charging Enables disables DC switch monitoring via the DIIL input Disable enable This setting is intended for use with inverter modules with an internal charging circuit that are connected to the DC bus through a DC switch An auxiliary contact of the DC switch must be wired to the DIIL input so that the input switches off when the DC switch is opened Charging Charging logic contactor If the DC switch is opened with the inverter running the inverter is given a coast to stop command and its charging circuit activated Starting the inverter is prevented until the DC switch is closed and the DC circuit in the inverter unit recharged Note An internal charging circuit is standard on some inverter module types but optional on others
381. ttings of parameter groups 50 PLC or requested functionality Fieldbus adapter FBA and 51 FBA A has not been activated settings A parametrization The current voltage jumper Adjust either the jumper setting on the setting of an analog input does drive control unit or parameter not correspond to parameter 12 15 12 25 settings Note Control board reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings A780 Motor stall Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings Programmable warning region because of e g Check fault function parameters 31 24 Stall function excessive load or insufficient motor power A782 FEN temperature Error in temperature Check that parameter 35 11 Supervision measurement when 1 source 35 21 Supervision 2 source temperature sensor KTY or setting corresponds to actual encoder PTC connected to encoder interface installation interface FEN xx is used Error in temperature FEN 01 does not support temperature measurement when KTY measurement with KTY sensor Use PTC sensor connected to encoder sensor or other encoder interface interface FEN 01 is used module A791 Brake resistor Brake resistor broken or not Check that a brake resistor has been connected connected Check the condition of the brake resistor 316 Fault tracing Code Cause What to do hex AT93 BR excess Brake r
382. typically connected to one drive only which acts as the master The master controls up to 10 followers by sending broadcast messages over a fiber optic serial communication link The master can read feedback signals from up to 3 selected followers Speed controlled master Process master Process follovver For example i que or speed mi x controlled follovver Speed reference Torque reference Master follower link soad DDCS For example Status word 01 01 Motor speed used 01 10 Motor torque Fieldbus control External control system eg PLC Parameter 60 03 M F mode defines whether the drive is the master or a follower on the communication link Typically the speed controlled process master drive is also configured as the master in the communication The master drive is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow its torque or speed reference In general a follower should be e torque controlled when the motor shafts of the master and the follower are rigidly coupled by gearing chain etc so that no speed difference between the drives is possible e speed controlled when the motor shafts of the master and the follower are flexibly coupled so that a slight speed difference is possible When both the master and the follower are speed controlled drooping is also typically used see parameter 25 08 Drooping rate Program features 29 In some applications both spee
383. ult Load feedback selection 90 54 Load gear denominator Real 2147483648 2147483647 1 ms 1 1 90 56 Load position offset 32768 32767 1 1 rev 1 1 90 61 Gear numerator Real 2147483648 121 2147483647 90 62 Gear denominator Real 2147483648 2147483647 90 63 Feed constant numerator Real 2147483648 121 2147483647 90 64 Feed constant denominator Real 2147483648 121 2147483647 91 Encoder module settings 91 01 FEN DI status PB 000000b 111111b o d 1 1 O 91 04 Module 1 temperature 0 1000 91 06 Module 2 temperature 0 1000 91 12 Module 1 location 1 254 m LA O O D Q Q O m o Q D N a E Lu Type Range List Real List Real Real List Real Real 91 13 Module 2 type 91 14 91 21 91 22 91 23 PTC filtering 1 91 24 Temperature meas sel2 gt NO NO T o Module 2 location 254 l II II ala II MES Temperature meas sel1 0 10000 0 65535 Temperature filtering time 1 S 1 1 ms x II II 0 10000 0 65535 91 25 1 Temperature filtering time 2 1 1 ms 91 26 filtering 2 II N m 5 o o o o o o 5 c o p o 5 92 01 92 02 1151 92 03 1151 Other parameters in this group when parameter 92 01 Encoder 1 type TTL or HTL 92 10 Pulses revolution Real 0 65535 75 92 11 1 Pulse encoder type List 92 12 Speed calculation
384. ults 86 100000 m eee anada ol eee eee RE 87 06 Control and status wordS Luise adaseds use ES YU ER pee Ee bbe OSES ees 88 075777 V 91 IA eg ee ea He s ORS ES ee om 91 11 Standard DIO FA FO voce hk ed E NEEN oe ee E dew www we Ee OE eee 96 12 Standard Al escurrir daa RECS Rog Seg dU 102 e lee e AD RR 104 14 I O extension module 1 ud ud ui orem ad die sos EE Wh ERE a 108 15 I O extension module 2 124 16 I O extension module 3 s se E acra RE m ba za koda 127 19 Operation P 130 7777707070 7 rm 132 Yar Berr ere Tree MOQO m 140 22 Speed reference selection 145 23 Speed reference ramp Lus uec A e ee a ee doo 151 24 Speed reference conditioning 155 25 OO CONVOI a kd b b ee Bee aa can 158 26 Torque reference chain use uec NN N r 164 28 Frequency reference chain tees 168 2 77 sonora caras b ra sy ssas ras res e ale ya 175 JI EE ENEE rm 177 32 Supervision ce a ee ee 183 33 Maintenance timer Counter 187 35 Motor thermal protection PP 193 JD Load analyzef ceases ee cheb ee 7 aa Be OR ex 200 40 Frocess PID Sel in ale a er Dr 203 di ele TEE EE TT
385. unit 12 only Slot 3A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 3 with ZCU control unit 13 only Slot 1B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 1 with ZCU control unit 4 only Slot 2B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 2 with ZCU control unit 15 only Slot 3B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 3 with ZCU control unit MH only RDCO CH2 Channel 2 on RDCO module with BCU control unit only 60 02 M F node address Selects the node address of the drive for master follower 1 communication No two nodes on line may have the same address Note The allowable addresses for the master are 0 and 1 The allowable addresses for followers are 2 60 1 254 Node address 7 234 Parameters 60 05 M F HW connection Star Ring The devices are connected in a ring topology Forwarding of messages is enabled Star The devices are connected in a star topology for example through a branching unit Forwarding of messages is disabled 60 07 M F link control Defines the light intensity of the transmission LEDs O In general use higher values with longer fiber optic cables The maximum setting is applicable to the maximum length of the fiber optic link See Specifications of the master follower link page 32 60 08 M F comm loss Sets a timeout for master follower communication If a 4 ms timeout communication break lasts longer than the timeout the action specified by parameter 60 09 M F comm loss function is tak
386. unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI2 Note This setting must match the corresponding hardware setting on the I O extension module see the manual of the 3 or Bi Col Mil 5 I O extension module The hardware setting is shown by parameter 14 44 AI2 HW switch pos VO module reboot either by cycling the power or through parameter 96 08 Control board boot is required to validate any changes in the jumper settings 14 46 AI2 filter gain Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 Selects a hardware filtering time for AI2 See also parameter 14 47 AI2 filter time No filtering 14 47 Al2 filter time Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 100 s Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2 20 Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 _ ef filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware See parameter 14 46 AI2 filter gain 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 15 118 Parameters 14 48 AI2 min Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 0 000 mA or Defines the minimum value for analog input AI2 V See also parameter 14 21 Al tune 22 000 22 000 1 Minimum value of Al2 1000 1 mA mA or V or V 14 49 AI2 max Visible when 14 01 Module 1 type FIO 11 10 000 mA or Defines the maximum value for analog input Al2 V See also parameter 14 2
387. ur local ABB representative 6306 FBA A mapping file Fieldbus adapter A mapping Contact your local ABB representative file read error 6481 Task overload Internal fault Contact your local ABB representative Note This fault cannot be reset 6487 Stack overflow Internal fault Contact your local ABB representative Note This fault cannot be reset 64A1 Internal file load File read error Contact your local ABB representative Note This fault cannot be reset 64A2 Internal record load Internal record load error Contact your local ABB representative Application loading Application file incompatible or Contact your local ABB representative corrupted Note This fault cannot be reset O ER S RR amp 64B2 User set fault Loading of user parameter set Ensure that a valid user parameter set failed because exists Reload requested set does not exist set is not compatible with control program drive was switched off during loading 64E1 Kernel overload Operating system error Contact your local ABB representative Note This fault cannot be reset 6581 1 Parameter system Parameter load or save failed Try forcing a save using parameter 96 07 Parameter save Retry FBA A parameter The drive does not have a Check PLC programming conflict functionality requested by Check settings of parameter groups 50 O C1 PLC or requested functionality Fieldbus adapter FBA and
388. urce is an encoder interface check parameter settings in groups 91 Encoder module settings 92 Encoder 1 configuration and 93 Encoder 2 configuration Check status of fieldbus communication See user documentation of fieldbus interface Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter FBA 51 FBA A settings 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out Check cable connections Check if communication master is able to communicate Check status of controller See user documentation of controller Check settings of parameter group 60 D2D and DDCS communication Check cable connections f necessary replace cables 328 Fault tracing Code hex FA81 FA82 MF comm loss Programmable fault 60 09 M F comm loss function Signal supervision Editable message text Programmable fault 32 06 Supervision 1 action 32 16 Supervision 2 action 32 26 Supervision 3 action External fault 1 Editable message text Programmable fault 31 01 External event 1 source 31 02 External event 1 type External fault 2 Editable message text Programmable fault 31 03 External event 2 source 31 04 External event 2 type External fault 3 Editable message text Programmable fault 37 05 External event 3 source 31 06 External event 3 type External fault 4 Editable message text Programmable fault 31 07 External event 4 source 31 08 External event 4 type External fault 5 Editable message text
389. ux braking is disabled Moderate Flux level is limited during the braking Deceleration time is 1 longer compared to full braking Full Maximum braking power Almost all available current is used 12 to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy in the motor 97 06 Flux reference Defines the source of flux reference User flux select reference User flux reference Parameter 97 07 User flux reference 1 Parameters 263 reference select is set to User flux reference User defined flux reference 100 1 97 10 Signal injection Enables signal injection a high frequency alternating signal is Disabled injected to the motor in the low speed region to improve the stability of torque control Signal injection can be enabled with different amplitude levels Notes e Use as low a level as possible that gives satisfactory performance e Signal injection cannot be applied to asynchronous motors Disabled Signal injection disabled Enabled 20 Signal injection enabled with amplitude level of 20 97 11 TR tuning Rotor time constant tuning 00 This parameter can be used to improve torque accuracy in closed loop control of an induction motor Normally the motor identification run provides sufficient torque accuracy but manual fine tuning can be applied in exceptionally demanding applications to achieve optimal performance 25 400 Rotor time constant tuning 1 1 97 13 IR compensation Defines the re
390. value Other Sometimes the value can be fixed to O false or 1 true In addition the parameter may offer other pre selected settings Data parameter FbEq32 32 bit fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in fieldbus communication when a 32 bit value s selected in parameter group 52 FBA A data in or 53 FBA A data out The corresponding 16 bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters page 81 Selection list 272 Additional parameter data Packed Boolean bit list Iae 000 Parameter type See Analog src Binary src List PB Real Fieldbus addresses Refer to the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter Parameter groups 1 9 wl me We Range Um Pe 01 Actual values 01 01 Motor speed used 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 01 02 Motor speed estimated 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 01 04 Encoder 1 speed filtered 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 01 05 Encoder 2 speed filtered 30000 00 30000 00 100 1 rpm 01 06 Output frequency 500 00 500 00 100 1 Hz 01 07 Motor current 0 00 30000 00 100 1A 01 10 1600 0 1600 0 10 196 01 11 0 00 2000 00 100 2 1 V 01 14 32768 00 32767 00 01 18 0 65535 1 1 GWh 01 19 0 999 1 1 MWh 01 20 0 999 kWh 1 1 kWh 01 24 0 200 1 1 01 30 Nem 1000 1 Nem 01 31 32768 0 32767 0 je 10 1 C 03 Input references 03 01 100000 00 100000 00 03 03 Et
391. values REFx MIN and REFx MAX are set by parameters 46 01 46 04 which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 50 04 FBA A ref1 type and 50 05 FBA A ref2 type Fieldbus _ Drive REF2 10000 REF1 20000 SIONIS 0 0 REF1 20000 The scaled references are shown by parameters 03 05 FB A reference 1 and 03 06 FB A reference 2 338 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter Actual values Actual values are 16 bit words containing information on the operation of the drive The types of the monitored signals are selected by parameters 50 07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50 08 FBA A actual 2 type If parameter 50 12 FBA A debug enable is set to Enable the actual values sent to the fieldbus are displayed by 50 17 FBA A actual value 1 and 50 18 FBA A actual value 2 Scaling of actual values The actual values are scaled as shown below The values REFx MIN and REFx MAX are set by parameters 46 01 46 04 which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 50 04 and 50 05 Fieldbus 8 Drive ACT2 10000 ACT1 20000 0 0 ACT 20000 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 339 Contents of the fieldbus Control word The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram page STATE Description GE control G eg Td Proceed to READY TO OPERATE Stop along currently active d
392. vates constant speed 1 When bit O of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 22 23 Constant speed sel2 and 22 24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows by par 22 22 by par 22 23 by par 22 24 ap 9 9 oe IL 9 Cotispedi pa 1 Constant speed 1 Constant speeds 9 0 1 Constant speed a ott Constant speeds 7 4 T Constant speed 7 9 E Digital input DI1 10 02 DI delayed status bit 0 Digital input DI3 10 02 DI delayed status bit 2 De ital input 6 7002 Dr delayed ats BRB r 7 148 Parameters No Name Value DIO2 Other bit 22 23 Constant speed sel2 22 24 Constant speed sel3 22 26 Constant speed 1 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 27 Constant speed 2 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 28 Constant speed 3 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 29 Constant speed 4 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 30 Constant speed 5 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 31 Constant speed 6 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 32 Constant speed 7 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 41 Speed ref safe 30000 00 30000 00 rpm 22 42 Jogging 1 ref 30000 00 30000 00 rpm Digital input output DIO2 11 02 DIO delayed status bit 1 11 Source selection see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 When bit 0 of parameter 22 21 Constant speed function is Off Separate
393. ve and decreases if it operates in the region below the load curve if the motor is overheated WARNING The model cannot protect the motor if it does not cool properly because of dust dirt etc 60 100 C Ambient temperature 198 Parameters 35 51 Motor load curve Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35 52 100 Zero speed load and 35 53 Break point The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model to estimate the motor temperature When the parameter is set to 100 the maximum load is equal to the value of parameter 99 06 Motor nominal current higher loads heat up the motor The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value UN 96 Motor current In Nominal motor current 150 100 50 35 52 30 0 Drive output frequency 50 150 Maximum load for the motor load curve 35 52 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35 57 100 Motor load curve and 35 53 Break point Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the cooling See the motor manufacturer s recommendations See parameter 35 51 Motor load curve 50 150 Zero speed load for the motor load curve 35 53 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35 57 45 00 Hz Motor load curve and 35 52 Zero speed load Defines t
394. w the deceleration rate If the deceleration rate is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that DC overvoltage control is on parameter 30 30 Overvoltage control Note If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor 0 000 1800 000 s Deceleration time 1 23 14 Acceleration time 2 Defines acceleration time 2 See parameter 23 12 20 000 s Acceleration time 1 0 000 1800 000 s Acceleration time 2 23 15 Deceleration time 2 Defines deceleration time 2 See parameter 23 13 20 000 s Deceleration time 1 0 000 1800 000 s Deceleration time 2 Parameters 153 23 16 Shape time acc 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the beginning 1 0 0 s of the acceleration 0 000 s Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps 0 001 1000 000 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between Acceleration Linear ramp 23 17 s Speed Linear ramp 23 16 05 S curve ramp 23 17 05 S curve ramp 23 16 05 Deceleration Speed S curve ramp e 23 18 05 Linear ramp 23 1
395. will not start Switching the signal off while the drive is running will not stop the drive NNNM on EA on b 013 7 7 DI3 70 02 DI delayed status bit 13 015 7 5 DI5 02 DI delayed status bit 4 Other il 138 Parameters 20 23 Positive speed Selects the source of the positive speed enable command On reference enable 1 Positive speed enabled 0 Positive speed interpreted as zero speed reference In the figure below 23 01 Speed ref ramp in is set to zero after the positive speed enable signal has cleared Actions in different control modes Speed control Speed reference is set to zero and the motor is stopped along the currently active deceleration ramp The rush controller prevents additional torque terms from running the motor in the positive direction Torque control The rush controller monitors the rotation direction of the motor 20 23 Positive speed reference enable 20 24 Negative speed reference enable 23 01 Speed ref ramp in 01 01 Motor speed used Example The motor is rotating in the forward direction To stop the motor the positive speed enable signal is deactivated by a hardware limit switch e g via digital input If the positive speed enable signal remains deactivated and the negative speed enable signal is active only reverse rotation of the motor is allowed SSES Digital input DI1 70 02 DI delayed status bit 0 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Digi
396. y the brake control logic Upon opening the brake the drive trips on a 77143 Mechanical brake opening failed fault if the status of the acknowledgement does not match the status presumed by the brake control logic The drive trips on a 71A5 Mechanical brake opening not allowed fault if the brake open conditions cannot be fulfilled for example the required motor starting torque is not achieved Parameters 221 44 18 Brake fault delay Defines a close fault delay ie time between brake closure 0 00 s and brake close fault trip 0 00 60 00 s Brake close fault delay 45 Energy efficiency Settings of the energy savings calculator See also section Energy savings calculator page 61 45 01 Saved GW hours Energy saved in GWh compared to direct on line motor connection This parameter is incremented when 45 02 Saved MW hours rolls over This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 65535 GWh Energy savings in GWh 1 1GWh 45 02 Saved MW hours Energy saved in MWh compared to direct on line motor connection This parameter is incremented when 45 03 Saved kW hours rolls over When this parameter rolls over parameter 45 01 Saved GW hours is incremented This parameter is read only see parameter 45 21 Energy calculations reset 0 999 MWh Energy savings in MWh 1 1 MVVh 45 03 Saved kVV hours Energy saved in kVVh compared to direct on line motor connection If the internal braking cho
397. y voltage range For 500 V AC supply voltage range 1 25 x Ubcmax For 500 V AC supply voltage range 1 20 x Ubcmax Program features 55 Settings Parameters 01 11 DC voltage page 84 30 30 Overvoltage control page 177 30 31 Undervoltage control page 177 and 95 01 Supply voltage page 257 Brake chopper A brake chopper can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating motor When the DC voltage rises high enough the chopper connects the DC circuit to an external brake resistor The chopper operates on the pulse width modulation principle The internal brake choppers of ACS880 drives start conducting when the DC link voltage reaches approximately 1 15 x Upcma 100 pulse width is reached at approximately 1 2 x Upcmax Upcmax S the DC voltage corresponding to the maximum of the AC supply voltage range For information on external brake choppers refer to their documentation Settings Parameter 01 11 DC voltage page 84 parameter group 43 Brake chopper page 215 56 Program features Safety and protections Emergency stop The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter 27 05 Emergency stop source The mode of the emergency stop is selected by parameter 21 04 Emergency stop mode An emergency stop can also be generated through a fieldbus parameter 06 07 Main control word bits 0 2 Notes e The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the eme
398. zero position of the position sensor Notes e The value is in electrical degrees The electrical angle equals the mechanical angle multiplied by the number of motor pole pairs This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors 0 360 Angle offset 121 99 Motor data Motor configuration settings mE 99 03 Motor type Selects the motor type Asynchro Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is nous motor running Asynchronous Asynchronous induction motor 5 motor Permanent magnet 1 Permanent magnet motor Three phase AC synchronous motor motor vvith permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF voltage 266 Parameters 99 04 Motor ctrl mode Selects the motor control mode DTC Direct torque control This mode is suitable for most applications Note Instead of direct torque control use scalar control with multimotor applications 1 if the load is not equally shared betvveen the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification ID run if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive if the drive is used with no motor connected for example for test purposes Scalar Scalar control The outstanding motor control accuracy of 1 DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode Note Correct motor run requires th

EN / ACS880 primary control program firmware manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents